JP2022118189A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To allow a player to easily recognize characters or the like attached to a title display part such that the player who sees the title display part does not feel dazzled.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 500 includes: a right frame lamp part 620; and a title display part 615 that emits light in a shape of characters or the like. The right frame lamp part 620 and the title display part 615 each include a light diffusion part for diffusing light emitted by LEDs. A light diffusion ratio of the light diffusion part of the title display part 615 is set higher than a light diffusion ratio of the light diffusion part of the right frame lamp part 620. Luminance adjustment means 546 is configured so as to allow a change ratio of the luminance of LEDs in the title display part 615 to be larger than a change ratio of the luminance of the right frame lamp part 620 when changing the luminance of LEDs in the right frame lamp part 620 and the title display part 615.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 135

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-described problems by the following solutions (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The present invention corresponds to the original invention 31 among the original inventions 1 to 38 described later.
The present invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side portion of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the game machine and emits light in the form of letters or the like,
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion;
luminance adjusting means (546) for adjusting the luminance of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjustment means adjusts the rate of change of the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section when changing the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section. It is characterized in that the change rate of luminance of the light emitting element of a predetermined side lamp portion is made larger than that of the light emitting element.

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in this embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view for explaining how a medal inserted from the medal slot passes through an insertion sensor in the present embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when power failure occurs in the first embodiment (A), using a time chart. In the first embodiment (B), it is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals. In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining ON/OFF of an injection|throwing-in sensor with a time chart. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when medals are discharged from the medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram showing the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when medals are delivered from the medal payout device. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows the on/off of a payout sensor with a time chart. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing an outline of a main control board and a board case in the second embodiment; In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case containing a main control board. (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate mark. (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A--A showing example 2 of gate traces. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, (b) is when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state when the stop button is pushed all the way down, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor turns off from on. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excitation state of the motor in a time chart, (a) shows example 1, (b) shows example 2. FIG. 12A and 12B are time charts showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage levels in the fifth embodiment, where (a) shows power off after starting the main program, and (b) shows before starting the main program. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before contact with the movable shaft and a state in which the hopper disc has advanced in rotation from (a). In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a movable medal pushed by the last discharged medal. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the token payout device showing the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view showing the state after the last ejected medal is ejected. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the token payout device showing a state where the rotation of the hopper disc is stopped; FIG. 14 is a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal for the hopper motor, the drive state of the hopper motor, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge unit in the sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the drive state of the hopper motor, the detection state of the payout sensor, and the ejection timing of the medals in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board; FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. 12C is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitors on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special bonuses (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation determination table used in common by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing Example 2 of test pattern display of management information display LEDs in the tenth embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. is. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing output ports in the eleventh embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals. Also, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the concept of a difference counter value, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2; 4 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board; FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. In FIG. 41, it is a flow chart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous area transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44; FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing Example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR); FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53; FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453. 29 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 56 . In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the role condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is the front view, the top view, and the right view which show the outline|summary of a structure containing the reel and stop switch in 13th Embodiment. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (A). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (B); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (C); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (D). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (D). FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (E); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (E). FIG. 32 is a front view showing an outline of a configuration including a reel, an operation instruction lamp and a stop switch in the fourteenth embodiment (F); 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (F). FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (F); FIG. 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of the pressing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum playing time has elapsed in the fourteenth embodiment (G). 20 is a time chart showing timings of starting and ending display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum playing time elapses in the fourteenth embodiment (G). FIG. 22 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C). FIG. 21 is a schematic front view of a medal selector, a shoot path 48, and a shoot sensor 49 in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of a passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a rear view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a left side view of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing main RWM storage areas described in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 1) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a time chart (example 2) showing output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 344 ; FIG. 20 is a flowchart (example 2) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart (example 3) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the nineteenth embodiment (A); 19 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front side (player side). It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back side. It is a block diagram in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart for explaining the flow of startup after power-on of the pachinko gaming machine. 101 is a flowchart showing setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. 100; It is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko game machine. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side; FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side; FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case; FIG. 4 is a front view of a state in which a main control board is housed in a board case, viewed from the front side; FIG. 4 is a front view of the state in which the main control board is accommodated in the board case, viewed from the rear (rear) side; FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view showing a fitted state of an upper case and a lower case, where (a) shows a temporary fitted state (before sliding movement) and (b) shows a final fitting state (after sliding movement); . FIG. 10 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall seen from the side of the lower case in the temporarily fitted state; FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a state in which a harness is connected to a connector of the main control board; It is a front view which shows harness and its connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire regarding starting. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case of the substrate case, the cover, the setting key insertion opening, and the setting change (reset) switch. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a twenty-third embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the twenty-third embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 20 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a right side perspective view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is an enlarged front top view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is an enlarged top perspective view of the right base member, viewed from the left side, with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of the upper left side surface of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, according to the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper portion of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 120 is an enlarged sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 119; 117 is a front view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp substrate removed in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 116; FIG. FIG. 20 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 23 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion of the right frame lamp cover in the twenty-third embodiment; In the 23rd embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 1 when losing in the pachinko game machine, and (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 when losing in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system in the twenty-third embodiment; FIG. 119 is a view showing a modification of the AA cross section of FIG. 119, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 123; FIG. 32 is an external perspective view of a slot machine in a modified example of the twenty-third embodiment, viewed from the front side (player's side); In the modification of the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing effect pattern 1 when no win is made in the slot machine, and (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 when no win is made in the slot machine. is. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). It is an exploded perspective view of a portion of the title display portion of the pachinko gaming machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) as seen from the front side (player side). It is a block diagram of a pachinko game machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), (1) is a diagram showing the display contents of the menu screen, and (2) is a diagram showing the display contents of the luminance adjustment mode. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level from level 1 to level 5 and the luminance of each LED in the title display portion, the right frame lamp portion, and the left frame lamp portion in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A); FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level from level 1 to level 5 and the luminance of each LED in the title display portion, the right frame lamp portion, and the left frame lamp portion in the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A); It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). FIG. 22 is a front view of the slot machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B); FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the front door of the slot machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side); FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the right frame lamp portion of the slot machine according to the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side); In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing a texturing portion formed on the surface of a lens portion of a title display portion, and (2) is a view of a lens portion of a right frame lamp portion. It is a figure which shows the texturing part formed in the surface. In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a plan sectional view of the slot machine, (2) is a view showing Modification 1 of Section A, and (3) is a modification of Section A. 2 is a diagram showing FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram of a slot machine in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B); FIG. 32 is a front view of a slot machine in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B); In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), (1) is a diagram showing Modification 1 of the texturing portion, and (2) is a diagram showing Modification 2 of the texturing portion. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in the twenty-fifth embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). In the twenty-fifth embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing each LED provided in the special symbol display device, and (2) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped when the big winning lottery is lost. (3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the special symbols are stopped when a big win is won in the big win lottery. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, (1) to (8) are diagrams showing lighting patterns during variation of special symbols. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during fluctuation and stop of the special symbol when it is lost in the big hit lottery with the reservation "0". In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during fluctuation and stop of the special symbol when it is lost in the big hit lottery with the reservation "4". In the modified example of the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the timing of lighting or extinguishing of each LED during fluctuation and stop of the special symbol when the big hit lottery is lost in the reservation "4". FIG. 22 is a diagram showing each LED provided on the main control board of the slot machine in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, (1) shows the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the left reel detects the index, and (2) shows the lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the middle reel detects the index. (3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the reel sensor of the right reel detects the index. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the game is started this time after the last game is finished with the reel sensor of the left reel detecting the index in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the game is started this time after the previous game was finished while the reel sensors of all reels did not detect the index in the twenty-sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the game is started this time after the previous game was finished while the reel sensors of all the reels did not detect the index in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing various lead wires, a relay board 300, and a main control board 50 in a twenty-seventh embodiment;

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the actual medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet the credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "reservation")" refers to accumulation of medals inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Also, the “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to anything other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the bet number is "1" (the bet number at that time) when one medal is inserted (before the game starts).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
“Take care bet” means that a player bets medals by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).

A "reserved bet" is a bet that a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within the range that can be betted in the game in order to play the game. It means to
“Automatic bet” means that the number of medals that were betted in the previous game is automatically betted by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination is stopped on the active line; the same shall apply hereinafter), this is referred to as "winning a small combination". On the other hand, in the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Model Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, the conditional device for replaying is activated. are interpreted as not “winning”. However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to replay may be referred to as "replay win".
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number, and the medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of awards."

The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a gaming machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.
Note that the "game medium" may also be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called a "current game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end of numbers (especially 8 bits) mean binary numbers. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the trailing symbols of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted respectively. .

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that in a game in which the game result (symbol combination that stops on the active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is a payout or a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which a symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"A game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. game). Also, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when duplicate replays are won. In a game in which a so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT is changed according to the type of replay that is won. is also equivalent.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42 . The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 .
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner, and "notification" is to notify the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, there is a possibility that notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is the "operation of the instruction function". It may also be referred to as "activation".
For example, if the pressing order bell shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 1, but instead assume that you get either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a dropout (non-winning), depending on the pushing order.
Here, informing of the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, the notification of the pushing order for winning the one-hand, three-hand, or four-hand, may be regarded as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notification of

The pressing order for winning the 4-card winning combination is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card winning combination, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number of the game is "+1", it is an operation mode for increasing the difference number, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3-card hand is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand. However, since the number of payouts is "3" for the number of bets of "3" and the difference number is maintained at the current state (the difference number is not decreased), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the pushing order for winning a winning combination of 1 is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order that does not win a winning combination of 10 cards. Further, in this operation mode, the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode that does not miss a role, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won, the operating mode (correct pressing order) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is reported.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value ("2400 (D)"), but the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later) has a margin. , when winning the push order bell, it is conceivable to notify the pushing order for winning, for example, a 3-card hand or a 4-card hand as described above, and to control the difference counter value to maintain the current state.

Also, in this embodiment, the activation of the pointing function is limited to one defined number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the pointing function is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" in AT, when the game is started with the bet number of "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even if the winning order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, the 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but the current regulations for the 6 machine do not include "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, it is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" means that a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order), which will be described later, is sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ) and has no effect on performance related to the instruction function (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for the role, it is possible to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Therefore, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the “advantageous section” is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). Refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that contradicts the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no problem even if the indicating function is not activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may always be operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 . Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous interval and AT is never executed in the non-advantageous interval.

In addition, in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the payout rate in a predetermined period It is conceivable not to report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules.
For example, when the upper limit value of the difference number counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not reported from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (not activating the indicating function) is also conceivable.

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first method is to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied just by moving to the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main gaming state may be set to normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (a period in which AT is likely to be won)) or the like.

When shifting to the sign after shifting to the advantageous section, the game may be shifted to the main sign without fail, and after the predetermined number of games of the main sign is completed, the game may be shifted to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether it is a real omen or a fake omen, and when it is determined to be a real omen, it may be shifted to AT after the end of the main omen. . Further, when the false sign is determined, after the false sign ends, the advantageous section may be maintained, or the section may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT termination condition is satisfied. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, the number of times of playing the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and a lottery or the like relating to the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous interval, the initial number of games in the advantageous interval is determined, and during the advantageous interval, it is decided (lottery, etc.) whether the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous interval should be added. Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or a remaining number of AT games), at that point Ending the advantageous section with

Here, the “predetermined condition for ending the advantageous interval” means that the difference counter value (to be described later) exceeds “2400 (D)” or the advantageous interval clear counter (to be described later) (the number of games played during the advantageous interval) is “ 1500 (D)”. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In an advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is lit. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be always lit during the advantageous section, or may be illuminated when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a game state in which the interval Sim exceeds "1" in the advantageous interval. It should be noted that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) ball output rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, the highest payout is achieved). This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim ball-out rate does not include the number of balls (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (such as 1BB operation). In addition, in a game winning a replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in a replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game winning the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game winning the replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1”” includes RT and the main game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, RTs with a section Sim payout rate exceeding “1” include, for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, AT is mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished during, for example, a game end check process, which will be described later, or a game start setting process in the next game of the last game in the advantageous interval. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing by executing the processing for initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The “process related to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processes.
1) Advantageous section (transfer) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Also, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), updating the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)

According to the current rules, both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the command function can be executed in one prescribed number of times in one gaming state (RT), except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables execution of the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. and
However, during the advantageous interval, it is necessary to update the advantageous interval clear counter and update the difference number counter regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the winning lottery is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIGS. 26 and 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that the processing related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, this is not the only option, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the combination lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the result of the winning lottery is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is a predetermined value or more (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function Processing (AT lottery processing) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone), when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the next game will be the advantageous zone. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and execute the correct pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous zone is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. LED for displaying which item among the items by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of the numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, the number of games is counted until it reaches at least "175000" games. When the total number of games is less than "175000", the ratio is displayed by, for example, blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by lighting display, for example. Even after the cumulative number of games reaches "175000" or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (proportion) of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts. Incidentally, in a slot machine in which no role item is installed, the "indicated role item ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instruction-inclusive role-thing counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from 3 to 8 are won, 10 is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when one bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the displayed order of pushes, and a winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won), an instruction-inclusive role counter is displayed. is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains unchanged.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the winning order of the bell is won, and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are a case where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts in the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts for the number of games played is "6000" and the total number of payouts is "2000", of which the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous bonus" Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

Further, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessories" include, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessories, second-class special accessories (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB. Second-class accessory continuous operating device. CB is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if the game machine does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if "RB (first class special role)" is not provided, there is no continuous role ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "-- ” lights up.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIGS. do.

In addition, it is stipulated by regulation that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Further, it is stated that the role product ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous role product ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a game machine with a specification of 70% or less advantageous section ratio is called a "7U" type, and a game machine with a specification of 70% or less instruction-inclusive role ratio is called a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the '7U' type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section should be '70'% or less, but in the '7P' type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is The number of payouts may be 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, set so that you win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set so that you win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set so that the advantageous section lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot refer to the setting value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type refers to the setting value itself and performs processing related to the instruction function. It is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in an advantageous section, and a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not AT is to be executed in this advantageous section.

Also, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment as in the case of the slot machine (rotary game machine). Then, the real-time (during measurement) base value for every "60000" out balls (the "base value" indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and "60000 ”, the base values of 1, 2, and 3 times before are displayed in sequence. For example, the identification seg of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification seg of the previous base value is displayed as "b1." is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines among gaming machines.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and how the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and the peripheral devices for progressing the game including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. , and payout at the time of winning.

Also, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and an MPU including registers are mounted. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is sent inside the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted from the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector is provided with a path sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46 . The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is allowed, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed in the case of a winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 consists of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving an external force) to switch on / off of the electric signal. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore, it is also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operating body 43 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, it is also called "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operation body of the stop switch 42 (the portion to be pushed by the player) is referred to as "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted to be accepted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e (4th sensor 42e to be described later) of the operated stop switch 42 is terminated. embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that are still emitting red light but have not yet been operated are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number is determined in advance depending on, for example, when the accessory is not activated/when the accessory is activated. Concretely, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when the 1BB is activated, there are 3 sheets, and when the 2BB is activated, there are 2 sheets. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the prescribed number has already been betted, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right reels).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when a winning combination is won, and is composed of upper and lower digits, similar to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols constituting a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position and whether or not it has made one rotation. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by driving the (stepping) motor 32 by how many pulses, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. Then, when medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7 to be described later) is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of a predetermined time, it is determined whether or not medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
The details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8. FIG.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the hands stops on the active line (
When the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding approval of gaming machines, model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that becomes operable in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device is determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or the pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the winning order of the bell is won, the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing the bell) is indicated. In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during the AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned acquired number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number,
Specifically, information such as “=*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ) is displayed. Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information when a conditional device with an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if a pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 revolutions per minute.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of stop control, control is performed so as not to stop the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pressing), the order of priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order of pressing the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only when winning a winning number having a correct pressing order during AT). , effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. FIG. 2 shows the inside of the medal selector so that it can be seen. Also, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates the state in which the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (the state before being released). That is, at the position M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 to be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Also, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when viewed from the front. That is, at the position M2, the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M drops from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
It should be noted that the "upstream side" indicates the medal slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" indicates the side of the insertion sensor 44b (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, the order is M1->M2->M3->M4 from the upstream side to the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 2, the path sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the path sensor 46 when the medal M is positioned at M2.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (ON) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (OFF) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting medals M into the inside of the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medals M as game media. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard portion 47a and a medal placement portion 47b. The medal placing portion 47b has a substantially curved surface (having a slightly larger curvature than the peripheral edge of the medal M) extending in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, an opening through which one medal M can flow is provided at the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a. When two medals M are stacked, the medal M does not drop from the opening, but when the thickness is one medal M, the medal M is formed to flow down from the opening. Therefore, the player places, for example, a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b, presses the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a, and strengthens the pressing force. By weakening it, the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b can be dropped one by one from the opening into the medal selector.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, the above-described blocker 45 is provided between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a (under the entry sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the path sensor 46 . The path sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or fraud. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the operation is normal. On the other hand, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after the predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. - 特許庁The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is ON), the medal flow path is formed so that the medals M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when it is in the OFF state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is OFF), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the plane of the drawing in FIG. to form an opening (pitfall) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M drops from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to a medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the prescribed number of games has already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state because no more medals can be betted and credited. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Can move sideways.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the blocker 45 is on or off, the path sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, it is sufficient that the medals M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 should be positioned between the path sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

Further, the path sensor 46 may be positioned upstream of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state. All you have to do is In FIG. 2, the path sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when the medal M is positioned at M2. It is also possible to arrange the path sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when it moves to the right.

The inserted sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side becomes capable of detecting the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medals M further flow down, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medals M (turns from off to on). By determining the ON/OFF timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medals M are normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b are sent to the hopper 35 .

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, when the medal M is positioned at M2, that is, when the medal selector is viewed from the front, the medal M is positioned at M4, that is, at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M, from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible. (the movement locus is indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to time T2. The value is obtained when the medal M is positioned at M1 and the hand is released from the medal M (with an initial speed of "0") and released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is positioned at M2 exceeds "0".

Also, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage bends from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the slot machine 10 is powered off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is assumed to be the supply level V0. In the state of supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power failure occurred (an event in which power supply was interrupted occurred) at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 interrupt = 44.7 ms) or longer.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined power supply interruption detection level V1, a power supply interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51. By detecting whether or not the signal has been input, the power supply is detected. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. The main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2. is set to

Power-off detection is executed in interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms, but when power-off is detected two consecutive interrupts, power-off processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power-off detection level V1 two times in a row by interrupt processing, and that power-off has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt process, the power-off process is executed.
In addition, in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power cutoff has been detected, and when a power cutoff is detected, the process shifts to power cutoff processing (without shifting to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The processing of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45 . Furthermore, stack pointer saving processing, power-off processing completion flag (flag for determining whether or not power-off has been performed normally) setting processing, RWM 53 checksum execution processing, RWM 53 write prohibition processing, etc. After sequential execution, it enters a reset waiting state (loop processing state). This reset waiting state is designed so that no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected, the power-off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off.
It should be noted that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process subsequent to the interrupt process that detected the power-off, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process that detected the power-off. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is positioned at M1. In this case, the medal M falls at an initial speed of "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 at which the power failure occurred coincides with the time at which the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4 is set to T2. It is assumed that the medal M is later positioned at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M. Therefore, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower tray) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after time S11), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. not. This eliminates the possibility that the bet or credit processing will be executed after the power failure occurs.

For example, in the case where a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of power failure processing), when the medal M is positioned immediately before M4 in FIG. has passed the position M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a but not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, in the case where the power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the time T1 has passed (at the time of power failure processing), the medal M is positioned upstream from the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

Also, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power cut-off process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and sent to the medal return opening.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when the power interruption occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power interruption is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after power failure occurs. This is because all the processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately after the power failure occurs.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47, and even if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after insertion), , the medal "1" addition processing is not executed, so the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the direction of the arrow indicates the advancing (flowing down) direction of the medals M. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 4(a) shows the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and enters the state shown in FIG. become. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In FIG. 4, even when the inserted sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap each other, both the inserted sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are indicated by solid lines. It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M advances further and becomes the state of FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44a in this case is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 millimeters (so-called 25 pies (φ)) in general specifications, and 30 millimeters (so-called 30 pies (φ)) in special specifications. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the insertion sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. 4(c) can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not the state of FIG. 4C, that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are ON (detecting medals M) is within a predetermined range. determines whether or not to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also varies depending on how the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are ON is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4(c), the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b is turned off from on. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a turns on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), which corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4(a).
Next, let S22 be the moment when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on) (Fig. 4(b)). Furthermore, let S23 be the moment (FIG. 4(d)) when the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off). Further, the time when the inserted sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changed from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts) (Condition 1), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and judges that the medal passes error when it is out of this range.

In addition, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within a range of 4.47 ms (2 interruptions) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interruptions). If so (Condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passing error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the inserted sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 judges that the medal M passes normally, and if it is out of this range, it is regarded as a medal passing error.
If all of the conditions 1 to 3 described above are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if at least one of the conditions is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the input monitor counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). →When ON→OFF (that is, at time S24), the counter is decremented by "1". That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M, and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

Further, when the path sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the path sensor 46 further detects the medal M. Then, when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error has occurred. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2", the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal clogging error when the insertion monitoring counter reaches "3" or more. be done.
The input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 is turned on from off.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Execute the transaction (bet transaction or credit transaction). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the number of bets is added by "1". Specifically, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the number of credits is added to "1". For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns the blocker 45 off. Thereby, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if medals M are inserted, they are not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to the ON/OFF states of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when the power failure occurs and when the power failure is detected are displayed. In FIG. 5, examples 1 and 2 are shown, both of which are exemplified by a case where the power supply is interrupted at the timing (time S21) when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off.
In Example 1, power failure is detected after time T1 has elapsed from time S21 when the power failure occurred. Here, in example 1, it is set to "T1>T3". Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, when the power cut-off process is started, the "1" addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time for time T3 is 8.94 ms, which corresponds to 4 interrupts.
Also, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power failure (time S21) to the execution of power failure processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power cut-off process is executed after the "1" addition process for the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of medals M can be prevented.

In addition, example 2 is an example in which, contrary to example 1, power-off processing is executed before processing for adding "1" to medals M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the setting is made so as to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3".
Time T3 from time S21 to time S24 corresponds to four interrupts at the minimum time, as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute power-off processing within three interrupts from the occurrence of power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off processing to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, setting the minimum time of time Tc to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of the power failure (time S21) to the power failure process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power failure occurs at time S21, the power failure process is executed before time S24. becomes possible.

After the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medals M (bet or credit) is not executed. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the processing of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power off.
When adding the medals to be paid out to the credit, the hopper motor 36 is not driven.
The storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so as to correspond to the credit number stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect ON/OFF each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is not paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 judges that there is a medal payout error.

FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6 , a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35 , and the hopper disk is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36 . A plurality of openings capable of holding the medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disc. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are discharged one by one. New medals M in the hopper 35 enter into the empty opening after the medals M are discharged.

In FIG. 6, the medal M positioned at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are parts constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In an unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position indicated by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed to the fixed shaft by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 to be described later). 38a side is biased. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In addition, when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) indicated by the solid line in FIG. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Then, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. As shown in FIG. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medals M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port) in the figure. The medal M at this time is indicated by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is again returned to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6 by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view for explaining the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7(a) shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around the central axis in the drawing, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In a state in which the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b acts on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a is held by a predetermined stopper (not shown). 7), it stops at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, payout sensors 37a (upper side in the drawing) and 37b (lower side in the drawing) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In FIG. 7, both of the payout sensors 37a and 37b show the housings of the sensors, and the light emitting/receiving parts (eyes of the sensors) are omitted from the illustration. In this respect, it is different from the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, in which only light receiving/emitting parts (sensor eyes) are illustrated.

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in the ON state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the OFF state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. is set to be
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is turned off (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and turned on (for example, FIG. 7(c)) when the movable piece 39a is detected. is set to
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is on, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is off.

As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When moved, the movable piece 39a starts to rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is turned off. Further, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b moves further in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state and the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 7, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b stops detecting the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 7(a). In the state of FIG. 7(a), as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the solid line position in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is on.
In FIG. 8, before time S31, the state is shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is in the off state). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The state where the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on continues until time S33, at which time the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A is restored, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that a medal payout error has occurred when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is not turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, it is regarded as a medal payout error.

Also, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored. , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the time Tf until the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. If the time is not within the predetermined time, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

In addition, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIG. 3 and FIG. 5, the time from occurrence of power failure to power failure processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example of detecting a power failure by the 20th interrupt was explained, but in the example of FIG. When T1 elapses), power-off is detected and power-off processing is set to be executed.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, the time T1 from when the power is turned off until the power-off process is executed is set to 40 interrupts (89.4 ms), for example. set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, power outages (power outages, etc.) may occur during medal payout processing. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power shutdown, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, causing a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), medals can be paid out correctly even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process.

In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even if the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. Therefore, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the OFF state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the ON state, the power-off processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interruption of the medal payout process before the (one) medal payout process ends normally due to the execution of the power-off process in the middle of the medal payout process.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and that the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, "T1<T4" is set.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate traces formed on the board case of the main control board 50 .
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, and the like of the gate marks on the substrate case were determined by the mold designer when the mold was manufactured, solely for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the trace of the gate is an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the trace of the gate, there is a case where it cannot be visually recognized (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly below the trace of the gate, the main CPU 55 can be accessed by making a hole in the trace of the gate and inserting a wire through the hole. be done). In particular, if the gate marks are formed in a shape that is thinner than the other portions, it becomes easier to make a hole than the other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is prevented that the gate mark of the substrate case is used to cheat.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in exploded form.
The substrate case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed clearly from the outside of the board case 56 .

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the main CPU 55, the management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also called "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator"), and the set value display LED 73. is installed. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with bed switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a path sensor 46 in the medal selector, and LEDs for failure confirmation of insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It is Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is extinguished when the start switch 41 is off, and is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED is turned on (lit).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are extinguished when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

In addition, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bed switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bed switches 40a and 40b, and are extinguished when the bed switch 40 is not operated. It is an LED that lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the path sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided with a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor. LEDs.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms whether the failure check LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is on/off, thereby determining whether the start switch 41 has failed (energized). can be confirmed. The same is true for other switches or sensors.

The failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (not during setting change and setting confirmation). . Alternatively, after the front door is opened and a door open error occurs, a predetermined operation may be performed to enable failure confirmation. Further, the light may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even during setting change or setting confirmation).

Also, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.) on the main control board 50 . Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54 .
Further, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed in the four corners of the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inner side of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. As shown in FIG. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw holes 50a and the bosses 58c overlap, and screws are passed through the screw holes 50a and screwed to the bosses 58c, thereby fixing the main control board 50 to the lower case 58. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is placed on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape to be fitted (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is omitted from illustration). ) Further, crimped portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, crimped portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the crimped portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and crimping is performed using the crimping portions 57a and 58a, at least a part of the crimping portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate traces 57b are provided at two places on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. As shown in FIG. In the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together), the side on which the main control board 50 is accommodated is called the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is called the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but they may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, the mold for the substrate case 56 may be divided vertically in FIG. 9 to reduce the cost. In the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the upper surface in FIG. 9, not on the side surface.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the projections of the gate traces during molding, it is preferable to provide the gate traces on the outside.
As described above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
For the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate traces 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two locations like the gate traces 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided at one location or at three or more locations. good too.

In addition, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, if the resin (hot water) spreads unevenly in the mold and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may warp. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly in the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gates and the distance between the gates as uniform as possible.

10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is viewed from above. Also, the main control board 50 is shown as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57 .

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of the cross-sectional view taken along AA in FIG. indicate. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10(a), when the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56, the vertical direction of the upper cover 57 (the side of the main control board 50) (directly below) from the two gate traces 57b is: The model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be positioned. As described above, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, and it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not positioned directly above them.

The reasons for arranging the gate marks 57 as described above are as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is placed on the market, the main control board 50 needs to be visually checked to see if it has been tampered with. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same shall apply hereinafter) are conforming, and whether or not they have been altered by cheating. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. be.
Further, the board case 56 housing the main control board 50 inside is mounted inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the rear surface. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are mounted at positions where they are easy to see.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 looks at the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. FIG. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, the gate trace 57 may interfere with the visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like is also made visible without impeding visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from a transparent resin, visibility is not completely hindered even if it is directly below the gate marks 57b. However, as shown in FIGS. 10(b) and 10(c), the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces the visibility directly below the gate trace 57b (worse than a flat surface). It is certain. In addition, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the projection 57d is a cut surface, it may be whitened due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, the visibility directly below the gate mark 57b is obstructed.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is transparent and has no irregularities except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by shoveling, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is pierced and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been pierced. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are positioned in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it is easy for the player to cheat. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make it difficult to do something.

In addition, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking whether there is any fraud, the model number display A gate trace 57b is prevented from being arranged right above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent unauthorized modification of the model number display by opening a hole in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the board case 56, The gate marks 57b are not arranged right above the model number display.

Furthermore, it is necessary to see the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to see the numerical values displayed in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the traces of the gate 57b are not arranged right above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same manner as described above, holes are made in the gate traces 57b by using the gate traces 57b, and the LEDs in the substrate case 56 are accessed through the holes. The gate mark 57b is prevented from being arranged thereon.

Further, regarding the above-described failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located right above the failure confirmation LED. In the same manner as described above, the failure check LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b to make it difficult for cheating to occur.

In FIG. 10, cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate mark 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains flat. On the other hand, in example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a projection 57d at its center and a depression 57c formed so as to sink into a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut by a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the projection 57d is the cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: automatic cutting by a molding machine at the time of injection, and cutting in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, making the height of the projection 57d almost "0" to a smooth surface reduces the cost. high and difficult. Therefore, the depression 57c is formed so that the projection 57d does not protrude above the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the projection 57d has some height. As a result, for example, when an assembling worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury due to the projections 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced accordingly. In this way, if there is even a portion with a thin wall thickness, there is a risk that it will be easy to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c to gain access to the inside of the substrate case 56. FIG.
Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the upper surface outer side where the gate mark 57b is provided, and the thickness of the recessed portion 57c is prevented from becoming thin. there is If the projecting portion 57e is not provided and the thinned portion is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

In addition, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to fraud countermeasures by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) during molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, and the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will suddenly change and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (hot water pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, it reduces the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water), (Hot water) becomes able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as the shape can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), a smooth lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10B is superior to the shape shown in FIG. Also, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. lower cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a protrusion 57d and a depression 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient in terms of molding to provide the projection 57d and the recess 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 , the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58 b of the lower cover 58 . This is because a hole is made in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the projection 57e in FIG. It goes without saying that the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere with each other (contact).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to dispose (shift) so as not to In particular, in the case of the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), the thickness of a portion of the gate traces 57b and 58b (recessed portion 57c) is thin, but the thinner portion is the upper cover. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions that do not overlap each other, it is possible to prevent areas that are likely to be targeted from overlapping.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known by just looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are arranged not to overlap in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, when the communication is restored, or when the communication fails due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 commands such as the pressing order instruction number and the information of the operated stop switch 42 . Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will be disconnected and communication will be disabled. Possible causes include poor contact and radio-controlled goto. When the sub control board 80 stops receiving commands from the main control board 50, the effect stops at the current state. Neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 can continue the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42). etc.) to continue the command transmission process to the sub-control board 80 . On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the rendering state at that time.
Even when the line between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is broken, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 operates the instruction function to display the number of acquisition LEDs 78 in the pressing order. Display instructional information. As a result, even when the sub-control board 80 does not function normally, the player can see the pressing order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct pressing order.
Furthermore, since the player can compare the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct pressing order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the information of the two is contradictory. If so, it can be known that the image display by the sub-control board 80 is defective.

For example, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 can receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Occasionally, the presentation cannot be suddenly switched to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (a command for notifying the start of the game), and notifies that the "N+1" game item has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the presentation.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the performance is given a sense of incongruity while minimizing misunderstandings for the player. Outputs a rendition that does not exist.

11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 in the third embodiment (referred to as "main action" in FIG. 11) and the display of the effect by the sub-control board 80 (referred to as "sub-display" in FIG. 11). ), and shows five examples consisting of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication is disabled (disconnection occurs) during the "N"th game, and communication is restored during the "N+1"th game.
In addition, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and the specified number is effectively betted. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been betted. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, "pressing order effect" means, for example, an effect of displaying the correct pressing order as an image in a game in which the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect for notifying that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, indicating that the second stop switch to be operated is the left and the third to be operated the middle stop switch. It means a performance to inform.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect of operating the right stop switch 42 (stopping the right reel 31) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, middle" is an example of winning the pressing order bell, which is the correct pressing order. In this case, the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" to the sub control board 80 during AT. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs to the image display device 23 a pressing order presentation that displays the correct pressing order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the correct pressing order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop (right stop) after seeing the correct order of pressing. As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays right-left center display, left-center display (in addition, other , such as "-left center", "x left center", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes impossible in the middle of a game.

Even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 does not function), the game can proceed. The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are respectively operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs in the "N" game (left middle stop ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1"th game, as in the "N"th game, "right, left, middle" shows an example of winning the push order bell (or push order replay), which is the correct push order. In addition, in the "N+1" game, similarly to the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right, left, middle pressing order. Any role lottery result may be used.

When winning the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78. - 特許庁Therefore, even if the image display device 23 does not display the image of the correct pressing order, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order according to the pressing order instruction information displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
Thereby, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42 , the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the effect that has already been displayed, that is, the effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, actually, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game is Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N"th game is left, in this example, the operations are performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (the pressing order correct effect), and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
In the "N+1" game, even if a winning combination having the correct order is won and the correct order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect is output as described above. be done. That is, in the "N+1" game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, or middle, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order fails as in pattern 2 described later. No performance is output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct pressing order is won, or if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, middle, the above-mentioned The same effect is output as That is, even if the "N+1" game item does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after the communication is restored (in the example of pattern 1). When the command is received, the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and further, the middle display is output.

Next, when a bet for the "N+2" game is made and the "N+2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 instructs the sub control board 80 to say " N+2" transmits a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands for the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80, based on the command received from the main control board 50 ("N+1" game), continue to output, and when the 'N+2' game is started, the 'N+2'game's effect is updated.
In addition, when the game ends, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of winning coins to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of winning coins during the AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command for the winning number at the end of the "N"th game, that is, during disconnection. ” The number of coins obtained at the end of the game will remain displayed. Then, when communication is restored and a command for the winning number is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so that the number obtained at the end of the "N+1" game is displayed. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Also, the disconnection timing is the same as pattern 1, but the communication recovery timing is different from pattern 2. FIG. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so the description is omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left, middle, and communication is restored after the left second stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect for the "N" game item and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the “N+1” game, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives a middle stop command while left middle display is being performed, it determines that the pressing order is incorrect and outputs a pressing order failure presentation. Note that, in the third embodiment, after the pressing order failure effect is output, the subsequent pressing order effect is not output.

In the "N + 1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop command is executed as a sub-control. Also when it is transmitted to the substrate 80, the pressing order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the middle of outputting the right stop effect and the left middle display, if the right stop command is received at this time, it means that the same stop command is received twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is processed as failure in the pressing order without performing error notification or the like, and the effect is output.
When the "N+2" game is started in the same manner as in pattern 1, a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 starts the effect of the "N+2" game.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display of the "N"th game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, after the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, a left stop command, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left center display" for the "N" game, when the command for left stop is received in this state, it is judged as the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (correct pressing order effect) and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends with the left third stop. Next, when the game shifts to the "N+2" game, and a command for starting the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that have been output until then are cancelled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2"th game is received while the middle display is being output, no error notification or the like is performed, and an effect for the start of the "N+2"th game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub-display. Also, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3. FIG.
The main control board 50 transmits a command of the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command for the remaining number of AT games from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the remaining number of AT games. During the AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with pattern 3's pressing order effect.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT to the sub-control board 80 . Here, in the "N"th game, it is assumed that the remaining number of AT games is 10 games.
The sub-control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N"th game.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50, at the start (at the start) of the "N+1" game, Although processing for transmitting a command for the number of remaining games (9 games) during AT is executed to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (because of disconnection). Therefore, in the "N+1"th game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N"th game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 changes to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In response, a command for the number of remaining games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is the same as pattern 4 in terms of the main action, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing, but is an example in which the "N" game is the remaining AT game.
The main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command indicating the number of remaining games during AT (one remaining game) at the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display to one remaining game (from the display of two remaining games up to that point).
When disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display indicating that there is one AT game remaining is continued.

Further, the sub-control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when ending the AT. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving (at the start of the game) a command to the effect that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub-control board 80 does not receive the command indicating that the number of remaining games during the AT is 0, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even when the "N+1" games are finished, an effect indicating that there is one AT game remaining is output.

When the "N+1" game is completed and the "N+2" game is started, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Upon receipt of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs normal (non-AT) effects.
At the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game machine for moderate enjoyment" is displayed in order to prevent addiction. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image display cannot be performed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the side of the sub-control board 80, and when the next game ("N+2" game in the example of FIG. The image display may be performed at the start of .

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N+1 ' When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the 'N' game is output based on the command received at the 'N+1' game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a left stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, regardless of whether the stop switch 42 was actually operated in the correct order, the correct answer is received. The pressing order effect is output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N+1"th game, if a command for intermediate stop is received after communication is restored, the order of pressing the effect output at that time, that is, the "N"th game Since the incorrect pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, the pressing order failure presentation is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. However, even if the pushing order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct pushing order in the "N+1" game, the symbols are advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, the player is not disadvantaged.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, in the "N+1" game, the effect that takes over the effect before disconnection ("N" game) is output, and the "N+2" game is output. Reset rendition at start (return to correct rendition). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural performance in both the game in which the disconnection occurs and the game in which the communication is restored, and to prevent the player from being misunderstood as much as possible.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 11, after the disconnection occurred in the "N" game, the communication was restored in the "N+1" game. However, it is the same as in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection in the "N" game will continue until the "N+a-1" game. The effect just before the previous one continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a"th game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the "N"th game effect in which the output has been continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N+a+1" game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. When the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, the four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 to be described later) (hereinafter referred to as "four-phase excitation state").
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of visibility of the drawing. Moreover, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pushed to when it returns is illustrated in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d). In the drawing, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10 . In the drawing, the side above the front door 12 is the side seen by the player.
Furthermore, the line along which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detecting sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is the operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. As shown in FIG. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged to protrude from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by several millimeters. When viewed from the front of the player side, this portion has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. The player-side end of 42 a protrudes from the front door 12 . In this state, the lower surface of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") and the front door 12 are in contact with each other.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and when the stop button 42a is pushed in, the stopper 42b abuts against the stop button 42a and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. is.

A movable piece 42d that can be moved integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the bottom side of the stop button 42a in the drawing. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) of the drawing, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the drawing) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the drawing, the detection sensor 42e does not detect the moving piece 42d, and is in the OFF state.

Next, as shown in (b) of the drawing, when the player stops the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. FIG. 12(b) shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state. At the moment the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed from the state of FIG. 12(b), as shown in FIG. 12(c), the flange-like portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. In addition, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state because the tip of the moving piece 42d is being detected by the detection sensor 42e.

When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12(c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12(c)), the stop button 42a is pushed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. A force is applied to return to the initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d is no longer in contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state. In the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further released from the state of FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-like portion of the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), which is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
The state of FIG. 12(b) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state and the state of FIG. 12(d) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e is turned off from the on state are generally different. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

13A and 13B are time charts showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32, etc., in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A shows Example 1, and FIG. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position (FIG. 12(a)) in the no-load state, and the moment when the stop button 42a starts to be pushed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. Further, the stop button 42a is pushed from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest portion (the state shown in FIG. 12(c)) is S43. The times S41, S42, and S43 described above depend on the pressing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 is lengthened, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 is shortened.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is positioned at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pushed, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to the initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released.
S45 is the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached. Here, the time from time S44 to time S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (travel distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the turn-on of the stop switch 42 (specifically, the turn-on of the detection sensor 42e) is detected (in the state of FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42 The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the result of the combination lottery by the combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means). The time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is turned on) to when the reel 31 is stopped is, as described above, (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21, the number of moving frames is within 5, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20, the number of moving frames is within 4). Therefore, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant because it varies depending on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position, the reel control means 65 causes the motor 32 to be in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (brakes are being applied) for a predetermined time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and during the rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1-2 phase excitation is performed (note that it is not limited to 1-2 phase excitation). do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, there is one excitation state. When stopping the rotation of the motor 32, the four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making it appear that the reel 31 is vibrating at the stop position), for example, the 3-phase excitation state should be set instead of the 4-phase excitation state. is also possible.

The moment the motor 32 stops rotating, there is a risk that the motor 32 and the reel 31 will go over the desired stop position due to the inertia of the motor 32 and the reel 31 during rotation. By setting the four-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stop position by inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, acceptance of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, acceptance of the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted only when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state of FIG. 12(d). ), and when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 whose rotational drive is stopped ends.

The reason for such control is as follows.
In order to hold the reel 31 at the stop position, the motor 32 is controlled to be in a four-phase excitation state. It's getting bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is completed.

In example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pushing), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from start to finish is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, the reason why the excitation time T12 in the four-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupt" when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result is that the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not necessarily

Therefore, in example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set to be "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 is stopped within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20" Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on from the off state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to time S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the depression of the stop button 42a is released are close to each other (almost at the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to permit acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a when the four-phase excitation state is ended. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e turns off (
In this example, the time T11 (until time S45 is reached) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, the four-phase excitation state is started at the moment (time S44) when the depression of the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest position is released. It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, acceptance of the next operation of the stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12", it becomes possible to accept the next stop button 42a when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program activation.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when a power failure occurs after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), the supply of power to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level on the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

S52 is the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at time S51. Thereafter, at time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is started. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is activated from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the sub-program is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 transmits the first command after power-on to the sub-control board 80. , the sub-control board 80 side to be able to receive the command.

Next, when a power failure (the power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, or the like) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 can execute the power-off process as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, when the power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after detection of the power-off, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power-off process is completed before reaching time S58.

When the main program starts at time S54, the main CPU 55 is set, the RWM 53 is checked, whether or not the previous power-off was normal, confirmation of the state of the setting key switch, etc. are performed, and then interrupt processing is started. . When the setting key switch is off, the power failure recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change process is started after the interrupt process is activated.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when power failure occurs after starting the main program, and the setting key switch is off, the power failure recovery process is completed, and then the power failure process is executed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, when the power is turned off after the main program is started, if the setting key switch is on, the power is turned off without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after a power failure occurs, a problem may occur.

In order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power failure is detected at the same time as the main program is activated.
Furthermore, after starting the main program, even if the power is turned off after that, the program is always executed until the interrupt start. This is for detecting power interruption in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N"th interruption, a voltage drop (power interruption detection level V1) at which it is determined that a power interruption has occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is detected. However, when the voltage drop is detected, power cutoff is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (determined as power cutoff). Then, power-off processing is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14(a), the main program starts at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if the power is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (startup of the main program), the power cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Note that in FIG. 14(a), the time T21 from when the power is turned on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is when the voltage changes to Low level after the power is turned off (time S55). It is set to be shorter than the time T24 until it becomes.
Also, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to when the main program starts up) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14(b) shows an example when the power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is earlier than time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) necessary for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is interrupted before a predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. For example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that the power failure occurs immediately after the subprogram is activated (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program is activated). be done.
When the power is turned off at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power-off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power-off processing of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the driving voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power-off at the above timing is the power-off before the start of the main program, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 is effective as an anti-fraud countermeasure as well as increasing the precision of medal insertion determination. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of entry sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medals M moving substantially horizontally, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is dropped substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M. As shown in FIG.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower side of the medal passage, but it is not limited to this. Any mechanism may be used as long as it has a function of ejecting the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Also, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect a slightly higher position than the central position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be in this manner. does not mean The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any way as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2, the time from the moment it is released until it reaches M4 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed until the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, a power failure occurs, and the power failure is detected and the power failure process (blocker off) is performed. Time T1 is set shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is turned off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above description, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt processing subsequent to the interrupt processing in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set so that the power-off processing (blocker off) is executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing counting from the interrupt processing that detected the power-off. Alternatively, power-off processing (blocker off) may be executed in interrupt processing that detects power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 required for the voltage to reach the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 when a power failure occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but it is limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a when the medals M are paid out by the medal payout device. However, not limited to this, the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in such a manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b OFF (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a ON, payout sensor 37b ON (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
follow the course of
Then, the time from time S31' to time S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from occurrence of power failure to execution of power failure processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the depression 57c are on the outside. is also possible. The gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also the same. In this case, if the gate marks 57b are shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outer surface of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed inside has been given. However, it is possible to apply the second embodiment not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80 . As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub-CPU 85, and the like. For example, the CPU 85 is not arranged, and the RWM 83 and ROM 54 are also not arranged. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) the trace of the gate.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples.
For example, the third embodiment can be applied even in the case of displaying the number of wins during AT or a special game (BB game, etc.) and the remaining number of wins.
For example, the acquired number at the start of the "N" game is "200", the acquired number at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the acquired number at the start of the "N+2" game is "218" sheets. In addition, the main control board 50 is assumed to transmit a command regarding the winning number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that disconnection occurs during the "N"th game, and communication is restored during the "N+1"th game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the winning number in the "N" game. Also, at the start of the "N+1" game, the command regarding the number of winning cards is not received (due to disconnection), so the display of the number of winning cards of "200" is maintained even in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of wins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to the number of wins of "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, without being limited to this, the image display may be returned to normal after the “N+1” game is completely stopped or when a betting operation is performed after that. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after full stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the disconnection "N+1" game, there is a case where the player wins a lottery that adds the number of cards that can be acquired during AT or the number of games played (addition). In this case, since the "N+1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 Displaying game information (the number of obtainable numbers and the number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when disconnection occurs after the right first stop of the "N" game, and communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. can be considered. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the right first stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command at the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it performs a pushing order failure presentation. Output. Then, at the time of the betting operation after the "N+1" game is completely stopped or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display can be restored to the normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), in the case where the acquired number is displayed as an image during AT, the following method can be given as an example of the update processing of the acquired number of images before and after disconnection.
The main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of winning coins to the sub control board 80 when there is a payout process. Here, when disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the winning number of the "N" game. It is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displayed "100" as the winning number during the AT immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game. In addition, the "N" game eye and the "N+1" game eye in AT are assumed to acquire 10 cards.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during the AT at the end of the "N"th game should originally be "110", but remains "100" (because the wire is broken). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 becomes "N+1"
It is possible to return the winning number during AT to a normal value based on the winning number command received during the game payout process. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process of the "N+1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines, for example. In a pachinko machine, the starting gate (the winning gate that starts the pattern variation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), the electronic chew winning gate (when the game ball wins, the next winning To make it easier, there is a prize opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.In addition, the electric chew is not limited to a tulip shape. be provided. The first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning slots.

Specifically, for example, at the starting port, there are a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has entered the starting port) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V-winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won the attacker's prize) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V-winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of the starting port, when power is cut off at the moment a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set to detect the game ball before the power cut-off process is executed. As a result, even if the power supply is interrupted at the moment the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize winning opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a game machine. (so-called "pachi-slot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medal-less gaming machines) that do not use medals for games as game media.

Here, the sealed game machine (medal-less game machine) can eliminate, for example, the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. Also, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) granted by winning a winning combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76 . In this case, it is conceivable that the credit amount display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (up to "99,999" electronic medals can be accumulated).
The present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment, even in such casino machines and enclosed-type gaming machines (medalless gaming machines).

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50. FIG.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the tokens, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Also, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state before the last discharged medal touches the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. Fig. 10 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state before contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and showing a state in which the hopper disk 101 has advanced in rotation from (a).

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last discharged medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last discharged medal. FIG. 11 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed;
Furthermore, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharge part, and (b) is a hopper after the last discharged medal is discharged. FIG. 10 is a plan view of the token payout device 15 showing a state where the disk has stopped rotating;

In the sixth embodiment, the medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Also, the fact that the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 is the same as in the first embodiment. The main control board 50 controls driving of the hopper motor 36 .

As shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disc shape, and has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. 102 are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101 .
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101 . The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter each holding portion 102 from the upper opening of each holding portion 102 and be held by each holding portion 102 .

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding portion 102 move clockwise along with the hopper disk 101 in an arc, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge portion 103 .
When the medals are ejected from the ejecting section 103, the holding section 102 holding the medals is emptied. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding portion 102 .

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 has a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, a discharge portion 103 from which medals are discharged is provided between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and when the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal moves toward the fixed shaft 38a. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, medals are ejected from the ejection section 103 .
Also, the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejection section 103. moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been discharged from the discharge section 103. FIG.

In one payout process, the last medal to be ejected from the ejecting unit 103 will be referred to as the "last ejected medal."It's called "Emission Medal".
15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medal with the character "A" is the last discharged medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first discharged medal in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding unit 102 where the last discharged medal was held at the moment when the last discharged medal was discharged from the discharging unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a "first position", and is referred to as a "first position". The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as the "second position".
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal marked with letters "A" to "D", and the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding portion 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disc 101 is stopped in the state between the .
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 has stopped after the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection section 103. FIG. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are indicated by dashed lines. Also, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is rotated while the holding portion 102 holding the medals marked with the character "B" is positioned between the first position and the second position. has stopped rotating.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36 .
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 supplies the hopper motor 36 with a current in the direction opposite to that when the medals are ejected. can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting portion 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that effect.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103, a current in the direction opposite to that for ejecting the medals is supplied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Also, by supplying a current to the hopper motor 36 in the direction opposite to when the medals are ejected, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process has passed the second position at the end of the payout process, the current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medals is supplied to the hopper. The hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position by flowing the motor 36 .
By returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is supplied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, it gradually accelerates from a state where the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18 , the upper line indicates the driving signal of the hopper motor 36 , the middle line indicates the driving state of the hopper motor 36 , and the lower line indicates the discharge state of medals from the discharge section 103 .

The drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal that is output from a predetermined output port provided on the main control board 50. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from off to on, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "stop", indicates a state in which the drive shaft stops rotating, and the drive state of the hopper motor 36, "constant speed", indicates that the drive shaft is (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned from off to on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stopped" and then reaches "constant speed".
In addition, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is slanted to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually accelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned on from off.
Therefore, if the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates until the holding portion 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal discharge interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting portion 103 is 36 is rotating at a constant speed, the medal ejection interval is longer.
As a result, the player may feel that the discharge of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, when one payout process ends, the main control board 50 moves the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
When the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position becomes shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when the hopper motor 36 stops at the second position. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the ejection of the is delayed.

Also, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. A portion corresponding to between is positioned in front of the discharge portion 103 .
As a result, an illegal act such as a wire or the like is inserted from the medal dispensing opening provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and an illegal act (a fraudulent act) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disc 101 with this illegal instrument is committed. Even if the hopper disk 101 is broken, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to between the two adjacent holding portions 102 can serve as a barrier to prevent access to the holding portions 102 by unauthorized instruments.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging section 103 at regular intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off from on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop".
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is slanted downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

In this way, the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor gradually decelerates the rotation of the drive shaft when the drive signal is turned off from on.
Then, the last discharged medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last discharged medal is discharged from the discharging portion 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from ON to OFF.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80 . This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts processing regarding the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 , when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 . This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has ended the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, it ends the processing related to the output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “purururu” can be output from the speaker 22 .
In addition, the "process related to the output of the payout sound" refers to a series of processes such as the process of selecting the sound to be output, the process of selecting the channel for outputting the selected sound, and the process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. is what it means. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22 .

When the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. By starting , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 .

When the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout end command to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound. , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be terminated when the discharge of the medals from the discharge unit 103 is stopped.
This can give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of discharging medals from the discharging section 103. As shown in FIG.
When a winning combination with a payout is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
For example, when 10 medals are won and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is "started" (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches "constant speed".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of , the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" before the holding portion 102 holding the first discharged medal reaches the first position. is doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" through "stop" through "acceleration", the holding part 102 holding the first discharged token reaches the first position. The medals are surely discharged from the discharge part 103. - 特許庁
Furthermore, at the timing of (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Also, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is not detected.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set to be off when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and to be on when the movable piece 39a is detected.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off at the timing of (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to be high active. waveform is turned on and off.

At the timing of (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is also turned on. Become. At this time, medals are discharged from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103).
The state of (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing of (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being biased by the spring 39b and is in the process of returning to its original position, the payout sensor 37a is in the ON state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the OFF state. becomes.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
At the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to its original position, and both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been discharged, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been discharged.
Then, when determining that the “N”th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 .
Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 is "decelerated" and then "stopped".
As a result, the process of paying out "N" medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, payout number data is set in step S101. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 . For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

At step S<b>102 , the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is ON. is set to be

If "Yes" in step S103, the process proceeds to next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, when "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, in step S104, "N
o", an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37b is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection portion 103 is jammed with medals (medal jam error). When a medal clogging error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the jammed medals and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined period of time ("No" remains unchanged for a predetermined period of time), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Further, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
At step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. Then, when "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, when "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 now determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, if "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, when the result of step S109 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
When "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in steps S104, S105 or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is "0". Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor . When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals ejected from the ejection section 103 are normally guided to the medal receiving tray through a path called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may bounce off the inner wall of the medal chute and return to the ejecting section 103 . At this time, the bounced medal may hit the next medal to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, like steps S103 to S110 in the flow chart of the payout process of FIG. 20, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are repeatedly turned on/off in the order of "payout sensor 37a" → "payout sensor 37b". do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which the medals about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 are pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be discharged, and this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, and the payout sensor 37a to turn on and the payout sensor 37b to turn off. (timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out in front of this medal bounces back, hits this medal, is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" in step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Also, for example, assume that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, it becomes "No" in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modified Example of Sixth Embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. can be set as appropriate.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotating direction of the hopper disc 101 is clockwise during the medal payout process. The medals held in the tray may be sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103 .
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the hopper motor 36 may be a stepping motor, for example.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 20, but may be the flow shown in the flow chart of FIG. 21, for example. Even with such a flow of payout processing, ejection of medals can be detected. However, in such a flow of payout processing, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medals bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute push back the medals to be ejected next.
20 and 21, the same step number is given to the same process.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Seventh embodiment>
It relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached inside the cabinet 13 and the sub control board 80 attached to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. FIG.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
The cabinet 13 is configured in a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have it.

Furthermore, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided above the medal payout device 15 inside the cabinet 13. A display device 14 is arranged.
The pattern display device 14 also has a rectangular frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by the reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is accommodated in this reel board case 121. As shown in FIG. This reel control board 120 controls driving of the three motors 32 .

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position above the pattern display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13 . More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. By rotating the front door 12 around the hinge, the front opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout opening through which the medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and the medals paid out from the medal payout opening are received. A medal receiving tray is arranged.
Furthermore, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged above the front side (player side) of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper part of the rear surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the sub board case 87 is fixed at a position corresponding to the rear surface side of the front door 12 (the inner surface side of the housing), above the pattern display device 14, and on the rear side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87 .
Also, the sub-control board 80 controls performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , the main control board 50 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 . Then, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, It controls the output of the image display device 23 .

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13 , and the main control board 50 is accommodated in the main board case 56 .
A sub-board case 87 is arranged on the rear surface of the front door 12 above the pattern display device 14 , and the sub-control board 80 is accommodated in the sub-board case 87 .
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
The distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged on the sub-control board 80 . Also, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, the filled electrolytic solution may scatter. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will It may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, electrolytic capacitors 86 are arranged on the sub-control board 80 at positions other than the position facing the main CPU 55 .
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, which in turn prevents the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning. be able to. Also, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 explodes.
Also, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 may cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Electrolytic capacitor 86 on control board 80
is arranged on the main control board 50 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 , it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 .

23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23( a ), the circle indicated by the dashed line is the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 .

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and the main CPU 55 in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50 .
By arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be positioned at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing Example 2;

In FIG. 23(b), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50 is indicated by a dashed line.
In FIG. 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the upper left and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the lower right are arranged at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .
23B, each of the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing Example 3;
23A and 23B, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and indicated by a dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 has four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in both the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. are placed. The remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, although the horizontal direction is different.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 .

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be arranged at a position separate from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing Example 4;
23(a), 23(b) and 24(c), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and indicated by the dashed circle.

In FIG. 24(d), as in FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 86 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50 .
Thus, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23A, 23B, 24C and 24D, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed on the main control board 50 at positions other than those facing the main CPU 55 . By arranging at the position of , even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 will eventually malfunction. You can keep it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with management information display LEDs 74 (also called "role ratio monitor"). This management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous role ratio, and a role ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the number of medals acquired. Means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the special role (RB) is activated, and the "accessory ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals obtained.

Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74. Information can be kept from being unverifiable.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10. FIG.
25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion of the housing of the slot machine 10 (part A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and illustrates the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. FIG. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, the lower portion of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing portion 13c that protrudes toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is closed, the direction in which the first closing portion 13c protrudes is is in the direction of the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is made of sheet metal and fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a second closing portion 12a projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located below the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-like projection projecting rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the projection direction of the second closing portion 12a is 13 direction of the cabinet.

The second closing portion 12a is arranged below the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Further, like the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

As shown in FIG. 25, a third closing portion 12b projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is located above the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12. is provided.
That is, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like projection that projects rearward from the lower back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b can be The protruding direction of the 3 closing part 12b is the cabinet 13 direction.

The third closing portion 12b, like the second closing portion 12a, is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is arranged above the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the third closing portion 12b is also made of sheet metal, like the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing is curved like a left-right inverted U-shape, as shown in FIG. shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 to access the medal payout device 15 or the like.

A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 . This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 . When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece protrudes forward by being biased by a spring.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece, and is in the OFF state. That is, the door sensor is set to be low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is urged by the spring to protrude forward and out of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor does not detect the detection piece and is turned on.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this manner, the opening/closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-rear direction and turning on/off the door sensor.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the state of being pushed in, goes out from the state of entering the door sensor, and turns the door sensor from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as the "detection start position".
Further, when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the OFF state to the ON state.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion is positioned between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c are arranged.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state. is formed as

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor is first turned on from the off state, and then the first closing portion 13c is removed from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It will be.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open, and transmits a door open command to the sub control board 80. The sub control board 80 transmits the door open command. is received, the fact that the front door 12 is open is notified by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. As a result, the hall clerk can be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, the first closing portion 13c does not come off from between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, and the front door 12 is opened. Since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is curved even at the position where the notification to the effect that the wire is started, the wire cannot be inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (a fraudulent act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, a The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the ejection portion 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal ejection port to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15 .

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is defined as "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is defined as "h2", and the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12a are defined as "h2". Let "h3" be the distance from the third blocking portion 12b, and let "w" be the projection width (depth) of the second blocking portion 12a.
Let "d" be the diameter of the medal and "t" be the thickness of the medal.
A typical medal size is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 to replenish the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may drop onto the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.例文帳に追加
In particular, since the hopper 35 is replenished with medals through the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may drop near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if it is set so as to satisfy "h2>t", even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closing portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closing portion 13c will not be removed. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to a medal caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". It is
By setting so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)", it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed while the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit.
Further, even when the door sensor is configured using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b can be detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The first closing portion 13c is arranged between the .

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 . When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. I tried to go outside from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out of the door sensor. can be

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is detected, and turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to be low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is detected, and turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. configured as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed horizontally from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a. You may comprise from three members which carried out.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be composed of two members or may be composed of three members.
Thus, the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

Moreover, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. For example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. You may have a part which does not exist.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a portion where the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not provided, the inside of the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is prevented from entering. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by inserting a wire or the like.
Also, the first closing portion 13c may be part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12 a and the third closing portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12 .

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Alternatively, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. good too.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position on the rear surface of the front door 12 between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. .
Furthermore, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c projecting from the lower back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relation between the distance "h2" between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". .
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If set so as to satisfy "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with medals falling near the first closing portion 13c, the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c will move to the third closing portion. 12b is pushed into the cabinet 13 against its rear end. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not become unable to be closed due to the medal being caught between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set so as to satisfy "w<(d/2)". did.
However, the setting is not limited to this, and may be set so as to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", a medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "w<d", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed so that the front door 12 is closed.

(9) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d/2)<w” and “h1<t”.
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1<t", even if an attempt is made to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the medals will be placed on the second closing portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a. It can be removed so that the front door 12 is closed.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter "d" of the medal, and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set so as to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a without part of the medal protruding from the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medals placed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a. It will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. - 特許庁In addition, the front door 12 does not close due to the tokens placed on the second closing portion 12a coming into contact with the first closing portion 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the effect output on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of game states and the specified number of each game state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special bonuses (accessories), BB (first-class bonus continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special bonus ; Regular bonus), and MB (Second type role continuous operation device; Second type big bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, the RB game is continuously executed during the BB game. In addition, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals to be paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Furthermore, when the number of paid out medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Also, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (second class special role). That is, the CB game is continuously executed during the MB game. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the result of the lottery by the lottery lottery means 61, all minor winnings are repeatedly won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the instant when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum moving frame number is 1 frame). Furthermore, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven game states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. there is The main control board 50 controls the transition of these game states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of inserted medals at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in MB is set to "1", and the specified number in game states other than MB is set to "3".

In addition, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small wins) to be selected by lottery and the winning probability thereof are unique.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the types of conditional devices to be selected by lottery and their winning probabilities are different from RT.
When the RT start condition is satisfied in any game state, the next game shifts to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game shifts to non-RT.

Also, when a special combination is won, winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special combination stops on the effective line.
A game in which the special role is not won is called "non-internal", and when the special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is not stopped on the effective line, that is, the special role is won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal".

Also, the probability that a desired pattern to be stopped and displayed on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line during the period from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames) is called "pull-in." rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective line). line) is called "PB≠1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. It is called "PB=1".

When BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped on the effective line (BB wins), the BB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the current game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the BB game.
Furthermore, if BB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to BB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. A game state in which winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the BB can be appropriately set. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, it may be moved to the inside of the BB. You can move inside.

When RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line (RB wins), the RB game is started from the next game although no medals are paid out in the current game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Then, when the number of paid out medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the RB game.
Furthermore, if RB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to RB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of RB is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to RB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of RB is carried over is called "inside RB".
It should be noted that the transition timing into the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the timing of transition into the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, it may be moved to the inside of the RB. You can move inside.

Also, when the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the game this time, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. When the number of medals to be paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is terminated, and the next game returns to the game state before shifting to the MB game.

Furthermore, when the MB is won but the pattern combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the effective line, the MB winning information is carried over to the next game until the pattern combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB=1", when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is always stopped on the active line in the current game. , and MB.

Further, the condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special prize (role product), a replay (replay prize), and a small prize.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays, Replay 1 and Replay 2, and small roles of common bell, left correct bell, and middle correct bell. , right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
The left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell are collectively referred to as "push order bell".
Further, the "condition device" is operated corresponding to the winning number determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. - 特許庁When one winning number is determined, one or a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and winning flags corresponding to the activated conditional devices are turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the determined winning number corresponds to the winning number. Any conditional device from non-won to MB will be activated.
Both of the two types of replays are individually elected, and do not overlap with other conditional devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell.

Furthermore, Watermelon has a case where it is elected alone and a case where it is concurrently elected with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has a case of winning alone and a case of double winning with BB, and Cherry 2 has a case of winning alone, a case of double winning with RB, and a case of double winning with BB. .
In addition, BB has a case where it wins alone and a case where it wins more than once with watermelon, cherry 1, or cherry 2, but RB never wins alone, it only wins more than once with cherry 2, and MB can only be elected alone, and will not be elected in duplicate with other roles.

In addition, "dividend" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, regarding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell, the payout differs between the prescribed number of 3 (game state other than during MB) and the prescribed number of 1 (in MB). The payout is the same for the specified number of 3 and the specified number of 1.

In addition, the left correct bell is a pressing order bell in which the left first stop is the correct pressing order and the incorrect pressing order is other than the left first stop. , one medal is paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer, and with the prescribed number of 1, 14 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the correct answer, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of pressing the wrong answer.
Similarly, for the middle correct bell, the middle first stop is the correct pushing order, and for the other than the middle first stop, the incorrect pushing order. For the right correct bell, the right first stop is the correct pushing order. , Right first stop is the pressing order bell that is the incorrect pressing order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The combination lottery means 61 draws lots for winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Also, the winning number lottery by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61. FIG. Also, the winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, if the winning number "1" is determined, the "replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Also, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 includes random number generation means, random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and random number extraction based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. A winning number determining means for determining a winning number is provided, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Then, for example, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same between the non-internal and the internal, and the operating condition device may be the same. The conditional equipment used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with winning flag control means 62 . The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the winning number lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 .
In the ninth embodiment, winning flags are provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of "replay 1" included in the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" It is turned on, and other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" , are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if a winning flag for a role that does not carry over winning information is won in the game this time and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. The winning flag is turned off at the end of the game this time regardless of whether or not the player has won a prize.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, when the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the special role is once turned on, the special role will be played. The winning flag is kept on until winning, and when the special combination wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" However, if "BB" did not win in the game this time, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" won in the game this time, "Cherry The win flag of "1" is turned off, and the win flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, it shifts to inside the BB.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61 in the inside of the BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the conditional device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags of "cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 (double winning "Cherry 1 + BB"), and in the inside of the BB, the lottery by the role lottery means 61 wins the number "9" ” (single winning in “Cherry 1”), the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, medium correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. Therefore, although it is not won by lottery by the role lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all minor roles.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, none of the roles are included in "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0", but all The winning flags of the small wins (the seven small wins mentioned above) are turned on.
Also, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the win flags, the win flags for all minor wins (the above seven minor wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag. Prepare. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
A winning number is determined by a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and when the winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means. 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
The stop position determination table selected when the winning flag for Replay 1 is ON and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are OFF is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 is stopped on the effective line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag for the left correct bell is ON and the winning flag for the other bells other than the left correct bell is OFF is the stop switch 42 at the first stop on the left.
is operated, the symbol combination resulting in the payout of 8 medals stops on the effective line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop, the symbol combination resulting in the payout of 1 medal is operated. The stop positions of the reels 31 are determined so that the reels 31 are stopped on the effective line.

In addition, the column of "internal lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number in each game state. Dividing the internal lottery number by "65536" gives the winning probability.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4" The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" is activated is "3000/65536".

In addition, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26(c), the "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated).
Also, the "instruction function" means a function of displaying (informing) the player of an "advantageous operation mode".
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct order of pressing when the winning order of the pressing bell is won.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it is possible to notify the correct pushing order when the pushing order bell wins.
For example, the set number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*". If the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", " When it is determined to be "middle correct bell" or "right correct bell"), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and within BB, when the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell") are determined Except, when non-RT and set numbers are determined to be the same winning number, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, since the winning information of BB is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is decided inside the BB, and in non-RT (non-inside) The ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number is determined to be "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB").
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined in the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "9"("Cherry1" wins alone) is determined in the RB, the "Cherry 1" winning flag and the carried-over "RB" winning flag are turned on. .
Furthermore, “BB” and “RB” are both special roles (accessories), and the winning number “10” (“Cherry 1 + BB” duplicate winning) in non-RT (non-inside) The registered number and the registered number of the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9"("cherry1" is won alone) is determined in the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, when the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and during RB or BB When the number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined, the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special role (accessory) are turned on.
In addition, the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and the winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT are added up to "300", inside RB and BB Matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single win of "Cherry 2") in the interior.
For this reason, even when the winning number "11"("Cherry2" wins alone) is determined in the RB and BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of "advantageous section lottery set number" in FIG. 26(c) shows the set number of each winning number. The odds of winning can be obtained by dividing the winning lottery number by "16384".
For example, in non-RT, inside RB or inside BB, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is It becomes "20/16384".
Also, for example, in non-RT or RT, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is "10000/16384 ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is performed in non-RT and RT. The game is shifted to the MB game from the next game without being inside the game.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, a lottery for replay 1 or replay 2 is carried out, and regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all small combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle Winning flags of seven (correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "replay 2" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "replay 1" and the winning flags of all minor combinations are turned on. , the same stop position determination table as when only the win flag for the left correct bell is ON is selected. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (1 card is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 cards are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals stops on the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left (when the pushing order is incorrect), the symbol combination that pays out 15 medals is stopped. Stop on a valid line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct bell is ON is selected. At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at times other than the right first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
In the first game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 14 cards is reported, and in the second game during the MB game, the pressing order for paying out 15 cards is reported.
As described above, the termination condition of the MB game is set that the number of paid out medals exceeds 14, so by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. can be made In addition, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can acquire 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number "2" from the payout number "29".

Also, in order to inform the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, winning the advantageous section lottery The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Also, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the effect group number selection means 64 . This effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 26(c), an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the effect group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the effect group number "4" corresponding to the winning numbers "4" to "6". ” are determined, and effect group numbers “5” to “13” are determined corresponding to winning numbers “7” to “15”.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 . This pressing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects the determined winning number when a winning number corresponding to the pressing order bell (left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell) is determined by lottery by the lottery lottery means 61. This is for selecting a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the .

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 has control command transmission means 71 . The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 includes, as control commands, information when the bed switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a pressing order instruction number (during AT and correct pressing). (only when the winning number corresponding to the conditional device with order is determined), the effect group number, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning combination, etc. In addition, the game state (non-RT, RT , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), effect group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition device (excluding the left correct bell, the middle correct bell, and the right correct bell) operated by the winning lottery means 61. be able to.
On the side of the sub-control board 80, it is possible to determine whether the left correct bell, middle correct bell, or right correct bell is won by the effect group number. It is not possible to judge which one of the winners (correct answer order).
Also, during the AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 with information ( control command).
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82 .

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 is provided with a effect determination table and the like.
Furthermore, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and is provided in a plurality. to be output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines at what timing and what effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and one of the effect determination tables, and Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is a effect determination table commonly used for inside RB and inside BB. It is a figure which shows.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided. Each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines production with different contents.
For example, the "fixed effect" is a effect that allows the player to know that the special combination has been won, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is the effect after the first stop (after the first stop switch 42 is operated). ``Left first stop effect'' is a effect that indicates that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first; This is the production that is output by

In addition, the column of "effect pattern allocation number" in FIG. 27 shows the allocation number of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. The selection probability of each effect pattern is obtained by dividing the effect pattern allocation number by "256". In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described under each production group number.
For example, in non-RT, the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the selection probability of "no effect" when the effect group number "1" is transmitted is The probability of selection of “character production (lively)” is “20/256”, the selection probability of “conversation production (lively)” is also “20/256”, and the probability of selection of “cut-in production” is “128/256”. (strong effect)” is “0/256”.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, during RB, during BB, during MB) to the sub-control board 80, and Send the performance group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects the effect determination table corresponding to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, which performance pattern is to be output is determined, and outputs of the performance lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, and the effect group number "12" is transmitted, effect output The control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and places the column of effect group number "12" ("BB" wins alone) in this effect determination table. The numbers are used to determine which of the production patterns to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, for example, "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "0" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Select the effect determination table used in common inside the RB and inside the BB shown in FIG. Determines whether to output pattern effects. As shown in FIG. 28, when "non-win" inside the BB, for example, "fixed effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the performance output control means 91 determines the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which the role lottery means 61 wins "non-win" in the inside of BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table for a game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, in non-RT, if the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side sets the winning number "14". , the win flag of 'BB' included in the condition device of 'BB' corresponding to ' is turned on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. This stop position determination table will be referred to as a "BB single stop position determination table".

The "BB single stop position determination table" is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped on the activated line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than BB is not stopped on the activated line. position is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side displays the carried over "BB". 's win flag remains on, and the other win flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to when the "BB" win flag is on and the other win flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" as when "BB" is single-won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.
Therefore, when "not won" by the combination lottery means 61 in the inside of the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same way as when "BB" is solely won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Further, "stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (push sequence and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and the same reel 31 is stopped. Means that the stop roll is displayed.

In this way, when "BB" is won singly by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT and when "not won" by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB, the main control board 50 side is the same. The stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Further, even if the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed on the main control board 50 side and the same stop number is displayed, a different effect is output on the sub control board 80 side, so that a special combination is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is inside (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the side of the sub-control board 80 when non-RT "BB" is elected alone and when "not elected" inside BB, "BB" alone during non-RT is selected. At the time of winning, a performance determination table with a low selection probability of a fixed performance (a performance that a player can understand that the player has won the BB) is selected, and at the time of ``not winning'' in the BB, a performance with a high selection probability of the fixed performance is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player aim for the winning of 'BB' and prevent the inside of the BB from continuing indefinitely, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Also, in non-RT, when the lottery by the role lottery means 61 determines the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB"), and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 The effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) is selected, and the effect group number "6" ("Watermelon + BB" duplicate winning in this effect determination table is selected. ) is used to determine which effect pattern effect is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "watermelon + BB" double winning in non-RT, for example, with a probability of "50/256", "character effect (lively)", "conversation effect (lively)", or "cut-in effect (lively)" "strong effect)" is selected, and "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the effect group number "5" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 selects the effect determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is commonly used inside the RB and inside the BB, and uses the number set in the column of the effect group number "5" (single winning of "watermelon") in this effect determination table. , determines which of the production patterns to output the production. As shown in FIG. 28, when "Watermelon" in the BB is won alone, for example, "Character production (lively)" or "Conversation production (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 /256” to select a continuous effect.
In this way, the effect output control means 91 can be used for a game in which "watermelon + BB" is repeatedly won by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and a game in which "watermelon" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in BB. A performance to be output is determined by using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during the non-internal mode, by showing the player a continuous effect over multiple games, in order to maintain the player's expectation for winning "BB" for a long time, selection of continuous effect at the time of duplicate winning of "Watermelon + BB" Set a high probability.
On the other hand, during the BB, if the player is shown a continuous effect over a plurality of games, the winning of the "BB" will be delayed and the medals of the player will be reduced. The selection probability of the continuous performance at the time of ``non-winning'' is set to be high in order to make the player aim for the ``BB'' prize at an early stage.
In addition, the winning probability of each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous effect may be set high.

Also, in non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon+BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table".

The "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed so that the symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped on the active line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than watermelon and BB is not stopped on the active line. It defines the stop position of the reel 31 .
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, based on the "watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 keeps " While maintaining the win flag of "BB" on, in addition, the win flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to the win number "7" is turned on, and "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. ” is turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Also, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of "Watermelon" and "BB" are ON and the other winning flags are OFF. That is, the same "watermelon + BB stop position determination table" as when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "watermelon" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in the BB, the stop control of the reels 31 is performed in the same manner as when "watermelon + BB" is repeatedly won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, when "watermelon + BB" is won by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "watermelon" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in the BB, the main control board 50 side: The same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Also, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won in non-RT, and when "Cherry 1" is won alone in BB, when "Watermelon + BB" is won in non-RT and in BB Similar to the case where "Watermelon" is won alone, on the main control board 50 side, the same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used. Use to determine the effect to output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" are won in a non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone in BB or RB, "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT As in the case of double winning and the single winning of "watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table. On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thus, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in BB, the allocation numbers of each production pattern are the same. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same.
However, when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the "watermelon" winning flag is on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off, When "watermelon" is won alone during BB, the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on, and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. do. Therefore, the stop control of the reels 31 is different between when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the side of the sub-control board 80 when "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "watermelon" is won alone in the BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the same condition device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 for each game state (selected stop position determination table) is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table ) are different.

Further, in a plurality of game states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 are the same. When the device is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of game states, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means of the combination lottery means 61 is different, and the winning number determined by the winning number determination means of the combination lottery means 61 is different. is activated, the reel 31 stop control (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each game state, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may differ.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Types of wins, types of conditional devices, types of game states, specified numbers in each game state, dividends at the time of winning each win, allocation of internal lottery numbers, and advantageous zone lottery positions shown in the ninth embodiment The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, the allocation of allocation numbers for each effect pattern, and the like are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to game contents.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table for the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in setting 1 is shown, but six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and each setting value has a different internal A number table for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 . Thereby, the sub-control board 80 side judges the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects an effect pattern with a probability corresponding to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit a winning number determined by an internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, and transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by an internal lottery. good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be judged based on the information indicating the winning number and the condition device received.

Also, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the gaming state on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub-control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has been won, but if it does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the game state on the main control board 50 side will be changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side, and the information indicating the effect group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side A production pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination. Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the game state and condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the information indicating ON/OFF of the win flag and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is ON is received, but if the information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the side of the main control board 50 is inside the BB. can be determined.

Further, since the "BB" lottery is not performed during the BB, when the information indicating that only the winning flag of "BB" is ON is received within the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. , it can be determined that the winning number "0"("notwinning") has been determined.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side similarly determined by the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" means winning only for a role other than a special role, and not winning a special role at the same time. , It is used in the sense that a special role and a role other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB is a double winning in the sense that multiple types of roles are being won at the same time, but only the winning role other than the special role is won. Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, they are elected singly.

In addition, when "Watermelon + Control 1 + BB" in non-internal wins (double win) and when "Watermelon + Control 1 in BB" wins (single win), on the main control board 50 side, Since the ON/OFF state of the winning flag is the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
The "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby varying the stop control of the reels 31. It's not a role for

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11"("Cherry2" is won alone) is determined in the RB and BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed when winning a winning combination that is duplicated with the special winning combination.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to display control of the management information display LED 74. FIG.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress) and a setting confirmation state for five seconds from a predetermined timing (for example, when power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when the program is started, etc.). In (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation) and in the RWM abnormal error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of 4-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are turned on, "8888" is displayed. As a result, it is possible to check whether the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are faulty.

If the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered in which the setting value can be changed. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting change state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to be longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at the time of power-on. there is

Here, for example, assume that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, first, all LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on, after which the management information is once displayed on the management information display LEDs 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LEDs 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the administrator (hall clerk) may suspect that there is some kind of problem with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be any time longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. can be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" from left to right.
Also, of the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the left two LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as "identification segments", and the right two LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as "ratio called "Seg".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification Seg High Digit Digit 7: Identification Seg Low Digit Digit 8: Ratio Seg High Digit Digit 9: Ratio Seg Low Digit.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The display of the test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are properly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lighting state and a lighting-out state.
When the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Setting change (mode) in progress (4) Setting confirmation (mode) in progress (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, first, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. The time for which one display is maintained is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds may be acceptable).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a lit state and an extinguished state during the test pattern display time of 5 seconds.
Secondly, the test pattern also includes blinking all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one flashing (lighting and extinguishing).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are indicated by solid lines, and unlit segments are indicated by dotted lines. In addition, the segment DP indicates the lighting state with a black circle, and indicates the lighting state with a white circle.
Further, in the following description, ``.'' indicates that the segment DP is in the lighting state, and ``.'' indicates that the segment DP is in the extinguished state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern indicating "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit and segment G is unlit.
The other is a pattern that displays "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are unlit.
Therefore, '0.' and '-.' have a reverse relationship in terms of the lit and unlit segments, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29(a), "0." is displayed in the identification segment upper digits and the ratio segment upper digits, and "-." is displayed in the identification segment lower digits and the ratio segment lower digits.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second can be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29(a) is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, and "1" is decremented for each interrupt processing. Terminate the display of a). As a result, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045ms".

When the display of FIG. 29(a) for about 1 second ends, the display of FIG. 29(b) follows.
In addition, the display of FIG. 29(b) is obtained by replacing the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." in the display of FIG. 29(a). That is, the display of FIG. 29(b) displays "-." is displayed as "0."
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every one second, and are executed for five seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) are the same display contents as (a), and (d) is the same display contents as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which "7.U.5.0." and the advantageous section ratio are displayed. Also, the character product ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when "0." and "-." or the light cannot be turned off) can be easily determined visually.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "0.-." or as "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusion between the test pattern and the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74. As shown in FIG.
In example 1 of FIG. 29, the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds, with the display contents changed every second. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for display within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable when the test pattern is displayed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when the display is continued until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
Similarly, the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may of course be used in the case where it is displayed within a predetermined period from when the conditions for starting the test pattern display are satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are turned off) are alternately repeated. In other words, it is a pattern that flashes "8.8.8.8.".
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, all segments are maintained in the ON state shown in FIG. 30(a) for 0.3 seconds, and then all segments are maintained in the OFF state shown in FIG. 30(b) for 0.3 seconds. By repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the lighting-out state shown in FIG. 30(b), the flashing state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is decremented by "1" every 2.235 ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is judged that the lights-out time has passed. Thus, by counting the number of interrupts "134", "299.49" ms can be counted.

In example 2 of the test pattern display in FIG. 30 as well, "8." Therefore, it is possible to easily visually determine whether the segment is defective (cannot be turned on or turned off).
Also, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification seg nor the ratio seg is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", since the segment DP is also illuminated, the two cannot be confused.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 stop and the payout process ends). Then, the updated ratio is displayed in subsequent interrupt processing. Here, if the power is interrupted immediately before updating the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the update (calculation) process of the ratio is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. to run. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the ratio updated after the power-off is restored is displayed.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31A, the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in this embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called seven-segment).
These digits 1a-4a are all seven segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.

The digit 5 a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as status display LEDs 79 . In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, actually, as shown in FIG. 31A, the display substrate 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
In the state display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals betted at that time. When one medal is bet, only the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light up. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when medals can be inserted. That is, after the game is over, it lights up before the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. It should be noted that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the number of credits. When the number of bets reaches the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is extinguished.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player of the automatic bet state.
As the state display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A), for example, a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during settlement processing) can be cited, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b are seven-segment displays with dot segments (segment P), similar to digits 1a-4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b indicate upper information type, lower information type, upper numerical value, and lower numerical value, respectively.
Also, the segment P of the digit 2b (information type lower order) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clarify the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Also, the segment P of the digits 1b to 4b can be illuminated when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) digit 5b.
Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
A digit consisting of 7 segments is a 7 segment composed of 7 bar-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. FIG. An LED composed of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED composed of eight segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments". In the book, the term "7 segments" is used to include an LED composed of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, of the digit 1a, for example, segments A to G form 7 segments of the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED and the upper digits of the earned number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
Segments A to G of the digit 4a form seven lower-order digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment P forms an advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.

The digit 5a is an LED that constitutes the status display LED 79. FIG. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to 1-bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to 2-bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to replay display LED 79f. Also, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of the management information. Segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally unlit, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, illuminate when the test pattern is displayed. In addition, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED to clarify the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and to facilitate confirmation. While the test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly lit and extinguished in the same manner as the segments P of other digits, or may be lit all the time.

Further, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is turned off, it indicates that the setting is being checked, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is confirmed during setting change.

Also, FIG. 32 illustrates the configuration of the segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B, . . .
For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1a, segments A to F are lit and segments G and P are extinguished, so the segment data is "00111111(B)".

When the digit 4a is displayed as "1" and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the segments B, C, and P are lit, so that the segment data becomes "10000110(B)".
Furthermore, when three medals are betted before the start of the game and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111(B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) for transmitting digit signals and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) for transmitting segment signals are provided. .
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and setting value display LED 73. FIG.

For output port 2, digits 1-5 are assigned to bits D0-D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2-5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a "1" signal is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) A drive signal is provided.

Also, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, with bits D0 to D7 assigned to the segment A to P signals, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer 200, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100. FIG. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, an external signal 4 indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or that the power supply was interrupted, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

A data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 controls to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. , a sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 4B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game, and in parallel with this main processing, an interrupt processing ( I_INTR) (FIG. 53 to be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) should be lit. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so as to light the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by shifting it to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting one digit to the right. Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit with five interrupts forming one cycle. Specifically, in FIG. 34A, for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digits 5a and 5b to be illuminated. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED D78 and numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be illuminated. .

FIG. 34B is a diagram showing the data configuration of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, . . . , the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of output port 2 .
As shown in FIG. 34(B), digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be illuminated during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be illuminated during setting confirmation. be. note that. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the "1" bit becomes the digit to be lit in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00010000 (B)", which is the digit 5. Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game play), a segment signal is output from the output port 3 to enable lighting of the status display LED 79, but no segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is controlled not to light up.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Lighting is possible.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits) and a digit 4 signal (lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78) are output, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is caused to display "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), when generating the segment signal for output port 3, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. by And the advantageous section display LED
When the flag is on, a value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is output from the output port 3 as the segment signal. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 shows the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of data stored in the RWM 53. FIG.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76 . In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit amount into a decimal number is stored as the credit amount data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , is data for displaying the upper digits of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, and the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76 .

The address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). Acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 . In the acquisition amount data, similarly to the credit amount data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digits. Data.
In this embodiment, when a minor winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the winning minor winning combination on the winning number display LED 78.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win count data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the win count display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "01".

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when an 8-card hand is won, and the payout number data is stored at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8"→"7"→...→"0".
On the other hand, the winning number data stored at the address "F011(H)" is "0"→"1"→"2"→ . . . , "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 also counts up like "0"→"1"→"2"→...→"8".

In addition, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data during setting change. By displaying "88" on the winning number display LED 78, it is possible to recognize from the front side of the gaming machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lit). Since the upper limit of the payout number of medals is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the payout number.

Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment to be described later, when the condition for designating the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the before the acquisition), instruct (display, notify) the specified number to the acquired number display LED 78 . In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the obtained number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . The pressing order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the pressing order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “=1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1(H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Also, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replays and accessories are activated. For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which will be described later, is read, and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is reached. Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared at step S413 in FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
In addition, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031(H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for judging the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, Replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically at step S279 (start switch acceptance process) during the main process of FIG.

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, the payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041(H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41) in the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game when the winning combination is not won, the payout number data buffer is stored. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet upon winning a replay, and stores "2" or "3" in this embodiment.
The automatic bet number data is set at step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in medal management processing (detecting inserted medals and performing bet processing and credit addition processing) in step S276 during the main processing in FIG.

The address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is the one shown in FIG. 34A, and is updated each time an interrupt process is performed, as described above.
The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when it is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to an advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, first, there are cases where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, but is illuminated afterward (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on once. The advantageous section may end without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct pressing order is notified) in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval is displayed. LED 77 is lit.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Also, during the game end check processing in the final game of the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished. Specifically, when the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval display LED flag storage area is initialized (the advantageous interval display LED flag is cleared). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating;
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game is finished) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the winning combination in the game must be determined, so the time before the start switch 41 is operated (before the combination lottery) is excluded. .
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous interval clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous interval. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous interval clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, so it consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of difference coins during the advantageous interval, and is also called "MY counter".
The difference number counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets itself, but stores a "value corresponding" to the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets at least during the advantageous interval, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous interval (normal interval).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference counter value is executed including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
is updated as
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is changed again. Since it is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the post-calculation difference counter value is a value that has undergone a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). A method of determining whether or not a digit has been digitized will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is large relative to the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal period, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on a winning of a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

36A and 36B are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the differential number initially progressed in the negative direction as the game progressed, but then turned upward in the middle when, for example, AT was started. Since the difference number counter counts "0" when the difference number becomes the lowest value in the progress of the game, the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

In addition, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. does not meet the conditions for ending the advantageous section.
In the next game, assuming that the maximum number difference in the gaming machine is obtained, the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15", so the difference number in the next game is "+14". The difference counter value at the end of the next game is "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met.
Therefore, the maximum possible value of the difference number counter is "2414 (D)".

Whether or not the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" can be determined not only by reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating. It also includes determining the value of the difference number counter (same below).
Further, when determining whether or not "2400 (D)" has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, if it is determined that "2400 (D)" has not been exceeded, The register difference counter value is stored (saved) in the RWM 53 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. is also possible.

Further, Example 2 shows an example in which, as in Example 1, the differential number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but it turns upward in the middle when, for example, AT is started. . In example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. That is, irrespective of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game so far, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number becomes the lowest value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

When updating the difference counter during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation can occur when a special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such cases,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When "2400 (D)" is exceeded, a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that time.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section, the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section. If the process is executed regardless of whether or not, it is cleared even when the difference number counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal interval.

On the other hand, if the processing for clearing the difference counter is specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
When starting the advantageous section (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (set to an initial value of "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45 to be described later). Therefore, it does not matter how many difference number counters there are before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous section.
When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval is to prevent data (values) relating to the advantageous interval from being carried over to the normal interval when the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval is entered. Clearing of the difference number counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, (a) showing example 1 and (b) showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts ("A" in the figure) to "B" in the figure. example. In addition, AT does not start at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, omen, AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state (While waiting for a replay to win), the difference may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Also, even when AT is started, the difference number may decrease if the winning order bell is not easily won for a long time.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it becomes "0" at "A" in the figure. In addition, as described above, the difference number counter value is maintained at "0" under the condition that the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, the difference counter value remains "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Moreover, the example which the number of differences turned to increase from the "B" point is shown. This also increases the difference number counter value. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value has exceeded "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" is reached in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the advantageous section ends. (Moving to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference number counter starts at the point when the difference number becomes the lowest value after the start of the advantageous section, not the difference number from the start of the advantageous section. Tokens will not be given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). As a result, it is possible not to arouse the gambling spirit of the player.

The above point will be described more specifically with numerical examples.
For example, if the specifications are such that AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference number may decrease as the game progresses in the advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section starts, but the AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200".

Next, when the player Y starts playing the game on the gaming machine, when the difference becomes "-50", the AT is won and the AT is started. After starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds "+2400", Player Y will be able to obtain "2400+250=2650" medals. .
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition as "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value to when it exceeds "+2400"", for example, other players can It prevents you from being able to acquire it, including, so as not to arouse the gambling spirit.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37(b) shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, becomes positive at point "D", and then the advantageous section starts at point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at time "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to “0”).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference number counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to count positively from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

Returning the description to FIG.
Address "F067 (H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and this is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Also, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final game of the AT, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50), which will be described later. In addition, the AT flag is included in the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section.

The address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game number counter stops counting (decrementing) after it reaches "0".
The update (subtraction) of the AT game number counter during AT is after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 to be described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the number of AT games counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is at most "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by a lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the number of AT games may be added, and when winning an additional lottery, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. Also, when winning the addition, the number of additional winnings is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

Next, each process during a game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 . When the power is turned on, the program start processing in FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, the setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to maskable interrupt, etc.), and the parity bit to be added to the control command to be transmitted. setting (for example, setting to even parity, etc.). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54 to be described later). This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag has a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation is performed for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 where the current checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not ended, the process returns to step S204 to continue the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Also, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 are to be initialized, the same processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53 .

At step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value ("No" in step S203), or when it is determined that there was an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, power-off Abnormal values are stored as recovery data.

In the next step S207, the level data of a prescribed input port 51 is stored in a prescribed register (for example, A register). Next, proceeding to step S208, it is judged based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51 whether or not the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" means a signal of a door switch (switch that turns on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) of the predetermined input ports 51, a setting door switch (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door may be omitted.) Signal of the setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) signal There are three.

The door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change processing of step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change processing of step S212. .
That is, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or when the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal cannot be turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so transition to setting change processing is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off restoration data is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S212 for setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), and when it is determined not to be abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. is a flag that Then, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
In addition, although the setting change disable flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change disable flag does not have to be provided when the configuration is such that the setting change is always possible. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data relating to the progress of the game. The ranges shown in FIG. 35 are all within the use area. On the other hand, "outside the use area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data irrelevant to the progress of the game. Specifically, there is a storage area in which data relating to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is stored.

The "predetermined range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes set value data (address "F000 (H)"), game state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range that does not initialize the flags of the special roles that have the "predetermined range".
Therefore, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, when the BB2 is inside (when the winning flag of the BB2 is ON) before the power is turned off, if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process is executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data on advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 35 are to be initialized here.

Next, proceeding to step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S<b>223 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, in step S224, the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 is initialized (within the use area of the RWM 53). In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 has ended. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Although the AF register is originally intended to be saved in the F (flag) register, the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, in step S227, a predetermined range outside the use area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. FIG. Also, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When the power-off recovery data is determined to be a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S<b>229 , the main control board 50 stores “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 . Here, the "specific range" is the range to be initialized when it is determined that the power failure is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for ratio display.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization is finished, the process proceeds to step S232.
At step S232, the AF register saved at step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing in this embodiment, processing for setting the period of timer interrupt (“2.235 ms” in this embodiment) is included. After the processing of step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, it is configured so that interrupt processing is not executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the start of setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a register in order to inform the sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.

"Output request setting" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. FIG. Also, the control command here means not only the command to be actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes 2-byte time waiting processing (wait processing) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted (until the set number of interrupts becomes "0" by subtracting "1" for each interrupt number). This waiting is also called delay processing or waiting processing because the main processing does not proceed. It should be noted that during this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

Thus, the reason why the two-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side ends in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes a long time, the main control board 50 side executes a two-byte time waiting process. This is particularly because the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 is still in the process of being initialized, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization process, and the process proceeds to progress the control process of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board. 80 can be prevented from being out of sync with the progress of the control process.
After executing the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83, and a sufficient time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. do. As a result, after the RWM 83 is initialized on the sub-control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S236, the process after step S237 does not proceed (the main process does not proceed).

After the end of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process advances to step S237 to store setting change display data as acquisition number data. Next, in step S238, the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, lighting of digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquisition number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) becomes possible.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, "8" can be displayed for each of the digits 3a and 4a ("88" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (setting value display The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the obtained number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, whether or not the setting change switch is turned on is determined by judging rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data of the RWM 53 (address "F000(H)") is stored (updated). When the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined that the rise data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240, the set value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned ON in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting change switch is ON.

After it is determined to be ON in step S240, if the interrupt process is executed even once, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned OFF. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON in step S240. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process advances to step S244 to clear the acquisition number data (to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245 to store the value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal in the LED display request flag.

The display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquisition number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244.
In addition, "0" is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245. Also, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) is not lit because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, in step S246, similarly to step S234, an output request setting at the end of setting change is performed. This process ends the setting change process, and transfers data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80 side. This is a process of setting a control command to notify to. Next, proceeding to step S247, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248 and shifts to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the setting value data is read, and whether the range of the setting value data is normal (within the range of setting values 1 to 6), in other words, "F000 (H)" It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S264 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so please initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). there is
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has been completed.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, initialization of the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This processing is processing for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before power-off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, the process of setting the cycle of the timer interrupt, and is the same process as the step S233 described above.
Next, in step S263, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if "No" is determined in step S203 (when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after power failure. In this case, since it is determined as "Yes" in step S209, the process advances to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is determined "No" in steps S222 and S228, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" is initialized.

2) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, when the setting change processing is performed, steps S222 and Since "Yes" is determined in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, if the setting change processing is not performed, the power restoration processing ( 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the RWM 53 is initialized (within and outside the use area) at the time of normal power-on. This initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main processing is processing for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer, as described above, is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (eg, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S272, game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, storing, etc. an operation state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, update processing of soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computation processing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S278.

In step S279, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the specified specified number display data and the payout number data were stored as the acquisition number data before that, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where a specified number is instructed (displayed) on the acquisition number display LED 78 before the game is started. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, there is a case where the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed with "00" (or extinguished).
Also, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared at this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43 to be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 41).
It should be noted that after the start switch reception (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but not limited to this, after the combination lottery process in step S282, after all reels 31 stop (step S290 and later) AT game number counter update may be performed.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is completed (after step S300), the AT difference number counter to update.

In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery (corresponding to the above-described "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when it is in the advantageous section but not in AT (for example, when the main game state is CZ), in step S348 in FIG. 44, AT lottery processing is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284 to set the push order instruction number (M_ORD_INF). This process is the process shown in FIG. 48. During AT, when the instruction function is activated in the game (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated, This is the process of displaying the pressing order instruction information.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has passed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". is. In step S279, when it is determined that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

At step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the reel 31 to rotate. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, there is a case where the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
It should be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinguishing may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the pattern is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking away symbol) that should not be displayed on the active line is displayed, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Execute unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number-of-payout data and the number-of-payout data buffer described above.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. The processing of steps S295 and S296 prohibits the interrupt immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. Next, the flow advances to step S298 to execute ratio setting processing. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio set processing is that the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and when the program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if an interrupt process is entered in , the program in the used area and the program outside the used area will coexist, and the processing will become complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301 to perform game end check processing (_M_GAME_CHK). This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and clears a condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, in step S302, an output request is set at the end of the game, and a control command is set 1 in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time in this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. FIG. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player completes the game by operating the settlement switch 43, "00" will be displayed after about one minute. be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of vacant machines by recognizing them as vacant machines by hall clerks and other players.
In addition, instead of displaying "00" on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 (higher digits and lower digits) may be extinguished, or the higher digits of the acquired number display LED 78 may be extinguished and the lower digits may be turned off. may display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the hall clerk or another player can recognize the empty table.

Next, the process advances to step S312 to execute the process of initializing the pressing order instruction number. This processing is processing for clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB actuation symbol is displayed. In this processing, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the data of the symbol combination display flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the obtainable number of coins when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum possible number of wins in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Furthermore, in the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operation status flag (stored, for example, in the A register at this time) in the address "F030 (H)" of the RWM 53 . As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of two games (or two wins), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not met ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set process. When it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S320, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the RB operation, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are saved. This process stores (stores) "2 (H)" in the number-of-games counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 when RB is activated, and This is a process of saving (storing) "2(H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

Both the number-of-games counter when RB is activated and the number-of-wins counter when RB is activated are set to "2 (H)" as an initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", A counter that is decremented by "1" each time. However, not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of wins increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)” may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not a condition specifying the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is instructed. However, in a twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, there is a case where a specified number is instructed at the start of a game, so this processing is included in this flow chart. If it is determined that the condition for instructing the prescribed number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for instructing the prescribed number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the instruction specified number display data is stored as the acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the prescribed number "2" is instructed, and when the prescribed number "2" is instructed, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "0A". Then, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B(H)" is obtained as the acquisition number data. memorize
The reason why "0A" is displayed instead of "02" when the specified number "2" is displayed is to avoid confusion with the number of payouts, the error number, and the pressing order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digits. Also, the error number is not displayed with "A" in the lower digits.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal Jam Error HE: Medal Empty Error (No Medal in Hopper 35)
H0: Discharge sensor 37 error CE: Medal retention error CP: Medal illegal passage error CH: Passage sensor 46 error C0: Insertion sensor 44 error C1: Medal abnormal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door open E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. An error whose upper digit of the error number is "E" means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digits of the error number, there is no chance of confusion between the error number and the prescribed number of instructions.
Further, the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, there is no confusion between the pressing order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the specified specified number display data as the winning number data, there is a case where the payout number data in the previous game is stored as the winning number data (when a small winning combination was won in the previous game). ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (see FIG. 49 to be described later) for winning a prize. Therefore, when storing the instruction regulation number display data, there is a case where the previous payout number data is overwritten. However, without being limited to this, a process of clearing the obtained number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped. When it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination for replay has not been stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game (bet number data). Next, in step S325, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326 to set an output request for the operating state. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, it transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating that the replay has been activated, that the 1BB has been activated, and the like. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

It should be noted that before (meaning before the filing of the present application, not "known"; the same shall apply hereinafter), during the bet number addition process, specifically, during the main process of FIG. 41, in step S276 In the medal management process, the clearing process of the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if a minor winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning a minor winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared when the bet number was added.
However, in this embodiment, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When the specified number is instructed, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. This is because, in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number has been instructed, the state in which the prescribed number has been instructed is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, and the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG. 41 when the start switch 41 is operated.

However, not limited to this, when the prescribed number is instructed, the instructed prescribed number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated, but when the prescribed number is not instructed, as before, when adding the bet number Acquisition number data may be cleared (by medal management processing). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the clearing process of the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the stipulated number has been instructed in the current game, and when it is determined that the stipulated number has been instructed. is not cleared, and clears the acquired number data when it is determined that the specified number is not specified.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing AT game number counter update processing in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends. That is, if it is not in AT, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 and determines whether or not the bet number of the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart ends. In this embodiment, during AT, only when the game is played with the number of bets (specified number) "3", the AT game number counter is updated (the process relating to the instruction function is executed). In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

When proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not decremented (updated) when the bet number is not "3" even during the AT.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but the process is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. may For example, in FIG. 41, only the advantageous section transition lottery process may be performed in step S283, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) in the current game is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, when the number of bets (predetermined number) is "3", the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, can be executed, and step S348 is enabled. AT lottery processing (processing related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (prescribed number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), step S348. proceed to When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (when already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the combination lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination for the lottery of the advantageous section is won. Here, detailed explanation is omitted, but for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win a special role and a small role, if you win a small role (rare small role), it is the target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because the processing relating to the advantageous interval is not executed in a game in which the combination is not won (a game in which the conditional device is inactive).
If it is determined in step S343 that the target lottery result has been obtained, the process proceeds to step S344. elected).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result.
Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the hands to be drawn, the middle stage cherry (single winning or double winning with special hand) is set as a fixed hand (a hand that always wins) in the advantageous section transition lottery. However, when the middle cherry is won, it may be determined that it is a result of a specific lottery.
When it is determined in step S344 that it is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that it is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when it is not a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and when it is a specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always transition to an advantageous section). do). It should be noted that it is also possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery even if the result of the specific lottery is determined, and to set such that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous interval transition lottery, for example, a lottery table in which numbers corresponding to the lottery result are predetermined is used to perform lottery in the same manner as the lottery lottery. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning in the advantageous section, if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning in the advantageous section, and so on. are mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not eligible for the advantageous section lottery, the result is "No" in step S343. At times, in the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery is conducted using a lottery table having at least "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery of step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags, counters, etc. based on the winning of the advantageous section.
At the next step S348, an AT lottery is conducted. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In addition, not limited to the example of this embodiment, AT may always be started (without AT lottery) when shifting to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, it is always non-AT, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to execute AT.

FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous interval clear counter to the initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous interval "1500 (D)".

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference counter. If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal section (non-advantageous section) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when it is not the advantageous section, the process of step S353 is unnecessary. However, the initial value "0" may also be set for noise prevention.
At the end of the advantageous section, the initialization process including the difference counter is executed, so the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, if the specification is such that the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous interval, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous interval is "0", so it is possible to omit the processing of step S353. .
On the other hand, when the difference counter continues to be updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, the difference counter is set to "0" in step S353. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the combination lottery result. For this lottery, as in step S345, an AT lottery may be performed using a lottery table in which winning numbers are determined for each combination lottery result.
It should be noted that the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and for example, a combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes AT initial game number determination processing. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Here, the main game state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It should be noted that it is possible to provide an omen as a main game state after the AT is won and before the AT is started, but in this embodiment, for the sake of simplification of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. and Information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that AT is not won in step S362 and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing AT initial game number determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, at step S371, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning combination lottery in the current game is winning of a fixed combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle stage cherry is set as the fixed combination. When it is determined that the fixed combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the example of FIG. 47, the specification is such that the number of AT initial games is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won. A lottery may be conducted. In other words, even if the lottery result is one combination, any number of games may be selected from the plurality of number of games.
Also, during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an addition lottery for the AT game count. When the AT game number addition lottery is won, the determined addition number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (the condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the relevant game is AT and a combination having an advantageous pushing order such as pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the indication condition is satisfied.
In addition, when winning the advantageous section in the game this time ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and winning AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section from the next game , this time the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether or not the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to the number of bets "3" (one prescribed number). Therefore, even if the game is started with the number of bets "2" during the AT, for example, and a winning combination with an advantageous pushing order (for example, bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct pushing order is not reported).

In the next step S383, the winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the winning lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 . Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384 to set a pressing order instruction number table (not shown). Here, the leading address of the pressing order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. In this processing, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order instruction number table is obtained. As a result, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing the push order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pressing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery winning combination is the same as in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process advances to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the current game is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the game state is such that the interval Sim payout rate exceeds “1” is preset, and here, it is determined whether or not the game state is the preset game state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. By reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the interval Sim ball output rate "1". Determine whether or not If it is determined that the game state is in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and if it is determined that the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is not yet lit and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning the advantageous interval transition lottery, the advantageous interval display LED 77 may be lit before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate does not exceed "1", at an arbitrary timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lit.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, in step S392, it is determined whether or not medals are to be paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0". When it is determined to be "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals have been paid out, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals will be paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of credit amount data is obtained.
Next, proceeding to step S394, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data obtained in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the credit amount has reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S398. (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, the standby time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the waiting time, the number of times of interrupt processing is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, the B register value is "0000
0000(B)” and “00101110(B)” as the C register value.
Next, the flow advances to step S396 to execute 2-byte time wait processing. This process is a process of decrementing the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process proceeds to step S397 to add "1" to the value of the credit amount data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes "+1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a single medal payout process (a process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, it is determined that one medal has been paid out correctly. to decide.
By the above processing, the number of credits is increased until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the processing of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the number-of-payouts data. In this step S400, only the number-of-payout data is updated, and the value of the number-of-payout data buffer is not updated.

Next, proceeding to step S401, it is determined whether or not medal payout has been completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the number of payout data is "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that the number of payout data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 to continue the processing.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process of adding "1" to the number of credits, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. As a result, the player can see that the display of the credit amount display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added to this, "display "08"→waiting process for 100 ms→display "09"→100 ms Standby processing → . . . → 100 ms standby processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" in an instant.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process for each addition of "1", a payout sound ("plur... ”) can be synchronized with the counting up of the number of credits.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the two-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually pay out one medal, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a two-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing the flag of the condition device (also called winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This processing is processing for clearing conditions other than the conditional device for the special combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, the processing for clearing the conditional device for the special combination is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is extinguished. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, in step S413, the replay activation flag is cleared. This processing is processing to set the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. 41, as described above. Thus, in this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but not limited to this, for example, in FIG. check processing) or within the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter is shown, but in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" determine whether it happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. At step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process of updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, etc., and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or 52, which will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows example 1 and FIG. 52 shows example 2. FIG.
The following processing is executed in the advantageous section counter management.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied 4) When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, initialize (clear) )
Also, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (predetermined number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is judged whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when it is in the advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", there is no digit reduction, and "0000(H)" is maintained. In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is one instruction (one step) that only subtracts "1". is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after the subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required for updating the count value can be greatly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous interval from the value of the advantageous interval clear counter, and to determine whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied (for example, when the game in the advantageous interval reaches 1500 Judgment as to whether or not a game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary termination condition has been satisfied, etc.) is also unnecessary.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag is "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0") The process proceeds to step S424. It should be noted that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this game is not a game in an advantageous section (this game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section) is).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. Note that when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game in the advantageous section in the current game ends (the next game is in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) means that

In step S425, the value of the difference number counter is acquired. This process is to read the value of the difference number counter and store it in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay wins). In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1". When it is determined that the regame operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is obtained. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference number counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429 to acquire the value of the bet number data. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" as a result of the subtraction in step S430. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the HL register value is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference number counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference number counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit. The upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, the carry flag becomes "0" when the HL register value is larger, and becomes "1" when the HL register value is smaller. Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit is not exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area relating to the advantageous section (clears the data relating to the advantageous section). The data relating to the advantageous interval includes an advantageous interval clear counter, an advantageous interval type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous interval display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game counter, and the like. Further, there is information on the main game state. Note that the information about the advantageous section does not include the RT status number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" due to the end of the advantageous section. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010(B)", the LED display counter would normally be updated to "00000001(B)" in the next interrupt processing, and the LED Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". As a result, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001 (B)" is delayed, so that it may appear as if it is turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value for minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set at step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above are examples of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you will be

Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. The reason why the advantageous interval type flag is "1" at this time is that the advantageous interval transition lottery was won in the game this time, and the advantageous interval type flag was set to "1" at step S351 in FIG. In this case, it is judged as "Yes" in step S423, and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when proceeding to step S436 via step S435, since the advantageous section type flag has been cleared in step S435, it will not be determined as "No" in step S436.

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063 (H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference number counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for this processing is as follows.
For example, assume that the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)" when the difference counter is "2 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference number counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually, "FFFF (H)")", and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when adding the number of payouts, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", resulting in "8 (D)", and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is that it will occur).

Since the difference number of the game this time is "+6", simply by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference number counter "2(D)" before the update, the carry flag becomes "1" and irregular situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether the carry flag is "1". If the determination is made based on whether or not the carry flag is "1", it will be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry flag has not occurred, and the difference counter will be initialized in step S432. It will set the value. The carry flag is set to "1" regardless of whether a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if the number of payouts "9 (D)" is added first, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that time, and then bet. Subtracting the number yields "8(D)". In this case, since no carry occurs, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reason, when updating the difference number counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the advantageous section counter subtraction process (
Step S422) is executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" in step S423, that is, when it is a non-advantageous section), update processing of the difference counter (steps S425 to S430) , the process proceeds to step S436. Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section. is not executed to improve processing efficiency. For this reason, the processing order is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed first, and then the difference counter update processing is performed. Of course, it is determined whether it is in the advantageous section, and if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented if the specification is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous section clear counter and the update processing of the difference number counter are executed. It is also possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter prior to the process.

Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (when the replay wins), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, the answer at step S434 is "Yes". , can end the advantageous section. On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the processing of this flowchart may be ended when "Yes" is determined in step S426.

Further, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed in step S426. S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game in which the replay operation symbols are stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the number of payouts in the relevant game is regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts) and the number of bets in the next game is regarded as "0" and the difference counter is updated. . However, for example, SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during the advantageous section, and when SB is won, one SB game with the bet number of "1" is executed in the next game, but this SB game There is a case where the replay is won and the replay operation pattern is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the bet number is "3" (a game other than the SB game cannot be played with the bet number "1"). However, in this case, the number of presumed payouts in the SB game does not match the number of bets in the next game, so how the difference counter should be counted becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter in the game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter and then the number of payouts is added, the carry flag may become "1" even if there is no carry-over in the end. It has been explained that whether the carry flag is "1" or not cannot be determined whether it is "0" or not.
On the other hand, in example 2 of FIG. 52, after subtracting the number of bets from the difference number counter (step S430), the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digits) value of the HL register value is "1". is less than "0".

for example,
Difference number counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Suppose that
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a delimiter for every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)"value", for example,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "difference number in current game<HL register value", for example, firstly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Secondly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Difference number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after operation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit of the difference number counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
becomes.
Since the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is judged that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number is The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not satisfied, and the next game was started. Suppose you migrate. In the next game, the difference number increases most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference number in the game is "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
becomes.

When the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
As described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
and the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0" when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)".

As described above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1", except for the case of carry-down.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference number counter value must be "32768 (D)". The advantageous section will not continue until

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0000 (H) (before operation)
, the HL register value after the operation is "FFFD(H)".
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference number counter) = 0002 (H)
, the HL register value becomes "FFFF(H)" when the difference number counter is updated.

Here, "FFFF(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
, and the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Thus, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference number counter, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when there is no carry-down, and the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when there is a carry-down. 1”.
Therefore, when determining whether or not the operation result is less than "0" in step S441 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the operation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the operation.
Since it is determined whether or not the operation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the value of the difference number counter.

As is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference number counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a carry-down occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6, D5 and D4 bits become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , D
It may be determined whether the 5 bit is "1", and it may be determined whether the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, even in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. It is also possible to determine whether there is

51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is "0" is determined. Determination (step S424), determination of whether or not the difference number counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and initialization of information on the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (prescribed number) in this game. , is executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing the game with the number of bets (prescribed number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 in a 2.235 ms cycle (but not limited to this time cycle) in parallel with the main processing.
After shifting to interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 . Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an execution request for interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. FIG.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of lighting LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. FIG.
Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include non-recoverable errors and recoverable errors. In the case of non-recoverable errors, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the error is recoverable. An error is displayed by this LED display control every time an interrupt is processed.

Next, in step S457, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bed switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals from various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rise data, trailing edge data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5") is checked. ) determines whether or not When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is called an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

In step S459, internal random number check processing is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that turns on when an error occurs in the internal random numbers, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for the combination lottery (such as when the random number update is slow) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S460, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred in the internal random number (whether the error flag is ON). If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to shift to unrecoverable error processing. The content of the error display at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the flow advances to step S462 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53 ) to the sub-control board 80 .
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the subsequent interrupt processing (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that time), this step S464 A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by .

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (the signal is transmitted to the external common terminal board 100).
Next, the flow advances to step S467 to perform ratio display preparation processing. This process is a process of updating a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, in step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235ms. controlled.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery is performed).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, transmission of control commands to the sub-control board 80, etc.) is executed. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 . This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50 detects a predetermined input voltage when the voltage becomes a predetermined value or less (in the example of FIG. 3, V1 or less). Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input. Furthermore, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
When it is determined that the power-off detection signal is on in the previous interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S482, and when it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

At step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the switch is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is judged that it is ON, it progresses to step S483.
When both of the above steps S481 and S482 are determined to be "Yes" (when the power failure detection signal is input in succession for two interruptions), it is determined that the power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this processing, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reel 31 is rotating) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
Next, in step S484, a power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM53. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and the target program use area includes the program work area, unused area, stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Here, the data to be stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
Then, when the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all the data of the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488 to enter a reset wait state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the output of the reset signal is awaited.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. FIG. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000 (B)" from the output port 4 in the same manner as the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. In this process, bit "1" of the LED display counter is updated by right-shifting by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, an LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)". Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, in step S497, error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating ON/OFF of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. Storage areas and storage areas for storing bet display data indicating ON/OFF of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when game can be started, "0" when game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay winning, "0" when replay not winning
D6: Not used D7: Not used Bits D3 to D5 of the LED display data correspond to segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Also, the bet display data is configured as follows.
When 0 bet: 00000000
When betting one card: 00000001
When 2 cards are bet: 00000011
When 3 cards are bet: 00000111
Bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Also, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) are OR-operated (synthesized), and the operation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. FIG. An OR operation of the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (BET display data) provides data indicating whether the state display LED 79 is on or off. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3. FIG.
Next, in step S499, the register for setting the segment data for output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. to judge. When it is judged to be "0", it is judged that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and an LED segment table other than the error number (credit amount, payout amount, setting value, display during setting change, pressing order An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions) is provided and stored in the ROM 54 in the usable area. Then, in step S501, the top address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offsets and segment data are defined as follows in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.
Offset "0": Segment data to display "0" Offset "1": Segment data to display "1" Offset "2": Segment data to display "2" Offset "3": Display "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data that displays "4" Offset "5": Segment data that displays "5" Offset "6": Segment data that displays "6" Offset "7": Segment data that displays "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" segment data to display

For example, first, if payout amount data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition amount data, the offset of the upper digits of the amount of payout data is "1" and the offset of the lower digits is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "1" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained.
Secondly, for example, when setting change display data "88(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digits of the setting change display data is "8" and the lower digits are offset. offset is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a lights up, the segment data displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, when the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number is "A", and the offset of the lower digit is "A". The offset is "1". As a result, when the digit 3a lights up, the segment data displaying "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a lights up, the segment data displaying "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, fourthly, for example, when the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is illuminated, segment data indicating "0" is obtained, and when digit 4a is illuminated, segment data indicating "A" is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored at the address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This setting value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the setting value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored in the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is obtained.
Next, in step S503, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the set values. Here, when the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a setting value display request. When it is determined that there is a request to display the setting value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the upper digit offset is acquired. In this process, the credit amount data (A register value) acquired in step S504 is divided by "10 (D)", the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the E register. processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. This process determines whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and determines "Yes" when it is "1". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. This process determines whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, payout number data is stored in the winning number data at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of a minor winning combination. Further, at the timing during setting change, display data during setting change "88 (H)" is stored. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct the specified number, the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Further, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the push order is notified), the push order instruction number "=x (x=one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the error display. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, and it is determined whether or not it is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for error display is set. A description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, the offset for upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not an error display (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)" and store the quotient in the A register and the remainder in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (leading address of LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and corresponds to the address after the addition (LED segment This is the process of storing the segment data of table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522), which will be described later, so the segment data of digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, at step S515, when "Yes" (setting value display request is present) at step S503, and segment data for setting value display is acquired at step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, in step S516, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display digit 5. Here, the display request for digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". When it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and when it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. FIG. When "Yes" is determined in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3. FIG.

In the next step S518, the data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is "0". If the value of the LED flag indicating the advantageous section is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in this interrupt process is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to light the digit 4a. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by performing the OR operation of "10000000" are set as the segment data for output port 3. FIG. As a result, data is set that enables the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a to light up.

Next, in step S519, the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from lighting when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
Then, in step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data for output port 2 and output from output port 2 .
The data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 lights up) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 light up).

Next, in step S521, the segment signal is output from the output port 4. FIG. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when setting value display is requested) or the data cleared in step S519 (when setting value display is not requested). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, output port 4 outputs "00000000 (B)".
Next, the process advances to step S522 to shift to ratio display processing (processing for lighting the management information display LED 74). Note that, in the present embodiment, description of the ratio display process is omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous interval display LED 77 and power interruption (when power interruption occurs while the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt process, when power interruption is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power interruption.
After the power is turned on, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is judged "No" in step S208. The process proceeds to power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is the unused area of the RWM 53, as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at address "F051(H)".

In the power-off restoration process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. Further, when "No" is determined in step S512, it is when there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, when it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", in step S518, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1", and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is lit again when interrupt processing is executed in the power failure recovery processing.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, the result of step S208 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address "F062(H)". It should be noted that when it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by the initialization of the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored, it becomes "0" indicating lighting off.
After that, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the setting value display LED 73 comes in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value can be changed (the setting value can be changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Also, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already " 0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is terminated and the main process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Also, in the main processing of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during rotation of the reel 31, the following will occur. .
When the interruption of the power supply is detected in the interrupt process, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cutoff.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and the state before the power interruption is restored. As a result, the drive signal for the motor 32 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before power-off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In this embodiment, when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) is assumed to drive one step. However, even if a drive signal in a constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive is stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not turned off). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is reaccelerated (restarted). For acceleration of the motor 32, for example, first, 20 interrupts (20×2.235=44.7 ms) drive one step, then 16 interrupts drive one step, 12 interrupts drive one step, and so on. This is a method in which one step is driven in a gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value for lighting 3a (“00000100 (B)” in FIG. 34) is reached, the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)” after 4 interrupts from that point, and digit 4a (advantage zone display LED 77) lights up. The time has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and the reel 31 is accelerated again, as described above, at least several tens of interrupts are required before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. need.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively distant from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are required until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 after the interrupt activation. requires. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 is accelerated again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up until the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is turned off.

Also, in the main processing of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout processing for winning in step S294, the following will occur. . In addition, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 7, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detect the movable piece 39a ( , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been paid out normally. The hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that the medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During the payout of medals, if power interruption is detected in interrupt processing before all the medals are paid out, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG.
is turned off, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when the power is supplied, the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above is performed, and the process returns to step S294 of the main process (FIG. 41) (medal payout process for winning a prize). As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) arrives within 4 interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the medal payout process due to winning is resumed after the power is turned off and the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, after the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at the time when the medal payout process due to winning is completed.

In addition, the following method can be used to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is an instantaneous power interruption.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is extinguished.

Therefore, the process proceeds to step S488 in FIG. 54, after waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and For example, an ON signal of D7 bit (segment P) is output from the output port 3 . In FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S488, and interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after waiting for reset. As a result, even if an instantaneous interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LEDs 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. If the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when the power interruption is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being extinguished at the time of momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the differential number display on the sub-control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game number counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to ON/OFF of the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. It should be noted that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side turns from off to on or from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives information on/off of the AT flag from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has turned from off to on (AT flag rise data) and from on to off (AT flag fall data). .

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during the AT, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT ends. Furthermore, when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended.
Since the main control board 50 executes the initialization processing of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous section, the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 has a sub-difference number counter for counting the difference number during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of AT (except when AT is won during a withdrawal period described later and AT is started), and after that, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that, unlike the difference number counter of the main control board 50, when a digit is digitized, the digit is not corrected to "0", and the digit is left as it is.

For example, when starting AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
Second game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
3rd game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
5th game: winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
Suppose that
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0 (H) - 3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD (H) - 3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) + 5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) - 3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
and will be updated.

When the replay is won, the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the same way as the difference number counter. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, the number of payouts may be set to "0" in the game at the time of winning a replay, and the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replaying) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference number.
Furthermore, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends. Even if it ends, there is a case where the initialization processing is not immediately executed and the count is not stopped. The sub-control board 80 turns on (“1”) the withdrawal flag when ending the AT and continuing the counting of the sub-difference number counter.

The sub control board 80 judges the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub difference number counter continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds a predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. If the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit and the AT ends, and the AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number counter value may reach the upper limit immediately. , so as not to carry over the difference in the number of sheets to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been pulled back (whether or not it has been re-elected) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the AT is finished.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game number counter. The pullback game number counter is for counting the number of games after the end of the AT (during the pullback period). At the end of AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pull-back game number counter, and thereafter, if AT is not won, "1" is continued to be subtracted every game. When the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub-difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
After the end of AT, the sub-control board 80 updates the sub-difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), when winning a special role such as BB and executing a special game such as a BB game, the pullback game counter is subtracted (updated) during the special game )do not do.
On the other hand, when the AT is won before the pullback game number counter reaches "0", the pullback of the AT is successful, and in the subsequent AT, the number of sheets which inherited the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of cards in the first AT: +1000 The difference in the number of cards between the end of the first AT and winning the second AT: -100 If the difference in the number of cards at the start of the second AT is "+900" An image is displayed.

Also, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit in AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped during AT and the number of obtainable numbers (probable difference number of sheets) in the special game related to the special role is "250 (D)": "2414 (D )−250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, the counting of the sub-difference number counter is stopped and the sub-difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are interlocked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "number of sheets obtained during AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference number counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and the advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference number counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, the maximum countable value of the sub difference number counter on the sub control board 80 side is also set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50 .
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number of images displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent the image display of an excessively large difference in the number of bets, and prevent the image display that significantly arouses the gambling spirit.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of cards that can be obtained in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is selected. When is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference number counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game. Clear the number counter (above 2)).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays images such as "Congratulations" and "Congratulations" as images corresponding to the number of difference. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub-difference number counter is not cleared until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, there is a possibility that the difference number of sheets increases during the withdrawal period. For example, as a result of winning a special combination during the withdrawal period and completing the special game, the difference number counter value may increase.
In particular, if the specifications are such that AT is won when a specific BB is won, AT is shifted to after the BB game is finished. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number counter is taken over by the AT after the BB game ends, the upper limit value is reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the withdrawal period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, during the AT withdrawal period, if you win BB with AT and complete the BB game, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub-difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB is finished.

In addition, as described above, even if the special game is entered during the pullback period, the pullback game counter is not decremented during the special game. Then, when a special combination is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when winning the BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". to stop. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, the "250" cards are not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when shifting to AT after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", a BB with AT is won, and then in the BB game "250", the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "1250 (D)". Then, when the AT is shifted to after the BB game ends, the number of difference starts from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and "250" is reached in the subsequent BB game. When the number is obtained, the sub difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)" and exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub-difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" in the AT after the BB game ends.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined to be when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) of "2". does not update the difference number in that game.

Next, the sub-difference number counter management processing will be described using a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently being performed). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the AT is not in progress and the withdrawal flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a bet command capable of determining the number of bets for the game. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. Thus, in the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or pullback period, when the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference number counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When proceeding from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the bet number (“3”) from the sub difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts.
When determining in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub-control board 80 adds the number of payouts to the sub-difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. If it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on in the game this time (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it is AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends. For example, when the AT flag is turned on in the current game (“Yes” at step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” at step S540, i.e. when it is not during the pullback period), the sub-difference number at this time Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference number-of-sheets counter, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. At the next step S542, the sub-control board 80 clears the pullback game number counter. Here, if "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, it corresponds to the case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit "2414 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)" because the difference number increases during the pullback period after the end of the AT.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S543 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50 .
"Yes" in this step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flow chart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process advances to step S546 to clear the sub-difference number counter as described above and terminate the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub-difference number counter value), the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, when the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. When exceeding, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, when the BB game is started (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. The sub-difference number counter is cleared before starting. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number itself is not displayed. For example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed instead of displaying the number of sheets.

At step S538, it is determined that the AT flag is not ON, and when proceeding to step S547 of FIG. , that is, whether or not the AT has ended in the game this time). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned off in the game this time (falling of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551. .

In step S548, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

At step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub-control board 80 sets the initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
By the processing of steps S548 to S550 described above, when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and the initial value of the number of pullback games is "50 (D)". to set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is to set the AT pullback within 50 games as the AT's continuous chan (condition for handing over the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games can be variously set such as "30 (D)", "100 (D)", etc., in addition to "50 (D)".
Also, when the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of the AT, even if the AT is pulled back afterward, the sub-difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after the pull-back. is high, so the pullback flag is not set in such a case.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. In other words, when the sub-difference number counter is greater than or equal to "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is performed after that.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game is in progress). 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the sub-control board 80 proceeds to step S552 and determines whether or not the pullback flag is ON. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game number counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (during the BB game), the pullback game number counter is not updated (decremented). In addition, the pullback game number counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game number counter has become "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

At step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game number counter is cleared. Incidentally, when "Yes" in step S554, since the pullback game number counter is "0", the process of clearing the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when it becomes "No" at step S560, which will be described later, the withdrawal game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game number counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter remains at "0" until the AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game during the BB in operation (BB game). Whether or not the BB game is the final game may be determined on the side of the sub-control board 80 by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. You may decide based on the incoming command.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In step S560, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. As a result, the BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games ) will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. Thus, in the final game of the BB game, the sub-difference number at that point in time is determined during the pull-back period, and when the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the pull-back period is terminated. .

In the above sub difference number counter management, the sub difference number counter is updated at the timing of receiving the bet command. That is, the sub-difference number is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference number counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter as well, after all the reels 31 are stopped, subtraction of the number of bets and addition of the number of payouts may be executed in the same manner as the difference number counter.

Further, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if there is a carry-down), the sub-difference number-counter stores the value (the carry-down value). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the sub-difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry occurs) like the difference number counter, it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the sub-difference number counter may become negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, processing may be performed as follows.
The sub-difference number counter is a 2-byte counter as described above, and its upper limit value is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0(H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not the digit has been truncated. Then, when it is determined that there is a digit drop (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0".

In the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be applied in the same way. A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the payout number, or the difference number is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus symbol is stopped. Also, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. The twelfth embodiment instructs a specified number (bet number) before starting a game when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The display of the pushing order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). Here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the actuation of the instruction function (the process related to the instruction function). However, the invention is not limited to this, and a prescribed number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the role product condition device, the specified number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the role item condition device (special role). When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the BB1 game is started. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.
Also, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the BB2 game is started. The BB2 game ends when 30 or more coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), RT includes non-RT, during BB1, during BB2, during BB1 operation, and during BB2 operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If BB1 is won in non-RT, the game moves to inside BB1, and if BB2 is won, the game moves to inside BB2.
During the inside of BB1, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops inside BB1, the BB1 is in operation, that is, the BB1 game is entered. Similarly, during the inside of BB2, it continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the BB2 is in operation, that is, the BB2 game is entered.
Note that the number of special roles that can be carried over is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 is not elected when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when BB2 is inside, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the specified number is limited to "3" while BB1 is in operation and BB2 is in operation (when the role product is in operation). A game cannot be started with the number of bets "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the prescribed number for non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, which is when the role product is not activated, is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the prescribed number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Also, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is '16384', it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of '16384/16384'.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 is drawn by lottery with the specified number "2", but BB1 is not drawn by lottery. Conversely, with the prescribed number of "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RT is "3" or the specified number inside BB2 is "3", the lottery for the advantageous section is possible. In addition, in the lottery for the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost the advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the "7P" type specification described above.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game progresses inside the BB2 and with the prescribed number of "3". Then, an AT is drawn by lottery inside the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. In addition, it is assumed that BB2, which has carried over winning, is not allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently non-RT, you need to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the prescribed number "2".
Therefore, if it is not RT at the present time, the game is played with the prescribed number of "2" to win the BB2, and the next game is shifted to the inside of the BB2. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within the BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game proceeds with the prescribed number "3" inside the BB2.

In addition, BB2, who wins with the prescribed number of "2", cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the prescribed number is "2". Similarly, BB1 who wins with the prescribed number of "3" cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the active line unless the prescribed number is "3".
For this reason, when BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2" in non-RT, and when the game is progressing with the prescribed number of "3" while shifting to the inside of BB2, even when the role is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to is never stopped on the active line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is stopped, the special game is started, and the medals are not increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), non-RT can win BB2 with a probability of about "1/5", so it is possible to shift from non-RT to inside BB2 early.
Also, in the BB2, when winning a small winning combination or replay, the player wins in the advantageous section with a probability of 100%. Therefore, inside BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

In addition, the instruction function can be activated (execution of a process related to the instruction function) only when the game is played with one specified number, particularly "3" in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section inside the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. , the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . On the other hand, when the game is started with the prescribed number (bet number) "2" during AT, even if the winning order bell is won, the instruction function is not activated.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with the prescribed number of "2" during AT, the difference number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update on everything.
In addition, regardless of the specified number, when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed), the RT always transitions. On the other hand, the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set to be transitionable to any specified number, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set to enable migration only when

In the inside of BB2, when the game is started with the prescribed number "2" due to the player's operation error, and the winning combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which carries over the winning, can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, when the game is started with the prescribed number of "2" due to the player's operation error, and any combination is won in the game, the winning combination won in the game is given priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 which has a win is not stopped and displayed. However, when the replay is won in the relevant game, the next game will also be played with the number of bets "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 having the winning will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in the AT inside BB2, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, it shifts to non-RT (AT). In this non-RT mode, information corresponding to the prescribed number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 to inform the player that the game should be played with the prescribed number "2" (instruction of the prescribed number). . This is because the game is played with the specified number "2", the BB2 wins, and the BB2 moves into the inside. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is instructed until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the obtained number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. In addition, the specified number "2" instruction is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if not confused with the number of payouts, the setting change display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information. may be For example, since the maximum number of medals to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number of "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is instructed only during AT, and the prescribed number is not instructed during non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game ends, when the game shifts to non-RT, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not instructed. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the prescribed number of "2" and to shift to the inside of BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the prescribed number of "3" and a small win or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be indicated (even if it is non-AT).
Furthermore, not limited to the above, when shifting to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be indicated regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Also, in the non-RT mode, when the player has set the number of bets to "2", the specified number may not be indicated, and when the player has set the number of bets to "3", the specified number may be indicated. In the main processing of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management processing of step S276. (performs clear processing of winning number data), and when the current bet number is "3", instructs the prescribed number "2" (stores the instructed prescribed number display data as the winning number data). mentioned.

Also, when the BB2 game is ended and the game is shifted to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot progress (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the next game (non-RT) game start set process is started, and the prescribed number is specified there.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, there are cases where the game ends in one game, and there are cases where the game is played a plurality of times.
Also, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when a game is played with the prescribed number of "2" in non-RT, replays (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) may be won. When winning the replay as a result of playing the game with the specified number of "2", it is optional whether or not to instruct the specified number of "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, until BB2 is won, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped, the specified number "2" may be indicated before the game starts. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (bet number) in the next game (replay), so the player should not instruct the specified number in that game. can be

This is the same when, for example, in non-RT and AT, as a result of playing a game with the prescribed number of "3", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. In the next game (replay), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (bet number), so in this case as well, the specified number may not be specified. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the prescribed number "2" may be indicated for the purpose of calling attention.
In non-RT and AT, the game is played with the specified number "2", winning BB2, and when the next game moves to inside BB2, after that, unless it moves to non-RT again, the specified number is indicated not performed.

In addition, the timing for instructing the prescribed number is after all the reels 31 have stopped and, if there is a payout based on the winning of a small win, after the payout process is completed, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. Before (for example, before betting on medals is possible (before acceptance of betting)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small win in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is instructed before the next game (non-RT) starts. As shown in FIG. 42 (eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets the specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. determine that it satisfies

Then, when it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B" is added to the acquisition number data as specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number "2". (H)” is stored.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting the digit 3a (higher digits of the acquired number display LED 78), the higher digits of the instruction specified number display data "0B (H)" are displayed in step S511. segment data indicating "0" is obtained based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed in the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Also, at the timing when the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is lit, the offset for the lower digit "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the prescribed specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. FIG. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed in the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set processing in step S272 is processing before a bet is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the prescribed number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after the commanded specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the stipulated number in the next game after winning a replay, the stipulated number is instructed before automatic betting. As a result, the specified number can be quickly instructed to the player.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the obtained number data (specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in the interrupt processing after step S280.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the prescribed number "2", the instruction function is performed even during the AT. does not work. That is, even when winning the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78 . This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the pointing function is limited to when the prescribed number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2", the acquisition number display LED 78 is displayed at least until all the reels 31 are stopped. is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions "2" was displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but the game was played with the prescribed number "3" and the winning order bell was won. When it does, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this case displays the information "0A" corresponding to the prescribed instruction number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the prescribed number "3"), " 00" is displayed, and when the winning order bell is won, the pushing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Also, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared at step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Since the winning number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the processing of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. FIG.
Then, when a small win is won and medal payout processing is executed for winning in step S294, the win number data is incremented by "1", and accordingly the payout number is displayed on the win number display LED 78. be.

Then, when the process proceeds to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the acquired number display LED 78 displays information corresponding to the specified specified number. When displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions display data is stored as the winning number data. Therefore, the acquisition number data may be cleared before storing the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, the acquisition number data may be cleared.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, although the prescribed number "2" was instructed, it is ignored and the game is executed with the prescribed number "3", BB1 is elected, transitions to inside BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such actions, for example, it is possible to not execute processing related to the instruction function within BB1. Further, the BB1 game is set such that the ball output rate is less than "1", and the medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
In addition, since it is up to the player to decide which prescribed number of games to play, even if the prescribed number of "3" is played in a game in which the prescribed number of "2" is indicated for AT and non-RT, the game will not be played. No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the prescribed number is instructed, the acquisition number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side) displays the prescribed prescribed number. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing for displaying the prescribed instruction number on the obtained number display LED 78 (before the game starts). be done.
Furthermore, the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified number of commands on the obtained number display LED 78 .
As the display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like,
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" When 31 is stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a game with a specified number of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a game with a specified number of "2" and winning in BB2.
Further, when the prescribed number of instructions is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three.
In contrast, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an overview of the configuration including reels 31 (31A-31D) and stop switches 42 (42A-42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 positioned behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown. Also, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Also, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation buttons 24 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 to enable two-way communication with the sub-control board 80 . For example, the operation button 24 is formed so that at least a portion thereof can be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled under the control of the sub-control board 80 . Also, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub-control board 80 .
Below the control panel 12c of the front door 12, a start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. W1 (uniform) is provided between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D. Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, the four stop switches 42A to 42D are all W2 (uniform) between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. A line L1 is arranged to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Also, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is called line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is called line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) than the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Further, in the front view, if the interval (center-to-center distance) of the reels 31 is W3, W3 (constant) is set between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D. is.
Assuming that the distance between the stop switches 42 (center-to-center distance) is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is W4 (constant ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to cross the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be arranged on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or may be arranged on the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. may be placed on the right side (closer to the center) of
Also, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, not limited to this, for example, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to cross the line L4. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally, and the line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L4, and the line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is defined as line L5.
In this case, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a portion of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4 in the front view. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a portion of the rightmost stop switch 42D crosses the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. Furthermore, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Also, the index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (there is no problem even if it is slightly deviated from the center line).

With the arrangement described above, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the index 12d on the right as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" push orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" push orders can be provided.
Then, the greater the number of pressing order of the stop switch 42, the more the number of outs per 100 ins when the base during non-AT (when the role is not activated and during non-AT. For example, for 100 ins) If the number of outs is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

Assuming that the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the pressing order bells drawn by lottery are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A→42B→42C→42D refer to the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, . , 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the winning numbers of the pressing order bells are the same, the winning numbers of the pressing order bells can be set to "1500". In this way, since the winning number of each pressing order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the pressing order operated by the player will match the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won is reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order of pressing correct answers.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be used as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. be done. For example, when the order of pressing the stop switches 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification is given). ) is mentioned. Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

As a second method, for the base of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42,
Coloring for identification can be mentioned.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is set to red (different colors, respectively). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", "yellow, red, white, and blue" can be notified (at least one of image display, sound display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated first to fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) is darkened (or hidden). are mentioned. In this case, "Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first>Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second≧Brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third Image brightness≧Image brightness corresponding to stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth is displayed. For example, the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated thirdly is set to be approximately the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, as in the above example, when the pressing order of "3412" is displayed as an image, "3-12" is first displayed as an image. Note that "●" is an image corresponding to the "4"th pressing order, and may be darkened (concealed) so that the character "4" cannot be seen at all, or the character "4" may be hidden. The characters may be dimmed to the extent that they are identifiable.

When the image is displayed as "3●12", the image is displayed in the same manner as when 6 options are selected, so the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "342".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to "-" or "○", and the previous "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34∘2".
3) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

In addition, after the second stop, similarly to the above, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" may be displayed.
Further, after the third stop, images such as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**" may be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the push order image itself may be deleted.
As in the first method described above, even if all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312", after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. is deleted as in 1) to 3) above, the operated stop switch 42 becomes easier to understand, which is preferable. Specifically, after an image of "4312" is displayed, "43 2" (after operating the stop switch 42C)→"43 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D)→"4 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image is displayed (“●” may be “○”, “−”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, a four-character idiom is used to notify the pressing order. For example, when "spring, summer, autumn and winter" is used as one of the four-letter idioms to indicate the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring→summer→autumn→winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" can be reported (image display, voice display) as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image display of "Autumn Spring Summer" is displayed before the first stop, and an image display of "Autumn Winter Summer" is displayed after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if an error in the order of pressing occurs in the middle of the process, the image of the order of pressing may continue to be displayed, or the image of the order of pressing may continue to be displayed at the time when the error in the order of pressing occurs. You can erase the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-choice push order bell is provided as described above, 24 kinds of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", and "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery for the advantageous section is performed only when the combination lottery result is the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as described above, when the winning combination lottery result is not won (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device does not operate), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is the process related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because I thought it preferable not to do so. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this manner, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined in the advantageous section is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (Fig. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may Similarly, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, AT setting processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, a combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT is provided, and when the combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery processing are not executed, and the advantageous section transition process and AT set processing may be performed.
In addition, in the case where a combination lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous interval transition lottery is provided, the advantageous interval transition lottery may be executed even when the combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the number of wins in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the game number is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT wins, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter each time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.
In the case of such a difference number management type AT as well, the AT difference number counter is decremented when it is one specified number (eg "3"), but when it is another specified number (eg "2"), the AT Do not decrement the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 39, the setting change is enabled after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous interval display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, the advantageous interval indication LED 77 is extinguished before the setting change becomes possible when the setting change process is started. However, not limited to this, after ending the state in which the setting change is possible (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39), before proceeding to the main process (before step S248), the advantageous section display Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one differential number counter are provided. However, it is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and difference number counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, as the advantageous section clear counters, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided. During the advantageous interval, both the first advantageous interval clear counter and the second advantageous interval clear counter are updated each time the game is completed. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S424, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0", or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear It is determined whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined to be "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The difference number counter is the same as above.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is completed, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, in the determination of step S434, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it determines whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. determine whether If it is determined that the value exceeds the upper limit value or is the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the advantageous interval clear counter value and/or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (illegal value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous interval clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference number counter value has exceeded the upper limit.
If the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game proceeds. (Main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process advances to step S545 to determine that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2164 (D)". When the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

Also, when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not determined, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of the threshold value, and this value ) may be determined. When it is determined that the sub difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (effect indicating that the sub difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. may be output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game (no special effect is output yet), the power is restored from the cut off. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, when the power is restored from the power-off, the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is being played may be read to determine whether or not to output the special effect.

Further, when the power is cut off during the rotation of the reel 31 in the game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during the BB game, the special effect can be output from the game that has recovered from the power cut. good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, the special effect will be output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect will be output from the game. Become.

(7) During AT, the game is played with the specified number of "2" (when the specified number is "2", the instruction function does not operate), the pressing order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct pressing order. , When there is a payout of a small combination and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", at the end of the game, it is possible to output an effect that informs the end of AT, such as displaying an image such as "END". preferable. This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the AT ends in a game in which the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not notified, for example, when the game is played with the prescribed number of "2", the pressing order bell is won. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the game is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. may

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, not limited to this, when winning BB during AT and shifting to BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (update of sub difference number counter may be interrupted during BB game). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processing of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 becomes unnecessary. Then, when "No" in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) As in the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is not executed. As noted above, the rules are considered. Therefore, if the rule is not taken into account, the transition lottery for the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is performed with only one prescribed number (in the example of FIG. 58, the prescribed number "3") in one gaming state (RT). I tried to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, according to the rules, the transfer lottery for the advantageous section (process related to the advantageous section) is limited to only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, in one gaming state (RT), the transfer lottery for the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of prescribed numbers.

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to indicate the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, the game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the BB2 game may be executed by causing the BB2 to win when the AT end condition is satisfied after the AT is executed inside the BB2. In this case, when the end condition of AT is satisfied inside the BB2, after the game satisfying the end condition of AT is finished (all reels 31 are stopped, and payout processing is executed when a minor winning combination is won). Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting is possible), the prescribed number "2" is instructed to prompt BB2 to win. In the twelfth embodiment, since BB2 is won with the prescribed number of "2", the prescribed number for winning BB2 is "2". , when the BB is to win, the specified number "1" is indicated.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game with increased medals or a BB game with decreased medals.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it is executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, it is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the prescribed number of the next game is indicated during the game end check processing. However, when a small win is won in the final game of the BB2 game and there is a payout, and the number of payouts is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. If the LED for instructing the prescribed number is a dedicated LED, the prescribed number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is being displayed on the winning number display LED 78 .
Furthermore, in the case of executing the freeze in the last game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of the next game at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze may be

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers. For example, in the game in the advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number "3" (for example, in FIG. 58, when inside BB2), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to betting 3 You can set it to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3", it is set to bet "3" when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", if it is advantageous to play the game with the prescribed number of "3" in the advantageous section, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is not bet. set as

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is set to bet. good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that "2" bet is made when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when the number of credits is "2".

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the ball payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit (the predetermined lower limit is set higher than the legal lower limit, for example), an instruction function is activated to increase the ball payout rate. good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the indicating function is terminated.
Such activation of an indicator function when a predetermined lower limit is reached may or may not be included in "AT". However, since there is no change in activating the instruction function, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or dedicated LEDs for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions may be provided separately.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, even if the start switch 41 is operated after the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions is displayed. It is not necessary to erase the information corresponding to . Furthermore, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions does not have to be erased.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions, the prescribed number of instructions will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the prescribed number can be indicated in any display mode. can be done. For example, if the specified specified number is "2", "2" can be displayed.

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example of instructing the prescribed number "2" was given, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the prescribed number "1" or the prescribed number "3" may be instructed. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of indicating any of the prescribed numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 when instructing the prescribed number "1" is set to "A1", and the prescribed number For example, "A2" is used to indicate "2", and "A3" is used to indicate the specified number "3".

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, a line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42 . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the four stop switches 42 as a whole may be arranged on the right side of the position shown in FIG. Conversely, all four stop switches 42 may be positioned to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a portion of stop switch 42C intersects line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but these Roman numerals may be lamps. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
In addition, different colors are assigned to the ranges in which the Roman numerals "1" to "4" are indicated, and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be assigned colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numerals "1" should be white, the range of Roman numerals "2" should be blue, the range of Roman numerals "3" should be yellow, and the range of Roman numerals "4" should be red. be done.

(3) Also, the image display device 23 may be included in the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 . Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is given a different color. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is specified when notifying the pressing order, the surroundings of the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches .
However, not limited to this, the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W between the stop switches 42
4 may be set substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31 .

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push orders can be provided as the push order bell. However, it is also possible to provide not only this but a 1st stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three options for the first stop push order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, four options can be set. When the correct push order is displayed as an image when the first stop push order bell is won, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, an image display of "xx1x" can be used.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide first stop and second stop push order bells (push order bells for which the correct push order is set for the first stop and second stop). For example, the first stop is set by the stop switch 42C, the second stop is by the stop switch 42A, and the third and fourth stops are optional (either of the stop switches 42B and 42D). In this case, 12 choices can be set for the order of pressing correct answers. Furthermore, when displaying the order of correct keystrokes as an image, in the above example, an image of "2×1×" may be displayed. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image display such as "2x-x" can be mentioned.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<14th Embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of starting and ending the display of the pressing order instruction information.
Fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start or display end timing of the pressing order instruction information is different will be described below.

<14th Embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main processing (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout due to winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt processing (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are Main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 of the embodiment, push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in FIG. 48, medal payout due to winning in FIG. 49, interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. ).
Then, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won during AT, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information.

If the input port read process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then winning lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), and pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won during AT. , a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored as winning number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as in the eleventh embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that five interrupts constitute one cycle.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235×5=11.175 ms) from , display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.

After the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interruption, and the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interruption. Information may be displayed.
Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between step S284 for setting the pushing order instruction number (M_ORD_INF) and step S285 for preparing to start reel rotation. In the control command set 1 between this push order instruction number set and reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of the first control command and the second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. 2 control command is sent to the sub-control board 80; As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, one control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, so that the control command buffer can store 32 control commands. Then, by transmitting control commands during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
If a control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission during interrupt processing that comes next at that time.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. After about one interrupt (2.235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection, output, etc. of effects during the game and during the game standby. Also, the second sub-control board is a control board that belongs to the lower level of the first sub-control board. Control commands are unidirectionally transmitted from the main control board 50 to the first sub-control board, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bi-directionally.

Also, the first sub-control board determines what kind of effect to output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50 . Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command related to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Further, the second sub-control board is electrically connected to peripheral devices for effects such as the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. As shown in FIG. Then, the second sub-control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls to output various effects from the peripheral device for effect.

Specifically, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to an image. stores an image command corresponding to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command transmission processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= sub-main processing period). It takes about 16 ms×2).
Then, the second sub-control board executes drawing processing based on the received image command and displays an image on the image display device 23 .
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23 .

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board displays an image (pressing order instruction image) for instructing the pressing order on the image display device. 23, it takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms).
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. , that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated), display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between this reel stop acceptance check and all reel stop check, a control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops first). When done, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is sent to the second control command. 2 sub-control board, and when it is determined that it is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last), respond to the operation of the third stop switch 42 An image command is sent to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompts the user to operate the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a push order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is ended, and an image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 are stopped ("Yes" in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, it is assumed that pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 when the pressing order bell is won during AT. In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is finished first, and then the push order instruction on the acquisition number display LED 78 is completed. Information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed by winning a prize. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the winning number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning. As a result, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is incremented by "1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S399. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of won medals is displayed on the win number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), all reels 31 are stopped when the pressing order bell is won during AT and the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared, and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". After that, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when 10 medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is changed in the order of "00"→"01"→"02"→...→"09"→"10" when the medals are paid out. count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), once the combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283) are executed, the pressing order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started immediately.

<14th Embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in that the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (A). is the one that starts the
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the processing is executed in the order of setting the pressing order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number setting and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed.

Input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
If the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then the result in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 62 is "Yes".
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, when "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section transition lottery processing (step S283), control command set 1 (step S601), reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. After step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
Further, in step S285, reel rotation start preparation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (minimum time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing a timer value for the minimum game time. Also, the initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt processing (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is set. set, and proceed to step S284.
In this way, in the reel rotation start preparation of step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, a control command related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. After step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
Execution of the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 is as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the pressing order instruction information when the button is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the advantageous zone transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a pressing order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time has passed, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has passed. After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, after the pushing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. 235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, reel rotation start preparation is next executed in step S285, and then the push order instruction number set is executed in step S284.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the minimum playing time elapses. is turned on (operated), when the reel 31 starts rotating, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Also, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 to push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display the image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before it becomes possible.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, as shown in FIG. At this time, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time elapses, the start of display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 The order with the image display start is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operating) after the minimum playing time elapses , after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 was started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 will be turned on when winning a role having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell in a role lottery (internal lottery). After (operation), the player immediately understands.
In this case, although there is no advantageous pushing order, there is a risk of disappointing the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is the condition for determining the number of AT games to be added.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has passed, the push order instruction number is stored as win number data, so that when the reel 31 starts rotating, the win number display LED 78 can be pressed. Start displaying turn indication information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Also, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, and after the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, 5 interrupts (2.235 ×5=11.175 ms), display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as the acquisition count data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and transferred to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board). However, it takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. time.

In this way, the time required from storing the pressing order instruction number as acquisition number data to displaying the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is "X", and the main control board 50 stores the pressing order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after transmission to the first sub-control board is "Y", the image should satisfy "X<Y". is set to
Also, when the cycle of the interrupt process is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt process is "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. A maximum of "T×N" time is required until the forward indication information is displayed. Therefore, it is set so as to satisfy “T×N<Y”.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is displayed. Display of the instruction image is started.

<14th Embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. to end the display of
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 to clear the acquisition number data, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and symbol display determination is performed without clearing the acquisition number data.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from that of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIGS. 41 and 49. FIG.

Input port read processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Also, as shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, thereafter, winning combination lottery processing (step S282), advantageous section shift lottery processing (step S283), pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) , control command set 1 (step S60
1), and reel rotation start preparation (step S285).
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

Further, in FIG. 65, executing the control command set 1 (step S602) after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287) and then executing the all reel stop check (step S288) is the same as the fourteenth embodiment. It is similar to FIG. 62 of (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and symbol display determination is performed. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the win number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the obtained number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1").

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when payout number data is stored as acquisition number data in step S611 of FIG. As a result, the acquired number of medals (for example, "10" when paying out 10 medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") until the medals are paid out. Subsequently, when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the winning number (for example, from "=1" to "10").
The timing of starting display of the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment ( It is the same as A).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the winning number data is maintained without being cleared, and the payout number is used as the winning number data in step S611 of payout of medals (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LEDs 78 .
Further, until medals are paid out, the winning number display LED 78 continues to display the push order instruction information, and when the medals are paid out, the display of the winning number display LED 78 is switched from the push order instruction information to the number of wins. Although the LED 78 is used as an indicator for both the pressing order instruction information and the number of winning cards, it is possible not to interfere with the display of the number of winning cards.

<14th Embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) differs from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the display start timing of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and the reel 31 can be stopped. Sometimes, the display of the push order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flow chart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604 to determine whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process advances to step S284 to execute the pushing order instruction number setting (M_ORG_INF).
The contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (C).
Also, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 becomes stoppable, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable, the winning number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information. is started.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, the operation shown in FIG. , after the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, before the reels 31 start rotating, the image display device 23 starts displaying the pushing order instruction image.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time. Regardless of whether the reels 31 can be stopped, display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, when the reels 31 are allowed to stop, , display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has passed, First, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and then the display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so as in the fourteenth embodiment (B). , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is delayed, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the reel 31 can be stopped. is started, the player can be informed of the pressing order instruction information before the player operates the stop switch 42. - 特許庁

<14th Embodiment (E)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), display of push order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and medals are paid out in the same manner as in the fourteenth embodiment (C). In some cases, the display of the push order instruction information is ended.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel 31 starts rotating, the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended when the medals are paid out, as in FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

The timing of starting display of the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B ).
In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, by storing the pressing order instruction number as the winning number data, the reel 31 , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the winning number data is maintained without being cleared, and medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the winning number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, it is possible to continue to display the push order instruction information on the winning number display LEDs 78 until medals are paid out. Since the press order instruction information is switched to the acquired number, the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, but the acquired number can be displayed without hindrance.

<14th Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31 . The stop instruction lamp 25 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped, and is composed of an LED lamp.

The left stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the left reel 31 and lights when the left reel 31 is instructed to stop.
Similarly, the stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25 .
A right stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the right reel 31 .
The sub-control board 80 controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 .

Here, the sub-control board 80 is composed of a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
Then, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a winning combination with an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 performs control during the main process (M_MAIN). In command set 1, the push order instruction number as the control command is stored in the control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 transmits the control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, and transfers the push order instruction number as the control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub-sub. Send to control board.

Further, when the first sub-control board receives a control command transmitted from the main control board 50, it stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing. , the lamp control command and the image command according to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
Therefore, as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image. It takes 32ms (= 16ms sub-main processing cycle) to receive a command.
x2) It takes time.

Based on the received lamp control command, the second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of the (left, middle, and right) stop instruction lamps 25, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. Then, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes interrupt processing every 1 ms, and executes control of lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt processing.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub-control board to lighting the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. need.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25 .

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so that one image can be displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23 .
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23 .
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information is shown.

Although not shown, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), the pressing order instruction number setting is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time elapses. Or, regardless of whether or not it has elapsed, display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 starts when the reel 31 starts rotating.

Also, although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when it is detected that the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), display of the pressing order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting the display of the number of medals obtained and the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has passed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then the image display device 23 displays a push order instruction image.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum playing time elapses, it takes about one second from the turning on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reels 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reel 31 starts rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, first, as shown in FIG. lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, as shown in FIG. An order instruction image is displayed, and finally, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Thus, when the reel 31 starts rotating, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses, the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time elapses. , the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare combination is not discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has passed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights earlier.

<14th Embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is provided with a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the pressing order instruction information, and the timing of ending the display of the pressing order instruction information is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F). , and the rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
A dedicated 7-segment display for displaying the pressing order instruction information is referred to as a pressing order instruction LED.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the RWM 53 secures a storage area for the pressing order instruction data. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the timing of the start and end of display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information is shown.

Also in the 14th embodiment (G), similarly to the 14th embodiments (B) and (F), after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pressing order instruction number setting is executed.
For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game is played. Regardless of whether it is before or after the time elapses, when the reel 31 starts rotating, the pressing order instruction information starts to be displayed.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the push order instruction data storage area of the RWM 53 . As a result, the push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED in the interrupt process executed after this process.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (F), since the push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the winning number display LED 78 can be displayed by clearing the winning number data by the time the medals are paid out. It was possible to display the number of medals obtained.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), even when the medals are paid out, the pushing order instruction data is maintained without being cleared, so as shown in FIGS. The pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the pushing order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

Thus, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated pressing order instruction LED. Even if it continues, it is possible to prevent the display of the number of acquired medals from being disturbed.
The timing of starting display of the number of medals obtained, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. And the display end timing is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
Push order instruction information is transmitted from when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) to when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the player can be notified of the correct order of pressing before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42 .
Therefore, the timing for starting the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 becomes stoppable; and 5) when the reel 31 becomes stoppable.

Further, in the case where the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the pressing order instruction information is completed from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time when the medals are paid out, the medals are displayed. can be set so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of
Therefore, the timing of ending the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases the third stop switch 42)
3) when all reels 31 are stopped; and 4) when medals are paid out.
When the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the dedicated pressing order display LED, the pressing order instruction information may continue to be displayed when the medals are paid out, and the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated after the medals are paid out. .

In addition, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates the control command, and the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 It takes a certain amount of time to transmit the control command to the sub-control board 80, receive and analyze the control command at the sub-control board 80, and perform drawing processing and display at the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Also, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of the reels 31 and the display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 start. order may be changed.
Therefore, the timing of starting to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows.
1) after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; and 2) after the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Also, after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the sub-control board 80, until the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, , takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the 14th embodiment (A) to (G), and can be set by any suitable combination.

In a game in which the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if an error in the pressing order occurs in the middle of the game, the pressing order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction information may be terminated when an error in the pressing order occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a mistake in the push order occurs in the middle of the game, the push order can be instructed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the pressing order instruction image may be terminated when a pressing order error occurs.

In addition, when the replay wins when three coins are inserted, three medals are automatically betted and the game can be started. The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

After that, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are sequentially lit, and finally, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay win is made by inserting three cards, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f go out. The display of the instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 may be ended.

In addition, when a small winning combination is won, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all the reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. When the replay wins, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f go out. Display of the instruction information may be ended.
In other words, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be different between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.
Of course, the display end timing of the pressing order instruction information may be the same between when a small win is won and when a replay win is won.

Although the 14th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used. By transmitting 2 control commands to the sub-control board 80, it is possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted in one control command transmission during interrupt processing. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the first control command may be transmitted during control command transmission during one interrupt process, and the second control command may be transmitted during control command transmission during the next interrupt process. As a result, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, and the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board). The board) executed drawing processing based on the received push order instruction number and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 .
However, not limited to this, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) Drawing processing may be executed based on the received conditional device number, and the pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .

Also, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) receives the effect group number The drawing process may be executed based on , and the push order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 .
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing for medals inserted from the medal slot 47. FIG.
Fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the medal addition processing timing is different will be described below.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side on the medal passage in the medal selector. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the entry sensor 44a.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 first passes through the path sensor 46 and then reaches the position of the blocker 45 . Also, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal passage pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed with a predetermined distance therebetween.
Before the medals reach the positions of the inserted sensors 44a and 44b, the inserted sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when the medals flow down the medal passage, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

Further, when the medals flow down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on while the insertion sensor 44b is turned on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned off from on, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on while the insertion sensor 44a remains off.
The medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44 a and 44 b reach the hopper 35 .

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing of (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing of (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state of (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. FIG. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both ON.
The state of (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Also, if the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a token passing error, and the sub-control board 80 receives an error as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send command. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, as in the case of (b) and (c) in FIG. Send an error command to the board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state of (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state of (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In addition, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and executes medal "1" addition processing (bet processing or credit processing).
Here, when the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes the process of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, when the prescribed number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "1", the bet number is increased from "1" to "2" by adding "1" to the bet number. update to.

In addition, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes processing for adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Furthermore, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50
send a throw command to Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
When a medal passage error occurs before the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition processing and does not transmit an insertion command.

Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 causes the start switch 41 to be operated when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets. The game is put into a state where it can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) differs from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, the description is omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and performs medal "1" addition processing (betting processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". If the number of credits has not yet reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), there is a case where it is determined that there is a medal passage error and an error sound is output after executing the medal "1" addition processing and outputting the throwing sound.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the medal "1" addition processing is executed and a throwing sound is output, and then the state of (d) in FIG. When the error sound is output continuously, the error sound is output after the insertion sound is output, so that even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that the medals have been inserted. .
When a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition processing and does not transmit an insertion command.

At the timing of (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Also, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the bet number "1" addition processing, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. A state is set in which the game can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal "1" addition processing is executed, the timing of outputting the throwing sound and the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is lit. different from the timing.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. It is common practice to
However, if the medal flows down the medal passage to the position of (d) in FIG.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a is turned off from on), the medal "1" is displayed. Execute addition. As a result, it is possible to prevent so-called medal swallowing, in which medals enter the hopper 35 even though the medal addition process is not being executed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, when the state (d) in FIG. An error command is transmitted, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 . In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition processing has already been executed and the throwing sound is output, so the error should be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector should be put into the hopper 35. - 特許庁As a result, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47, when the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal is removed from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45, It is returned from the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁
At this time, at the timing when the fiftieth medal becomes the state (d) in FIG. 45 off. As a result, the fifty-first medal can be reliably returned from the medal pay-out port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, when the bet number reaches the prescribed number by executing the process of adding "1" to the bet number, the start switch 41 is operated. can be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the start command, it outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22 .

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, when the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted and the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the effect sound based on the operation of the start switch 41 will overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. make it acceptable. As a result, it is possible to avoid overlap between the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 .

<Fifteenth Embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in terms of execution timing of the medal "1" addition processing, but the timing of outputting the insertion sound is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state of (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state of (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that medals have been inserted, and adds "1" to the medals (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, when the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number is added to the number of "1", and when the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the credit amount reaches the maximum number of "50". When the number of credits has not yet reached, the processing of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed in the same manner as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of (e) in FIG. Then, when receiving the input command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22 .

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 has continued for a predetermined time or longer, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80 . Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22 .
In this case, the medal "1" addition processing is executed, but the error sound is output without outputting the insertion sound. Thereby, priority can be given to error notification.

When the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22 based on the received closing command. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that medals have been inserted, so that the player can be relieved.
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, by executing the bet number "1" addition processing, when the bet number reaches the specified number, the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, Lighting the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides the medals passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48. FIG.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, the shoot path 48, and the shoot sensor 49. A medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49, and passes through the hopper. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a state of reaching 35. FIG.

The chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35 .

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for judging the presence or absence of jammed medals or cheating. and electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
Since the shoot passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medals M that have passed through the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the shoot sensor 49 is arranged downstream of the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the input monitoring counter adds "1" (when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passing of the medal M (when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off→on→off). "+1"), and is subtracted "1"("-1") when the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M. For this reason, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
The timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is the timing when the input sensor 44b turns off from ON (timing of (e) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns off from on, but for example, the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns on from off (see FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b)), or the timing at which the input sensor 44a turns off from on (the timing in (c) of FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns on from off. (timing of (d) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). This is because it is considered that the medal M enters the hopper 35 when the medal M reaches these timings.
Also, when the medal M passes the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 is turned off→on→off. be.

Further, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is further detected, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has occurred.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medals M, and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medals M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 detects the medals M Judged as a passage error.

It should be noted that the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred not only when the input monitor counter has become "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passage error has occurred when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more and when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error occurs when the shooting sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal M. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 . At this time, the input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49 are passed.
Here, it is assumed that the tip of the chute passage 48 is jammed with medals M. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medals M placed in the medal slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medals M jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the position of the chute. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is indicated, and the position of M4 indicates the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 .

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the tip of the shoot passage 48 is jammed with medals M, the shot is placed at a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when the tip of the chute path 48 is jammed with medals M, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute path 48 is detected by the shoot sensor 49, and if this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, assume that three medals M are inserted from the medal slot 47 when the prescribed number is "3" and both the bet number and the credit number are "0". In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 puts the start switch 41 in a state where it can accept the operation (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d. light up. At this time, when the first medal M (M2) is jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48, the shoot sensor 49 detects the third medal M (M4). When this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred, and stops the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48.例文帳に追加

Note that the position of the shoot sensor 49 is not limited to the position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the shoot passage 48 can be detected when the medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48 . Assuming that the specified number is "N", the shoot sensor 49 may be arranged at a position where it can detect the N-th medal M from the tip of the shoot passage 48 when medals M are jammed at the tip of the shoot passage 48. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M clogged in the chute passage 48.例文帳に追加

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides the medals ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. It is an AA cross-sectional view.

The slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 closing the opening of the cabinet 13. - 特許庁
A medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 .
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and the like are arranged at the front center of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. are placed.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at the lower part of the front door 12, and a medal tray for receiving the medals paid out from the medal payout port 16 is provided at the lower front of the front door 12. A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower portion.

84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position on the lower back surface of the front door 12 to form the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage. 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals, which are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector, to the medal payout port 16 .
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16 .
Note that the return medal passage 132 and the paid-out medal passage 134 join in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided in the upper portion of the passage forming member 130. As shown in FIGS. The upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening at the upstream end of the returning medal passage 132. When the front door 12 is closed, the upper medal receiving opening 131 is opened. It is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector in the folded state.
After passing through the upper medal reception port 131, the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and on the left side as seen from the front (right side as seen from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and is an opening serving as an upstream end of the dispensing medal passage 134. It is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15 when the medal payout device 12 is closed.
The medals ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the front side of the passage forming member 130 constitutes the back side of the front door 12. Plates are placed. Thus, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 .
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133 and the payout medal passage 134, and reach a position facing the lower medal receiving opening 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. hit and bounce. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is short, the medal M bounced off the rear surface of the front door 12 and the medal M is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next. There is a possibility that it will collide with the medal M that is attached.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L1 ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are prevented from colliding.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 are directed toward the rear surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while dropping downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Further, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back is directed toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87) while dropping downward due to gravity.
If the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medal is ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. A sufficient height difference can be ensured between the medal M directed toward the back side of the front door 12 and the medal M bounced off the back side of the front door 12 and directed toward the lower medal receiving port 133, and the two medals M collide with each other. can be made difficult.

Also, if the medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is equal to the diameter "D" of the medals M. Even if it is set to double or more, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the discharge part 103 of the medal payout device 15 and the medal M bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 collide.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15. have set.
That is, the interval at which the medals M are ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the rear surface of the front door 12 and are set so as to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejection position, and after dropping to a lower position, the next medal M is ejected from the medal dispensing device. If the medals are ejected from the discharging portion 103 of 15, the distance and height difference between the two medals can be sufficiently secured, and the two medals M can be prevented from colliding with each other.
Here, when the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 collides with the medal M ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to this medal M, the medal M is ejected from the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133 or the dispensing medal. There is a possibility that the medals M are stuck in the passage 134. - 特許庁

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the medals M are prevented from being jammed in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 and in the payout medal passage 134 by setting the medals M so as not to collide with each other. .
In the present embodiment, the medal M bounced back from the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next to the medal M are set so as not to collide with each other. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejecting portion 103, it does not mean that the front and rear medals M do not all collide. It is enough if there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out. This is because the medals M can be prevented from being clogged in the payout medal passage 134 .

Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101. there is
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are met, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are met, two or more medals M are consecutively ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Two adjacent holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101 hold medals M respectively.
(b) "(M−N)≧2" is satisfied, where "N" is the remaining number of medals before reaching the upper limit of the number of credits, and "M" is the number of medals M to be paid out for winning.
(c) The settlement switch 43 is operated when the number of credits is "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 positioned at the letter "C" each hold a medal M. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D".
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 positioned at the character "B" does not hold the medal M, but the holding portion positioned at the character "C" When medals M are held in 102 and in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "D", the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C", and the position of the letter "D" When the medal M is held in each of the holding portions 102 in and , the above condition (a) is satisfied.
Of course, even when medals M are held in all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of cards before reaching the upper limit of credits is "3". is "5" or more, the above condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of cards until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "0". , the above condition (b) is satisfied.

As described above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, medal If the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied while M is being held, two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 .
Further, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B" does not hold the medal M, but at least the medal M is held at the position of the letter "C". When the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied under the condition that the medals M are held by the holding portion 102 and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D", the medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the device 15 .

Also, the medals M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 are ejected from the front door 1.
2, and may return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving slot 133. If the returning medal M passes through the lower medal receiving opening 133, it falls inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T ” is set to satisfy

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medal M ejected from the ejecting portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133, the returned medal M does not reach the lower medal receiving opening. 133, and can be prevented from passing through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

In addition, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 while being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving opening 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the ejected medals M. As shown in FIG.

Here, the direction perpendicular to the obverse and reverse surfaces of the medal M ejected in an inclined state is defined as the height direction. In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. have set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

As a result, even if the medal M that hits the rear surface of the front door 12 and rebounds rotates in the paid-out medal passage 134, the front and rear surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical plane in the paid-out medal passage 134.例文帳に追加Therefore, the medals M can be prevented from blocking the payout medal passage 134.例文帳に追加
It should be noted that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to transmission processing of an external signal.
In the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to output a signal indicating ON/OFF as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 .
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch ON signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (detection of power-on).
The external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing major storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating ON/OFF of input port 0. FIG. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D2: Signal of setting key switch (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when ON, “0” when OFF)
D4: Not used D5: Not used D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6-bit "power interruption detection signal" is input when a power interruption occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (eleventh embodiment)). is a signal.
In addition, although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 . Furthermore, it has a full sensor that turns on when the sub-tank comes into contact with a medal when it is full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0 .
Also, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 has been turned on (at the time of current interrupt processing) from off (at the time of previous interrupt processing). The input port rising data storage area for storing the data indicating that the It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port trailing edge data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0. For example,
(1) Input port 1 for inputting operation switch signals such as bed switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.
(2) Input port 2 for inputting signals from passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc.
etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to provide storage areas for input port rise data and input port fall data for each input port.
Furthermore, when only the storage area for input port level data is provided (when storage areas for input port rising data and input port falling data are not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt process In addition, a storage area for input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery of the address "F013 (H)" is a storage area of a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery. In this embodiment, when the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power failure, the address "F013 (H)" is set to "136 (D)" as an initial value. and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, in the eighteenth embodiment, the interrupt period is "2.235 ms", as in the other embodiments. Therefore, "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for about "300" ms at the time of recovery from power failure (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at the address “F014(H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4 . In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when the output of the external signal 4 is started (except when returning from power failure described above), and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Also, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at the address “F015(H)” is a storage area for the timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5 . In this embodiment, an initial value "24(D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
As above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, the external signal 4 output time, the external signal 4 control time, and the external signal 5 control time at the time of power failure recovery in this embodiment are all 1-byte timers to measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are decremented by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in timer measurement, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00 (H)", "00 (H)" is set. .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". Then, for example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105(D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are exemplified as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are exemplified as unrecoverable errors. On the other hand, the "E0" to "E7" errors in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, as a general rule, the progress of the game is stopped. Further, even during rotation of at least one reel 31, error detection is executed for at least some errors ("E7", "E6", and "E5" errors in the example of the 18th embodiment). When an error is detected during rotation of at least one reel 31, the progress of the game is continued until all the reels 31 are stopped, and when all the reels 31 are stopped, an error state ( error display) and stop the progress of the game. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any one of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs during rotation of the reel 31, the progress of the game is stopped (stop control by operating the stop switch 42 is not performed). ) can also be configured as

In FIG. 88, an "E0" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that the medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in order.
An "E2" error is an error when it is determined that the sub-tank is full.
An "E3" error is an error when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error when the payout sensor 37 determines that the medals are stuck (jammed) while the medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on while the medal payout signal is not being output.
The "E6" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects medals under the condition that the blocker 45 does not form the medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error when it is determined that medals are stuck in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", it is possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address "F051(H)" may be output to the obtained number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error code "101(D)" is stored in the address "F051(H)", the digit At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of the digit 3 and the segment data for displaying "E" are output. At the lighting timing of the digit 4, the lighting data of the digit 4 and the segment data for displaying "1" are output.

When any error number is stored in the address "F051(H)" (when it is not "0"), the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). ).
When the hall clerk removes the error that has occurred, he turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred has been eliminated. If it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the status quo (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that has occurred has been eliminated (no error has occurred), the error number stored at the address "F051(H)" is cleared. When the error number of address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of error number by digits 3 and 4) is terminated.
The above is an example of displaying an error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the above-described other embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or an error display. A dedicated LED may be provided and displayed on that LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is a storage area for storing the detection of an error in consideration of the case where the error state cannot be immediately changed when an error is detected. is. In the example of FIG. 88, D0 to D2 bits in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. All of the "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are errors that can be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even when the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred by interrupt processing. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", the external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not immediately occur at that time, and only after all the reels 31 have stopped. The error state is entered before the payout process is executed.

If any bit of the error detection flag is "1" when all the reels 31 are stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. After storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", when the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared is arbitrary. For example, first, do not clear the error detection flag until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all the reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number. signal can be output). Then, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

Secondly, after storing the error detection flag at the address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at the address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at the address "F291(H)" is cleared. to do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored. ). When the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, if the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off). does not output a signal indicating

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, it is not possible to shift to an error state (error display) immediately (the error state cannot be shifted to unless all reels 31 are stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to be able to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when the "E5", "E6", or "E7" errors occur in a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. It is optional whether or not to In order to simplify processing, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where transition to an error state is possible, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, the error detection flag is set to "1" when the situation is such that an immediate transition to an error state is not possible (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating). ' is stored, and when it is in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (for example, during game standby), an error number may be stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the storage area of the RWM 53 described above, the storage areas at addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . On the other hand, the storage area of address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the use area. A program for detecting errors is stored in a control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 .

89 and 90 are time charts showing output timings of external signal 4 and external signal 5, FIG. 89 showing example 1 and FIG. 90 showing example 2. FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. When the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is turned on to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when the ON state of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), in the input port reading processing of step S457, when the level data of the input port 0 is read and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external The signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

Also, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned off immediately after being turned on (for example, after "10" ms), the external signal 4 is turned on (external signal 4) until at least "50" ms has passed. A signal indicating ON can be output as the signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), the external signal 4 is turned off when the setting key switch is detected to be turned off. (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch before "50" ms elapses. When it is detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after the minimum "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned off after a lapse of "50" ms or longer. When detected, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "detection of an error" means that any bit in the error detection flag of the address "F294(H)" is "1", and "non-detection of an error" means that the error This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
As soon as "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 after "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is "0" ms.
Also, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). Further, when the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed or when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), before "50" ms elapses When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), after "50" ms or more have passed, When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between error display/non-display and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, "error display" means that the error number of the address "F051(H)" is a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100(D)" to "107(D)" ) is stored, and "error non-display" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". A storage area for storing flags indicating error display/non-display may be provided. It is possible to reduce the storage area to be used by determining whether the error is to be displayed or not.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when a value other than the error number "0" is stored until when the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when a value other than "0" is once stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). In addition, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), and then the error number is cleared, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared before "50" ms elapses after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output), After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared after "50" ms or more have passed after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state is enabled to be output as the external signal 4), The external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between the power ON/OFF and the output of the external signal 4. FIG. Here, whether or not the power is turned on (whether or not the power switch 11 in FIG. 1 is turned on) can be detected by various methods. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is stored.
When the power-on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored), the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (on is indicated as the external signal 4). signal can be output). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 after power failure recovery is "0" ms.
In addition, when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of the external signal 4 when power is restored becomes "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). (time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored, and the power switch 11 is turned off after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off (external A signal indicating OFF can be output as the signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored. When 300 ms has passed, the external signal 4 is turned off even if the power switch 11 is kept on (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(e) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. FIG. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to when it is detected that the door switch is turned on. Especially in the eighteenth embodiment, this corresponds to when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 can be turned ON immediately (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is detected to when the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned ON for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms. signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch is turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), it is detected that the door switch is turned off before "50" ms elapses. When at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch is on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 5), the door switch is detected to be off after lapse of "50" ms or more. In this case, the external signal 5 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like, but the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for "50" ms or longer (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4 or 5). ), a hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5 . Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about "5" to "10" ms) is performed, or a fraudulent act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, the hall An external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG.
In FIG. 90,
time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in FIG.
time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
time t1 from when the error number shown in (c) is stored to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t1 from when the ON state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected to when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5)
are both set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of the time t1 is shown to exceed "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off and the timing of the external signal 4 The timing when the output turns from off to on is almost the same (the timing when the output of the external signal 4 turns on from off to the timing when the setting key switch turns off to on is within "2"). .
Also, the external signal 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure are turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4 and 5) time t3. is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is the same as the example of FIG.
Furthermore, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) in (d) of the figure is "300" ms as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be off until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery shown in (d) becomes "0" to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the door switch is detected to be turned off to when the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
are all "50" ms.

In order to do this, for example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 is used when the OFF of the setting key switch is detected, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. A value of "24 (D)" is set, the timer value is decremented by "1" each time an interrupt is processed, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (off as the external signal 4). can be output).
Similarly, when it detects that the door switch is turned off, it sets a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5, subtracts "1" from the timer value for each interrupt processing, For example, when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flow chart. 91 to 94 are flow charts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing an example 1 of external signal output processing. FIG. 92 is a flow chart following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing example 2 of the external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, Example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. If it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected. This process determines whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". When it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that none of the bits is "1" (no error is detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0". If it is "0", it is judged that an error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S3234.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when recovery from power failure is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power failure recovery of address "F013 (H)", and "1" is decremented. Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery is "0". and advances to step S3235. On the other hand, when the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 control time is "0". The process proceeds to step S3236, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).

On the other hand, when it is judged "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the flow advances to step S3237, it is judged whether or not the setting key switch has been turned on from off in this interruption process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, input port 0 rising data is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D2 bit of is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether or not the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, the error detection flag in the previous interrupt process is saved, and by performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag in the current interrupt process, the error detection flag is turned on from OFF to ON in the current interrupt process. determine whether or not When it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether or not the error number has changed from hidden (“0”) to displayed (other than “0”). Here, for example, by saving the error number from the previous interrupt process and performing a comparison operation with the error number from the current interrupt process, the error number from "0" to other than "0" determine whether it has become When it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When proceeding from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms as an initial value. . Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (of FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 control time is "0". Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch is on in step S3242, and the flow advances to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt process, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined, for example, firstly, if there is input port 0 rising data, the input port 0 rising data Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, and if the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing When the D3 bit of is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms is set as the initial value for the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, the output time of external signal 4 is set when the error number is newly stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, in the current interrupt process, it is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIGS. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery at address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) In step S3233, when it is determined that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored at address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
, respectively, proceeds to step S3240, and stores the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms of the external signal 4 in the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was ON, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set as the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". After that, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is turned on in this interrupt process as well, the process advances to step S3240 to reset the external signal 4 control time "24 (D)". When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. It is the same. After step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that the error is not being detected, the process proceeds to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 control time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. If the output time of the external signal 4 has passed, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4), and the output time of the external signal 4 has passed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4).

Next, proceeding to step S3242, it is determined whether or not the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24 (D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of address "F015 (H)". In this case, as in the above case, it is determined that the door switch is ON in the previous interrupt process, and after "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 control time in step S3246, step S3246 is performed in this interrupt process. If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is ON, the external signal 5 control time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 control time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has passed, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is determined. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, in example 1 of FIG. 91, whether or not the setting key switch has turned on from off, whether or not the error detection flag has turned on from off, and whether the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0" The external signal 4 control time is set in the interrupt process determined as "Yes" in each determination of whether or not it has become. , the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, the error detection flag is "1", and an error number other than "0" is stored, external signal is kept on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 control time becomes "0". The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

In other words, after the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms elapses. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or when the setting key switch is turned on for only a moment (for example, only "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is used as the external signal 4). Even if the condition for enabling output is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) for at least 50 ms.

Also, in the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. The timer value is decremented from "24(D)" to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the condition of turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again, A timer value of "24(D)" is set.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the process of step S3240 is performed. , the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3235, so the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). possible).

By doing so, the external signal 4 is turned on (turning on as the external signal 4) from the time when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (allowing a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 to be output) are satisfied. signal can be output). While the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 4). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 4 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. It is decremented by "1 (D)". Until the timer value reaches "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

The same applies to the external signal 5 as described above.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" related to the external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value "24(D)" is subtracted to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the door switch is ON (when the external signal 5 is turned ON (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) is satisfied) , the process proceeds to step S3246, and the timer value "24 (D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is decremented for each interrupt process, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on the external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied. ), the process of step S3246 is skipped, so the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined "Yes" in step S3243. possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on when the door switch is turned on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied). (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). While the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5 is possible) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (outputting a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). possible). Next, when the condition to turn on the external signal 5 (to enable the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. "1" is decremented. Until the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 above, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. It is possible to secure a time during which a signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example 3 of external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 93 are assigned the same numbers, and steps that perform different processing are underlined.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)" is "0". determine whether Then, when it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241 and the external signal 4
is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 control time is "0" and the output conditions for the external signal 4 are satisfied in the judgments of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240 to address "F014 (H)". )” is set to “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that none of the output conditions for the external signal 4 is satisfied, the process advances to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4. output of a signal indicating off).

As for the external signal 5, similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, if the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is "0", determine whether there is Then, if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 control time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246 to determine the external signal 5 control time of address "F015(H)". is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Thus, in example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 control time or external signal 5 control time) is "0", the timer satisfies the output condition of external signal 4 or 5. set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
In the method of example 3 in FIG. 94, similarly to example 2 in FIG. 93, there is no need to generate rise data and check the level data, etc. at the time of the previous interrupt processing. While simplifying, it is possible to secure the time during which the hall computer can receive the signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when an error is displayed, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ), but not limited to this, each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, 7) is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signals 4, 6, 7). may Also, a specific external signal (e.g., external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch is on or the door switch is on ( A signal indicating ON may be output as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) Various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. It may be decremented by "N" for every "N" interrupts or by "1" for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) Various modifications and numerical values described in the eighteenth embodiment are examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 are the minimum "0" ms, so various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms are possible.

Also, in FIG. 89, time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is the minimum "
Since it is 50 ms, various settings such as 75 ms or 100 ms are possible.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. It may be as long as it is possible, and may be less than "50" ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set variously according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned on from off, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), but the setting The configuration may be such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output) when the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on. output possible), the external signal 4 is turned on even if the setting key switch is turned on from off while the reel 31 is rotating (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4 possible).
On the other hand, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 can be output), the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on during the rotation of 31, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the state of the setting key switch (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). do). However, it is possible that the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the 18th embodiment, any one of when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. When the two conditions are satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and only one or some of the conditions, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ) configuration. In other words, the external signal 4 is not turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 cannot be output) even under other conditions, for example, when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. may be
(6) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the eighteenth embodiment, are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
The setting change end sound will be described below for the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). do.
In the following description, the ``setting change state (also referred to as ``setting change mode'' or ``setting change processing'') is a state in which setting values can be changed and a game is started (progressed). ) is in a game state that cannot be played. In the setting change state, it is also possible to terminate without changing the setting value.
The 'setting confirmation state' (also referred to as 'setting confirmation mode' or 'setting confirmation processing') is a state in which setting values cannot be changed but current setting values can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) as in the setting change state.
On the other hand, the “normal state (also referred to as “normal mode”)” refers to a state other than the setting change state and setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except for special circumstances such as the occurrence of an error.

<Nineteenth Embodiment (A): When Gaming Machine is Slot Machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), and corresponds to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as components not shown in FIG. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, it does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion opening 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or checking settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that turns on when the front door 12 is opened and detects the opening of the front door 12 . When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
A setting key insertion slot 151 , a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50 .
The setting key switch 152 is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state. Also, the reset switch is a switch that is operated after the error that has occurred is removed to restore the state before the error occurred.
In the following description, it may be referred to as a "setting change (reset) switch 153", a "setting change switch 153", or a "reset switch 153".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are integrally provided, but the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 with the power turned on, and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, for example. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 152, the setting confirmation state is terminated.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is on (step S208), and the power-off recovery is abnormal ( Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (step S210), it becomes possible to shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switches" in step S208 are two switches, ie, the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that turns on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is provided. If provided, three switches including the set door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided and that the specified switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152. FIG.

In step S208 of FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, it is determined "Yes" in step S208, and the setting change state can be entered. On the other hand, when either one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is ON, or when both switches are OFF, it is judged "No" in step S208, and the setting change state is entered. does not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or the setting key is not inserted, there is a high possibility of cheating, and the setting change state is not entered.

Also, in FIG. 38, "start of setting change state" is first determined when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or when "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the “setting change state” includes the processing of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as the processing during the setting change state.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the start of setting change is set in step S234 and control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (a command to start setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80). is sent) as the "start of setting change state".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Also, the period immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as "the start of the setting change state". Furthermore, the interrupt activation time of step S233 or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as "start of setting change state".

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "end of setting change state" is defined when setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the end of setting change is set in step S246 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (the command to end the setting change is sent to the sub-control board 80). is sent) as "end of setting change state".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "end of the setting change state" may be determined when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting value is determined).

Furthermore, as will be described later, the setting change state may end on condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on condition that the door switch 17 is turned off from on. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Also, if the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is not terminated. It is for anti-goto measures.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 executes a setting change end sound and an output (output by the effect lamp 21) visually indicating the end of the setting change.
Here, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a voice saying "setting change is finished" from the speaker 22 in this embodiment.

Here, there are various ideas about the speed at which words (Japanese) can be spoken. The time "T01" from the start of voice output to the end of output may be set to approximately "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, the lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command indicating that the setting change has ended, it immediately outputs a setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if "Yes" is determined in step S243, in the first interrupt process (FIG. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243, step S464 indicates that the setting change has ended. command is sent.

In the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 independently executes interrupt processing, and determines whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received for each interrupt processing. ing. Then, when it is determined that a command to the effect that the setting change is completed has been received, it starts outputting a setting change end sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. After that, output processing of the setting change end sound by the sub-control board 80 or output of the setting change end sound is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S243.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from ON to OFF is when the setting key switch 152 is turned OFF as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 receives the command and starts outputting the setting change end sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are matched.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, the effect lamp 21 is set in a predetermined lighting mode (“lighting” is a concept including blinking. is a concept including the lighting color.) is executed.
Here, when the lighting of the performance lamp 21 is executed, at least the lighting mode is not the same as the lighting of the lighting of the performance lamp 21 when the special role (accessory) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 21 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the special combination has been won, the effect lamp 21 is turned off as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In the case of lighting, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same manner as the lighting manner when indicating the winning of the special role.

Further, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lamp A may be lighted. However, the lighting mode in this case is a mode different from the lighting mode when indicating that a special combination has been won.
As described above, when the lighting of the production lamp 21 is executed as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the special role has been won (the special role has been won in the game, or the special role The lighting mode of the performance lamp 21 is not the same as that of the performance notifying that the winning is carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player does not win the special combination. It is possible to prevent confusion if there is.

In addition, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special role is won are different from each other so as not to confuse the two. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and if the lighting pattern is seen, the effect means that the setting change is finished. It is preferable to make it understandable.
Further, for the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination is won are made the same, and the other lamps other than the effect lamp 21 are changed in setting. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended may be different from the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has been won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when notifying that the special combination is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. One example is to turn on the lamp, but not to turn on the other lamp. In this way, by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it is output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
As shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is executed at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, as described above, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms, the time T02 may be set to about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, the case where the setting change state is ended, the game is shifted to the normal state (the state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started will be considered.
Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state ends until the game starts (until the game start condition is met) (preparation time until the game starts) is referred to as "T11". do. Also, the time (one game time) from the start of the game (after the conditions for starting the game are satisfied) to the end of the game is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, data stored in the RWM 53 are cleared as shown in FIG. . Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert medals M from the medal slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the commonly used prescribed number, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the prescribed number. , the game can be started with the number of bets "1". When the specified number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the specified number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, as described in the first embodiment, it passes through the path in the medal selector and reaches the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. detected. If it is judged by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b that the medals have passed normally, "1" is bet.

In FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted from the position M1, detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, to when the specified number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.).
Here, if the prescribed number is "1", one medal must be inserted, if the prescribed number is "2", two medals must be inserted, and if the prescribed number is "3" Requires 3 medals. In FIG. 2, from the state of medal M1, the time from inserting one medal to betting "1" is "T11a", and the time from inserting two medals to betting "2". Let "T11b" be, and let "T11c" be the time from inserting three medals until "3" is betted.
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since 2 or 3 medals can be inserted continuously, T11b (in the case of the prescribed number of "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (in the case of the prescribed number of "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the prescribed number is "3") is considered to be less than three times the time of T11a (when the prescribed number is "1").

When the specified number is betted, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number is betted to when the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 revolutions per minute. When the speed reaches 80 revolutions per minute, the speed is kept constant. The operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted after reaching the constant speed state.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) to when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 . In other words, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 can be operated until the first stop switch 42 is operated is "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a four-phase excitation state time are required (note that the four-phase excitation state is Before the end, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42. An example of this will be described later.). The total time of these is assumed to be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the next (second) stop switch 42 . Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state, has passed in the same manner as described above. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 is completed and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is defined as "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b", which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time, is required as described above.

It should be noted that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game. It is determined that one game has ended (when there is no payout).
Also, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination in the game stops, it is determined that the game is finished when the payout process is finished, specifically when the process of FIG. 49 is finished.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stop-displayed, the end of the game is determined not at the end of the automatic betting process but at the end of the 4-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.例文帳に追加

For example, firstly, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the addition processing to the credits is executed, the end of the addition processing to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the payout of the last medal (driving of the hopper 36) is completed, and in step S401 of FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is "0") is defined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change is completed, the number of credits is "0", and the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended. All medals paid out are credited. Therefore, medals are not actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
"T12c" is the time from when the combination of symbols corresponding to the minor win is stopped and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is completed to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed. and
However, when the combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

In addition, when an effect (such as a winning combination notification effect) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even if an effect is output for several seconds after all the reels 31 stop, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 stops (at that point, all the reels 31 stop). 1 game is completed even if the effect that started the output at the time is continued. That is, the end of one game shall be based on the control by the main control board 50 .

As described above, when an operation for starting a game is performed immediately after the setting change state ends, and a game is started, a preparatory time "T11" is required until the game is started.
Furthermore, one game time "T12" is, as described above,
(1) The time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated.
(2) Time from first operation of stop switch 42 to stop of reel 31 and time of four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from operation of second stop switch 42 to stop of reel 31 and time of four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) Time from operation of third stop switch 42 to stop of reel 31 and time of four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) Time "T12c" until the payout of medals (addition to credits) is completed when winning a small winning combination
requires.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
It is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is performed (step S282 in FIG. 41). .).
"Freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for a role is executed, a special role is won, and it is determined to execute a freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special role, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. do not do. After the freeze ends, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. Incidentally, when the progress of the game is stopped by freezing, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
Assuming that the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d".

Next, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is considered. In order to make one game time the shortest time, the freeze is not executed and the combination is not won.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, assuming that the specified number is "1", the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position of M1 in FIG. Assume that "T11" is about "800" ms at the shortest.
Also, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated to when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the stop switch 42 is permitted to be operated is approximately "1200" ms.

Furthermore, since the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop, and the time "T12b" until the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is As exemplified in FIG. 13, the shortest is about "140" ms (the shortest reel stop control time is about "40" ms, the shortest time of the four-phase excitation state is about "100" ms). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b
×3)”=“2420” ms.
When medals are paid out after all reels 31 are stopped, or when freezing is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" is longer than the above time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound is output for the time "T01" (approximately "2000" ms), and the effect lamp 21 notifies the end of the setting change. Lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the setting change end sound "T01" to be output immediately after the setting change state is ended, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game The relationship with the time "T12 (shortest time)" is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if an operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment the setting change state ends, and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is completed, the game is finished. The output of the setting change end sound has ended before.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, the above example is an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated and after the four-phase excitation state ends, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this way, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (accepting the operation of the stop switch 42), it is possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, of the above-mentioned time "T12b", the time in the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (shortest time)=40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even if it is controlled in this way, it becomes "T01<T11+T12".

In addition, as the effect timing of the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 stops), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the reel 31 stops) When the second reel 31 stops), and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all the reels 31 stop), an effect (the most important effect in the game) that finally announces the winning combination of the game is output. The timing to do so is often when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, when outputting an effect to announce the winning combination of the game when all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is completed. , and the setting change end sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is terminated, the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped can be accurately understood.

However, when there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 is operated or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment has a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the notification effect of the winning combination. As a result, even if the effect of notifying the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not erased in the middle. However, it is possible that the setting change end sound and the effect sound announcing the winning combination may overlap.

Also, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating the completion of the setting change is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem arises.

In addition, the preparation time "T11" until the start of the game is the time to close the front door 12 after the setting change state is finished, and to eliminate the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open). does not take into account the time to
When the setting change state ends, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state ends, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. The game cannot proceed (start) when the door open error occurs. When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (to return medals), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, they are not bet. Even if a bet is made, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. Although it is possible to configure so that the door open error is resolved at the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally, the key is inserted into the key insertion opening for opening the front door 12 provided in the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to opening the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the setting change state ends includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to cancel the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started while the door open error has occurred.

When ending the setting change state on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is finished is also started.

On the other hand, it is possible to have a specification in which the setting change state is not terminated unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, the setting change state is not ended only by turning off the setting key switch 152, and closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of conditions for ending the setting change state. Alternatively, the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12 . In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cancelled. In this case, when the door open error is canceled, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case of the specifications in which the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game (T11+T12). , the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound.
If the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open when the setting change state is to be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, after the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, even if one game ends after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound ends before the end of the game. .
If the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the release of the door open error is "T10", then the time from the end of the setting change state to the start of one game is defined as "T10". The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is the case where the setting change end sound output time "T01" is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set variously as follows.
(1) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the winning combination is not won.
(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the special combination is won in the combination lottery result. In addition, when a special combination is won as a result of the combination lottery, there are cases where the freezing described above is executed and cases where it is not executed, so the average time is "T12". For example, when a special role is won, the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"%, and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is
“Average 1 game time without freeze T12×(100−p)/100”+“Average 1 game time with freeze T12×p/100”
becomes.

<Nineteenth embodiment (B): when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko game machine will be described.
First, an outline of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Also, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In FIG. 98, illustration of a unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown from the rear side. Further, in FIG. 98, illustration of board cases other than the main board case 550 is appropriately omitted.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the pachinko game machine 500. As shown in FIG.

In the hall, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko game machine 500 firstly includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502 . The outer frame 501 is a frame formed to surround the pachinko gaming machine 500 . Also, the front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so that it can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501 by means of a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 500 is installed on the island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and the back side of the front frame 502 be accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504 . Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, a nail, an accessory, a pinwheel, and various prize-winning ports (including a starting port 532, which will be described later). In addition, portions of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 are provided with a production lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion opening 521 is formed in the right edge of the front frame 502 in FIG.
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504 attached to the front frame 502 side, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle The whole including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 .
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame open switch 523 is turned on, a frame open error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached so as to be able to be opened and closed so as to cover the game area on the front surface of the game board 504 . For example, when clogging of game balls occurs in the game area, it is to be resolved. By inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and performing the unlocking operation of the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a later-described door opening switch 522 is turned on. When the door open switch 522 is turned on, a door open error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko game machine 500, a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and a sub control board 80 corresponding to the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10 A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 are provided with CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. like the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10, respectively. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls power supply.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal wires")). . It is assumed that the substrates shown in FIG. 99 are all connected by harnesses. Also, in FIG. 99, illustration of the relay board is omitted, but in reality, the boards shown in FIG. 99 may be directly connected or connected via a relay board. There is
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510 . The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513 . The shooting device 513 is a device that launches game balls onto the game board 504 (game area). When the shooting handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the shooting device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510 . A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520 . A payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and pays out prize balls corresponding to the winning when there is a winning of the game balls. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525 .

A door open switch 522 and a frame open switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 . Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530 .
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies, for example, of a door opening error.
Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 notifies a frame open error, for example.

The main control board 530 is connected with a starting port switch 533 for detecting a winning to a starting port 532 which is one of the winning ports provided in the game area of the game board 504 . When the game ball wins the start port 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the start port switch 533 is turned on, a random number value is acquired as described later, and a win/fail determination is executed (lottery processing). Then, the variation time and the stop pattern of the special symbol display device 531 are determined based on the determination result, and the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, other than the starting hole 532, there are other winning holes such as a general winning hole and a big winning hole (a winning hole opened during a special game for a big win). is omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Also, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the success/failure determination result based on the turn-on of the starting port switch 533 by means of special symbols. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that indicates whether the result of winning/losing determination is winning or not, depending on the stopped symbols after variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
It should be noted that the flow from the start to stop of the special symbols will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 . The setting key insertion port 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are not necessarily provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on by inserting a predetermined setting key from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.

A setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. Also, the reset switch is a switch that is operated after removing an error that has occurred to restore the state before the error occurred. In the following description, it may be referred to as a "setting change (reset) switch 536", a "setting change switch 536", or a "reset switch 536".
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are integrally provided, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is turned to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537 . The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the setting value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pushed) once, the set value is incremented by "+1". ·→“5”→“6”→“1”→ . . . and the set value changes cyclically. Then, when the setting key is rotated counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated. When the setting change state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also extinguished.

When the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is off. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537 . Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also extinguished.
In the pachinko game machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not entered and the setting values are not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and is called a performance display monitor in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above. Like the management information display LED 74, the management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segments.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530 and is a board for determining the contents of the performance based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530 and controlling to output the determined performance. Although one sub-control board 540 is shown in FIG. 99, in reality, for example, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub-board (for example, an image display board). board for controlling the image display of the device 23).

Similar to the slot machine 10 , the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541 , a speaker 542 , and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543 , and outputs of these are controlled by a sub-control board 540 .
As shown in FIG. 97 , at least part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502 . Also, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502 . Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 504 .

Next, control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flow chart for explaining the flow of startup after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is powered on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, it corresponds to the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change state is satisfied. to judge. In this embodiment, the conditions for transitioning to the setting change state are that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process shifts to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation state is that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. If it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

When the process proceeds to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. FIG. Next, in step S705, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not turned off, the process returns to step S704 to continue the setting confirmation state (display of setting values).

When it is determined "No" in step S703 and proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is cut off, the information at the time of the power cut is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and when the power is turned on next time, it is determined whether the information at the time of the power cut matches the information at the time of the power cut. do. If they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and if it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process of restoring the state of the solenoid, the state of the special pattern display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power-off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 ends, when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is turned on in step S706, or when it is determined that the RWM is not normal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Proceed to execute RWM clear processing. This process is a process of clearing data stored in a specified storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the specified storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

At step S710, the timer interrupt is permitted. This processing is processing to enable interrupt processing. Therefore, after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed when the interrupt processing timing arrives.
In the next step S711, random number update processing (random number counter increment processing) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the time when the setting change process (setting change state) is started.
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within the normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The set value "1" is the basic set value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. FIG. For example, when the RWM value is "0", the set value display LED 537 displays "1".
Next, proceeding to step S725, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, if the setting value display LED 537 had displayed "1" until then, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the processing of step S726, and the setting value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". ” to “1”. In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the processing in step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. shall be taken.

In step S727, it is determined whether or not the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, when the set value "6" is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit has been exceeded. On the other hand, when the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724, when it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded. is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM set value data, and "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the conditions for ending the setting change process (setting change state) are met. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for terminating the setting change process is satisfied. Therefore, at step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the set value display of the set value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, proceeding to step S731 , the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes lighting processing of the production lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is completed.

The end timing of the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When a setting change end command is transmitted in step S731.
However, the end timing of the setting change state in the nineteenth embodiment (B) is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in (1) above. stipulated.
Note that the above (2) and (3) are not limited to this, and may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500. FIG.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 . In this case, one game is started even if the game ball has not reached the game area.
(2) When the game ball is shot toward the game area of the game board 504 by the shooting device 513 and enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the game area to the left side to the upper left to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 513 into the game area. ing. The moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the game area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, as the start time of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, there are various possible points of time to start. "When entering" is set as the start timing of one game.
Also, the timing of the end of one game is when the special symbol display device 531 finishes changing and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether or not the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting switch 533 is turned on. A random number is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number, a big win lottery (judgment of whether it is a big hit or a loss), a special symbol lottery (a stop symbol of a special symbol) Lottery for which pattern to use), fluctuation pattern lottery (lottery for fluctuation time of special pattern).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (a prize ball payout process) based on the winning to the starting port 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
At least part of the lottery results including the variable time among the various lottery processes executed in step S742 are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. FIG. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of the current game, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts the special symbol display device 531 to change the special symbol based on the lottery result in step S742. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is conditioned that the variation of the previous special symbol has been completed at that time, and when the special symbol is being varied, the next special symbol will be displayed. The variation is suspended, and after the variation of the special symbol currently being varied is completed, the variation of the next special symbol is started.

Also, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 executes variation of the decorative design by the image display device 543. FIG. The variation of the decorative pattern corresponds to a part of the production in the game this time.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the big win lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation by the special symbol display device 531 has a special symbol corresponding to the big win (for example, "7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the loss is provided.

Furthermore, the decoration design is varied by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the variation of the special design. Then, when stopping at the special design corresponding to the big hit, the decorative design is also stopped at the decorative design corresponding to the big win, such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at a special pattern corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative patterns are also stopped at a decorative pattern (a pattern other than the decorative pattern corresponding to the big win) corresponding to the loss. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays images of decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game It is formed in a size that occupies more than half of the area). As a result, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a big win by looking at the stop mode of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative design in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the variation time determined by lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S746, and after the special symbols are varied for the variation time determined by the lottery, the special symbols are varied so as to become the stop symbols determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747, and special symbol stop post-processing is executed. The post-stop process includes, for example, a process for shifting to a special game when the game is a big hit this time.

In the 19th embodiment (B) of the pachinko game machine, similarly to the 19th embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change are turned on. Run. Further, assuming that the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the game ends.
As described above, assuming that the setting change state has ended when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, the control board 540 starts outputting a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and the like.

The time from when "Yes" is determined in step S729 to when the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is started is longer than "0" ms. This is the timing when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) has elapsed since "Yes" was determined. In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has passed after "Yes" is determined in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound is to output a voice saying "The setting change is finished" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). Also, if the time from the start to the end of the output of the voice saying "Setting change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A ) is set to approximately “2000” ms.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in addition to the setting change end sound, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed.
Here, when the performance lamp 541 is turned on, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when the performance lamp 541 is turned on at the time of the big win. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A among the effect lamps 541 is lit in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the jackpot has been won, the effect lamp 541 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In this case, a lamp other than the lamp A may be turned on. In this case, if a lamp different from the lamp A is lit, it may be in the same lighting manner as that used to indicate the big win.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the lamp A may be turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating the big win.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is not the same as that when the big win is achieved. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player misunderstands that he/she has won a big win. You can prevent it from being lost.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 when the big win is achieved so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects (or the frequency of use is extremely low), and if the lighting pattern is seen, the setting change can be made. It is preferable to make it possible to understand that it is a production that means the end of the.
Further, for the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won. The lighting pattern indicating the end of the game may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change is finished, the production lamp 541 and the other lamps are all lit up, and when a big win is achieved, the production lamp 541 is lit up, but the other lamps are lit. is not lit. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of general game machines), the manager can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, in principle, it may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, without being limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started and before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is finished is turned on at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Also, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, as described above, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms, the time "T02" may be set to approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, the case where the game is started as soon as possible after ending the setting change state will be described.
In addition, in this embodiment, during the setting change state, the shooting device 513 is operated so that the game ball cannot be launched into the game area. Therefore, unless at least the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to operate the shooting device 513 to launch the game ball into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even when a game ball wins in one of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so as not to pay out prize balls. Also, even if a game ball wins the starting port 532, the big winning lottery is not executed, and the variation of the special symbol display device 531 and the variation of the decorative symbol by the image display device 543 are not performed. be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above. First, a case will be described where it is assumed that the game can be played even when the front frame 502 is opened.
Then, the timing of starting the game is assumed to be when the game ball enters the starting hole 532 as described above.
First, assuming that the preparation time until the start of the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to a launchable position in the launching device 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the game ball enters the starting port 532. is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball shot from the shooting device 513 enters the starting hole 532 .

When the game ball wins the starting port 532, in FIG. 102, it is judged as "Yes" in step S741, after that, the special design starts to change (step S744), and after the special design fluctuates for the determined fluctuation time , stop the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the processing in step S746 is one game time, and this one game time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 in a state in which there is no reserved ball, one game time "T22" is determined, for example, within a range of about "10000" to "30000" ms. and Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

In addition, for example, when the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more, a shortening function is known that increases the time efficiency by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Since this is the state after the end of the change state, it does not have a pending ball. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the function of shortening the variation time of special symbols is not taken into consideration.

As described above, the time required when the game is started immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time at which setting change end sound is output)<T21+T22 (preparation time for starting game + 1 minimum time for game)
becomes.

Furthermore, immediately after the end of the setting change state (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started), the effect lamp 541 is lit to indicate that the setting change is over. ” is the relationship between
T02 (about "2500" to "4000" ms) < T21 + T22
becomes.
Thus, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the output of the setting change end sound is ended and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change is completed before one game is ended. It means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

In addition, the above-mentioned one game does not take into consideration the time required to close the front frame 502 after the setting change state ends, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502 .
As with the slot machine 10, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state when the setting change state ends. Therefore, even if the setting change state is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects the frame opening error and performs error notification. A game cannot be started when a frame open error is reported. Note that when a frame open error has occurred, firstly, the firing device 513 should not be operated. Secondly, the launching device 513 is in an operable state, but even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if the game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (lottery processing is not executed, the variation of the special symbol display device 531 is not started, and prize balls are not paid out).

To cancel the frame open error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off. Further, by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502 and inserting the key to cancel the frame open error. After the setting change state is completed, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open switch 523 is turned off, so that the time until the frame open error is resolved is "T20".
T01 (output time of setting change end sound)<T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of effect lamp 541) <T20+T21+T22
becomes.

In the above example, the setting change state is terminated when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. It is also possible to terminate the setting change state on the condition that the frame open error is cleared (operation such as inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction). In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and at the end of the frame open error release operation, the setting change state ends, and the output of the setting change end sound is started. By closing the front frame 502, the setting change state may be ended on condition that the frame open switch 523 is turned off (without performing the frame open error cancellation operation). In this case, when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is terminated and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, the time " Since the setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the setting change end sound output time "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the end of the setting change.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is finished in the shortest time.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change until the end of one game can be set variously as follows. .
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" and the preparation time "T21" when the jackpot lottery is lost (not won). set.
For example, when the variation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is lost is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and the average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
can be set to

(2) The output time 'T01' of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one-game time 'T22' and the preparation time 'T21' when the jackpot lottery results in a big win.
For example, if the variation time of the special symbol display device 531 when the jackpot is won is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and the average time is "T22 (avg2)",
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
can be set to

<Twentieth Embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case for a control board.
As a board case for housing a control board, there are known a double door type and a slide type board case, and the twentieth embodiment is a board case of the slide type.
Compared to the double door system, the slide system has a smaller exposed area of the control board, so that the number of unauthorized access points can be reduced accordingly.
In the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 . Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed during sliding movement is the solder surface.
In the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors and other electronic components are mounted is called the "component surface", and the surface on which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is called the "solder surface".

In the twentieth embodiment, a board case 550 for housing a main control board 530 in a pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example. However, not limited to this, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, but the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko game machine 500, but the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and other control boards on which a CPU is mounted, providing security. can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the pachinko game machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, but it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment at the same time.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the front side. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of a state in which the main control board 530 is accommodated in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. Furthermore, FIG. 106 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. FIG. 107 is a front view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550 as seen from the rear (back) side.

Here, the “front side” refers to the component side of the main control board 530 , and the “back side” refers to the solder side of the main control board 530 .
Further, the "upper" in the "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as the "front side case (or cover)" or the "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in the "lower case 570" refers to the soldering surface side of the main control board 530, and is referred to as a "rear (rear) side case (or cover)" or a "solder side case (or cover)." can be called.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 described above. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection with other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. Various parts shown in the twentieth embodiment such as FIG. 103 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
Holes 530 a are formed in the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when attaching (fixing) the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 .

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion opening 534 each have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i that can be passed through (passed through) are formed.
A cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so that the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in the present embodiment, opening/closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but opening/closing of the cover 561 can be detected by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state under the condition that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open), or the condition is set that the sensor is turned on (the cover 561 is open). The change state may be terminating.

Crimped portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end sides of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edges as seen from the front side in FIG. The crimped portions 562 and 572 are used when sealing (crimping) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 in a fitted state. After sealing (crimping), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the crimped portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Further, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends opposite to the one ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 (the sides provided with the crimped portions 562 and 572, respectively) when viewed from the front side. It is These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four pieces) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560 . In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The arrangement interval of the four bosses 564 is the same as the arrangement interval of the four holes 530 a of the main control board 530 . Further, the boss 564 is formed with a screw hole.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is brought into contact with the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560 and the connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 pass through the opening 563b of the upper case 560, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 550. As shown in FIG.
Connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of the upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and the connector surfaces thereof are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. As shown in FIG.
In this manner, all connectors provided on the main control board 530 pass through openings formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560 . 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are all set to be appropriate gaps, and the connectors 539a to 539h are connected to the openings 563a to 563g. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after penetration, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g should not be more than necessary (for example, the gaps between the connectors and the openings). is a design value of about “0.5” mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to perform an act of kindness.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 of the main control board 530 pass through openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and are contacted (accessed) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) can be arranged (see FIG. 105), but since a cover 561 is attached over the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 as shown in FIGS. not exposed to However, the substrate case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It has become.
In the above state, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 by inserting screws into the holes 530a (four places) from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screwing them to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560. be done.

As a result, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.
In this way, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together. There is no relative movement between case 560 and main control board 530 . Therefore, on the upper case 560 side, openings 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed, and the connectors 539a to 539h pass through the openings 563a to 563g. By adopting such a structure, it is possible to obtain a structure in which unnecessary gaps do not occur between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted together, even if the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is displaced by a goto act, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 are not connected. are not relatively displaced, for example, it is not possible to increase the gaps between the connectors 539a-539h and the openings 563a-563g. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
108A and 108B are cross-sectional side views showing the state of fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570. FIG. 108A shows the temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and FIG. after slide movement).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the visibility of the drawing. Further, in the drawing, the upper case 560 is indicated by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104 and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with side walls 565 and the lower case 570 is provided with side walls 571 .

103, 104, and 108, the longitudinal lower edge of the upper case 560 (on the side of the lower case 570) is referred to as a lower edge 560a. A longitudinal edge of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
The upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are shaped so that when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are superimposed, they overlap with each other in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to contact each other. This position is called a "temporarily fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of millimeters (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Also, in the temporarily fitted state, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108(a), the upper case 560 can be moved away from the lower case 570 without any interference of the parts.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side walls 565 and 571 viewed from the side of the lower case 570 in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L. Through this gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen. there is Here, among the connectors of the main control board 530, if the leg of the connector 539g is called a connector leg 539g' and the leg of the connector 539h is called a connector leg 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' extend in the longitudinal direction. It has two rows of legs (see Fig. 104).
109, only one row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' on the outside is exposed in the provisionally fitted state. In other words, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not entirely exposed even in the provisionally mated state, and only a portion thereof is exposed.

108(a), the lower case 570 can be slidably moved with respect to the upper case 560. As shown in FIG. The direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the leftward direction in FIG. 108(a).
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can move to the end point of the sliding movement without interference. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid to a position where they abut. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the fully fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (full fitting state).

In the fully fitted state, engaging members (not shown) respectively formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged. As a result, the upper case 560 cannot be moved away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570 . However, in this state, it is possible to slide the lower case 570 with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above. be able to.

In the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108(a), the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction. In the fitted state, the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap each other, and crimping can be performed using both. After crimping the crimped portion 562 and the crimped portion 572 at this position, unless the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated or the upper case 560 can be separated. In contrast, the lower case 570 cannot be slid to return to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 in some way to return to the temporarily mated state, exposing the solder surface of the main control board 530 .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed, but only a part of the connector legs are exposed, it is possible to make it difficult to do things.
Also, even in the provisionally mated state, not all connector legs are exposed. The feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, 539g are not exposed.

When the board case 550 employs a sliding method, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, connectors are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530 . For example, if a connector is provided in the central portion of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector must have a substantially square shape surrounded by side walls on four sides. However, if the connector is arranged in the square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530, as shown in FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, the connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, the connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and the connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
The connector opening 563 of the upper case 560 has no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside).
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a generally concave shape with no side wall on the upper side (outside) in the figure.

Furthermore, the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f pass, respectively, are formed in a substantially L-shape without side walls on the upper and right sides (outer sides) in FIG. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 105, the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h are respectively passed are shaped to have side walls only on the left side (inner side) in the drawing. As a result, the connector has a shape that facilitates insertion and removal of the connector.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors that are exposed first are the connectors 539g and 539h. Feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of slide movement is set larger than in this embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f of the connectors of the main control board 530 are not exposed. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to the connectors 539b and 539c), the slide movement amount can be increased more than in the present embodiment. Even if they are provided, the legs of the connector 539f can be configured so as not to be exposed.

Also, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are likely to be exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed. Instead of exposing the entire leg, only a portion of the leg is exposed, making it difficult to act like a goto.

It is preferable that the number of connectors whose legs are at least partly exposed by sliding movement is as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2)", the number of exposed legs is set to "N-1" or less (that is, not all of them are exposed). is preferred. Furthermore, when the number of rows of connector legs is "1", it is preferable that the connector legs are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", among the "N" pins, the "n"("n" ≤ "N-1") ”)-th pin, but the “n+1”-th and subsequent pins are configured not to be exposed (that is, all pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one reference pin should be configured so as not to be exposed. Having at least one pin not exposed can make cheating more difficult than if all pins were exposed.

Also, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic components. Connections are made using lead wires. A plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, and a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530 .
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire whose security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the starting switch 533 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. is preferred.

Furthermore, regarding the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout goto, the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even when the connector is slid. preferably not exposed).
Furthermore, a lead wire for supplying power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a sub-control board 540 and For each connector to which the connecting lead wire and the lead wire connecting to the board for outputting the external signal are connected, at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, and the like.
Of the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security should be ensured in particular is the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 (signal relating to lottery) is input. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, the connector legs are not exposed (at least one leg is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if the connector is slid. It is preferable to configure as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the insertion sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector leg is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). preferably not exposed).

Furthermore, each connector to which the lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically the lead wire for outputting the driving signal of the hopper motor 36 and the lead wire for inputting the signal from the payout sensor 37 is connected Also, from the viewpoint of preventing dislodgement, it is preferable that the connector leg is not exposed (at least one leg row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed) even if it is slid. .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals Each connector to which each wire is connected is also preferably configured so that at least one leg is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st Embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of lead wires (also referred to as “signal wires”).
In the twenty-first embodiment, the start-related lead wire is made the thinnest, and at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the start-related lead wire is provided in one connector terminal having the start-related lead wire, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire thicker than the start-related lead wire, it becomes difficult to identify the start-related lead wire and suppresses cheating (illegal start-up or intentional start-up). It is something to do.
Strictly speaking, the lead wires do not have completely the same thickness because they have manufacturing errors to some extent. Therefore, the “same thickness” includes the range of “±ε”, where “ε” is the range of manufacturing error (variation). In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".

Here, in the pachinko game machine 500 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530 .
In the slot machine 10 , the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 .
Incidentally, the "start-related lead wire" is actually composed of two lines, one of which serves as a start signal line and the other one serves as a GND line. In the present embodiment, the starting signal line is referred to as "starting lead line" and does not include the GND line. However, lead wires other than lead wires related to starting may include the GND wire.

110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
110, illustration of the board case 550 is omitted. In addition, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the main control board 50 is also applicable. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the ends of the harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal".

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when, for example, the regulatory authorities of the gaming machine use the verification device to confirm data stored inside the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
FIG. 111 is a front view showing details of the harnesses B to H and the connector terminals of the harnesses B to H. FIG.
Each of the harnesses B to H consists of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, the harness B is composed of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (upper row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (lower row in the figure). harness.

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is configured in two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F is configured in one row.
The harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured in three or more rows, for example. Also, the number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. .
In addition, suppose that even if it is comprised from one lead wire, it will be called a "harness."
Harnesses also include those in which each lead wire is separated from each other (whether bundled or not), specifically, in addition to discrete wire cables, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. includes all leads connected together (whether separable or not).

In addition, FIG. 111 shows two types of thicknesses of lead wires. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, if the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is D1 and the diameter of the lead wire indicated by a double circle is D2, then "D1<D2".
In addition, in the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thicknesses are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and may be composed of lead wires of three or more types of thicknesses.
In addition, in the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 111), all the lead wires have a circular cross-section, but the term "circular" is not limited to a perfect circle, and includes a substantially circular shape. Furthermore, the cross section is not limited to a circular shape, and the cross section may be non-circular (for example, a substantially square cross section). In this case, the “thickness” of the lead wire refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in the cross-sectional shape.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire for starting (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, a lead wire connecting the starter switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 ) is the seventh lead wire of the harness D. As for the lead wire for start-up, the thinner one of the two thicknesses is used. This is because the thin lead wire makes the lead wire for starting as inconspicuous as possible. In addition, by using a thin lead wire, it becomes easy to disconnect when a fraudulent act (remodeling, etc.) is performed, so that an abnormality can be easily detected. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraud than thin lead wires. This is because it is difficult to
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when using lead wires of three different thicknesses, an intermediate lead wire may be used as the starting lead wire.
In some cases, only two wires, the start-related lead wire and its GND wire, are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Further, in the harness D including the start-related lead wire (No. 7), at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the start-related lead wire (No. 7) is provided. This is because even if it is known that the connector D includes a lead wire related to start-up, it is difficult to specify which lead wire it is (to make it difficult to cheat). In this example, lead wires Nos. 2, 4, and 8 have the same thickness as lead wire No. 7 (lead wire for start-up).

Furthermore, adjacent to the lead wire No. 7 of the harness D, the lead wire No. 8 having the same thickness is arranged. This is because by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wire No. 8 located on the right side of the lead wire No. 7 in the harness D has the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the lead wire No. 7 correspond to the lead wires No. 3, No. 6 and No. 8 in the example of FIG. At least one lead wire among these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) relating to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, leads numbered 1, 3, 5, and 6 have different thicknesses than the start lead (numbered 7). By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the start-related lead wire in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make the start-related lead wire more difficult to identify.

In addition to lead wires related to start-up, important signal wires, specifically, lead wires related to inserting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc. From the viewpoint of starting, one or more other signal wires having the same thickness and one or more other signal wires having different thickness are provided in one connector terminal in the same manner as the lead wire for starting. is preferred.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires for starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, when lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wire Nos. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. Things are mentioned.

Further, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, the fifth connector terminal of the harness G When the lead wire No. 1 is set as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the lead wire No. 1 of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a constant distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G No. 1 lead of harness H may be set to the lead for power supply.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire for starting and the connector terminal of the other harness are adjacent to each other, the harness including the lead wire for starting is arranged below the other harness. It is preferable to wire so that the lead wires for are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires for starting. In FIG. 112, for the sake of simplification of the drawing, both the harness D and the harness E consist of one row of lead wires, the harness D consists of three lead wires, and the harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. Then, it is assumed that the lead wire closest to the harness E in the harness D is set as the lead wire for starting.
In this case, wiring is performed so that the direction in which the harness D extends is the harness E side, and the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wires for starting the harness D are hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<22nd Embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to the setting change state. Although the description of the twenty-second embodiment partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment, it will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, whether the door switch 17 is on, whether the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether the reset switch 153 is on is checked before shifting to the setting change state. is determined, and transition to the setting change state is possible on condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, even if a hole is illegally drilled in the front door 12 and the setting key switch 152 is accessed, the setting change state is not entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. After the power is turned on, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that the door switch 17 may be turned on as a condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is turned off.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the setting change state are that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, when the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).
Here, in this embodiment, it is made possible to shift to the setting change state under the condition that the door switch 17 is turned on, and to end the setting change state under the condition that the door switch 17 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the door switch 17 is not determined. may

Secondly, it does not determine whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but determines whether the door switch 17 is on or off when the setting change state ends. The setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. can be set to
Fourthly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. If the door switch 17 is not turned on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for confirming the value, is operated, the set value may not be confirmed (a new set value is not stored in the RWM 53). .

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. The current setting values stored in the RWM 53 are cleared before the setting values can be changed after shifting to (setting change processing). In this case, the set value data is "0". Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

When the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED 73 of the storage area of the RWM 53
Data related to the information displayed on the (role ratio monitor) is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes the number-of-games counter, the number-of-payouts counter (including the ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is determined. is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that these three switches are ON. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not closed like the slot machine 10 (see FIG. 22), but is open.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the islands installed in the hall, it is assumed that the main control board 530 may be accessed without opening the front frame 502 by going around to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 . However, if the frame open switch 523 is not turned on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (the set value cannot be changed).

Even if the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. Furthermore, after the power is turned on, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered and the setting confirmation state is entered. do not do.
In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is turned off), , it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be individually detected as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are opened at the same time (that is, the door The specification may be such that when the open switch 522 is on and the frame open switch 523 is on), transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is permitted.
By setting in this way, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500, the functions of the set values can be inspected without performing unnecessary procedures. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 500 during the board maintenance work in the hall, setting change and setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Further, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it does not matter whether the glass door 505 is open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the ON/OFF state of the door opening switch 522 is determined when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and the state is OFF. on the condition that it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. As shown in FIG. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion opening 534, the cover 561 must be opened.
Therefore, a sensor for detecting opening/closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter referred to as "cover sensor")
may be provided so that the state can be changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state on condition that the cover sensor is turned on.

In the pachinko game machine 500, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value can be changed in common with the slot machine 10. FIG.
In addition, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation to confirm the set value, but in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 confirms the set value and , is an operation for ending the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be terminated on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned off from on and the frame opening switch 523 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends when the frame open switch 523 is turned off, that is, when the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of cheating).

In this embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is on, and to end the setting change state on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame open switch 523 is ON, and when the setting change state ends, the ON/OFF state of the frame open switch 523 is not determined. can be

Second, it does not judge whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state, but judges whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when the setting change state ends, and the frame open switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, when shifting to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off. You can set it so that it does not.

Fourthly, it is possible to change the set value by operating the setting change switch 536 during the setting change state without judging whether the frame open switch 523 is on or off when shifting to the setting change state. If the frame open switch 523 is not on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for fixing the setting value, is turned off, the setting value is not fixed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM). May be set.

In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance Data relating to information displayed on display monitor 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is the base value.

Furthermore, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are preferably provided on the rear side of the front frame 502 on the side closer to the hinge mechanism 503 . In this way, it is possible to prevent easy access to the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 simply by opening the front frame 502 slightly.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting switch 536 can be seen from the front. A change (reset) switch 536 is located to the right in the area of the main control board 530 . Thereby, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged closer to the hinge mechanism 503 . In FIG. 98, the left side is the open side.
A setting key insertion slot 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged at a position far from the open side (left side in the figure).

Regarding the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are set on the main control board 50 so that when the front door 12 is opened, the rotational axis of the front door 12 is adjusted. It is preferable to arrange them so as to be close to each other. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is seen, it looks like FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side in FIG. A switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a countermeasure to prevent the transition to the setting change state due to the cheating, for example, in the pachinko game machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise. , the setting key switch 535 may be turned on. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when a key is inserted into the key insertion opening 521 to open the front frame 502, the front frame 502 can be opened by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite to each other, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The slot machine 10 is also similar to the above.
The setting key switch 152 may be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 . In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise, and if it is configured not to shift to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the setting change state is made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front door 12, if the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the rotation direction of the key when opening the front door 12 and the rotation direction of the setting key can be changed. is in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship between the upper case 560 of the substrate case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion opening 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. FIG. Note that in FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of the setting key insertion opening 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this way, for example, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to access the surface rather than the surface S1. Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting fraud.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surfaces of the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the upper surface of the cover 561 is , is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560. As shown in FIG.
By forming in this manner, when attempting to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, a wire-like object may be inserted from between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover may be opened. 561, it is possible to make it difficult to do so, so that it is possible to suppress the setting act.

Although the 19th to 22nd embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound may be output when the setting confirmation state is ended. For example, outputting a voice saying "The setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state,
a) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended in the shortest possible time.
b) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game when the game is ended within the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , ends the output of the setting confirmation completion sound.
It can be set as follows.

(2) Furthermore, simultaneously with the end of the setting confirmation state, the production lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the production lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) outputs an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended. may Also in this case, similarly to the 19th embodiment, the performance time by the lamp is
a) Ending the ramp performance before the end of the game when the game is completed in the shortest possible time.
b) Ending the ramp effect before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game in which the special role was won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot was won (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) was completed within the average time of one game , ends the lamp effect.
etc.

(3) When the setting change state is terminated (or when the setting confirmation state is terminated as in the above example), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effect are output. The (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effects are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540 .
However, not limited to this, when ending the setting change (or confirmation) state, the output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530 executes an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has ended. You may

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion opening 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but not limited to this, the main control board 50 is separately provided. , a setting change board may be provided, and the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), setting change (reset) switch 153, and setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The pachinko game machine 500 is similar to the above. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a set value display LED 537 are provided on this setting change board. good too.

(5) As the setting change end sound, an example of outputting a voice saying "setting change is finished" is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to this wording. There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, the game is started immediately after the setting change state ends. However, it is assumed that the game is started immediately after the setting change state ends during the actual operation of the hall. not. For example, it is assumed that after the hall manager changes the settings, he tries to play one game as a trial. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has ended correctly by the output of the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp should not be confused with the effect output in the game. One of the purposes is to make

B. Twentieth Embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other so as to be slidable. However, there are various ways of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the sliding movement, and the method is not limited to the one shown in FIG. Moreover, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, they may have a shape that allows them to be overlapped with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged on the main control board 530, and which connector legs are exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are temporarily mated. , various methods.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slid as in this embodiment, connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a symmetrical position with respect to the connectors 539g and 539h, even if the amount of slide movement increases, the connector legs are not exposed.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, from the connector 539a side in FIG. , connectors with signal lines for outputting external signals, and connectors with signal lines for presentation) are arranged in sequence, and signal line connectors that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as the connectors 539g and 539h. Things are mentioned.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has the crimped portions 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can also be applied to the substrate case 550 that does not have the crimped portions. For example, the board case that accommodates the sub-control board 540 of the pachinko game machine 500 may not have a crimped portion, but the twentieth embodiment can be applied even to such a board case.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may be all thick lead wires, or all thin lead wires.
Also, although the harness E has only one row of thin lead wires, the harness and connector terminals may have two or more rows of thin lead wires.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may be provided in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, it is sufficient that there is at least one thick lead wire and at least one thin lead wire in the row.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as "one harness".
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is one harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are bound into one at the end, it is called a "harness group" and is not called a "single harness".

(3) When the main control board 530 and another board are harness-connected, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, on the other end side of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx (Nx≧1) and Ny (Ny≧1) lead wires, and connector terminals X are attached to the tips of the Nx lead wires, The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal X) is attached to the end of the Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (Nx lead wires). (either the same substrate as the substrate to which the line is connected or a different substrate).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko game machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with . Also in this case, it is determined whether or not the frame open switch 523 is on, and if it is on, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(2) As described above, it is conceivable to provide a setting change board on a board different from the main control board 50 or 530 . In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the opening axis of the front door 12 inside the housing (toward the opening axis), in other words, to the side away from the open end as seen from the player side. It is preferred to arrange the substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, it is set on the back side of the front frame 502 toward the hinge mechanism 503 (toward the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, a modified substrate is provided. By arranging them in this way, the setting key insertion openings 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Even in this case, the main control board 50 or 530 is preferably arranged far from the open end.

In particular, the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with management information display LEDs 74 or 538, respectively, and it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open side, and also arrange the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open end.
However, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 can be made invisible simply by arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, at a position away from the open side. is also possible. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted approximately in the center position of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, the management information can be The information displayed by display LEDs 74 or 538 can also be easily obscured.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
The twenty-third embodiment relates to a production lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541. FIG.
Here, "substantially identical" is a concept including items that are approximately identical but are not completely identical due to manufacturing errors or the like, and items that are not completely identical but appear to be identical. Also, "substantially identical" is a concept that includes "identical."
Although the description of the twenty-third embodiment partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment (B), it will be described again.
FIG. 114 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 115 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side).

116 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 117 is the upper side of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. 118 is a perspective view from the right side of the right base member 650 with parts removed, and FIG. 118 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. is.

119 is an enlarged front top view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 121 is an upper enlarged perspective view of the right base member 650 with the upper part removed, as seen from the left side. FIG. 121 is a right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. 650 is a left side upper enlarged view.

122 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 123 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.
124 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper portion of the right frame lamp cover 622, and the right frame lamp substrate 621 removed, and corresponds to FIG.
FIG. 125 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
126 is an enlarged sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the pachinko game machine 500 includes a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. It has
A game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with the game area (not shown) facing the front side. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached so as to cover the game area of the game board 504 .

Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a shooting handle 508, and the like are attached.
Furthermore, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501 .
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed.

A locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion opening 521 into which a key for operating the locking device is inserted is provided on the right side of the glass door 505. .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 and the key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502, the front frame 502 With the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis, it can be opened (moved) forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 .

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, the firing handle 508, etc. attached to the front frame 502 are moved forward. Together with the frame 502, it moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.
Note that when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame open switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

When the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 and the key is inserted from the key insertion opening 521 to unlock the front frame 502 and the glass door 505, the glass door 505 With the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis, the front frame 502 can be opened forward.
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, and the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

In addition, the game area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged parallel to each other with a predetermined interval. A production lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 is attached to the left side so as to surround the periphery of the glass plate.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 , the glass plate is positioned in front of the game area of the game board 504 . As a result, the game area of the game board 504 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

114 and 115, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 includes the upper frame lamp portion 610 arranged along the front upper edge of the glass door 505 and the front right edge of the glass door 505. and a left frame lamp portion 630 arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505 .

That is, the upper frame lamp portion 610 is a decorative lamp portion that is formed horizontally from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 .
The right frame lamp portion 620 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 630 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505 .

Furthermore, the right end portion of the upper frame lamp portion 610 and the upper end portion of the right frame lamp portion 620 are continuous, and the left end portion of the upper frame lamp portion 610 and the upper end portion of the left frame lamp portion 630 are continuous.
Thereby, the glass plate arranged in the center of the glass door 505 is surrounded by the upper frame lamp portion 610, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 at the upper edge, the right edge, and the left edge. .

114 and 115, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right lamp substrate 611, an upper frame left lamp substrate 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613. As shown in FIGS.
The upper frame right lamp substrate 611 includes a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as "light emitting means") for emitting light from the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected. 1 to b are mounted lamp substrates, which are arranged on the right side of the front upper portion of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp substrate 612 is a lamp substrate on which a light emitting element for causing the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the left side of the front upper part of the glass door 505 with the element mounting surface facing the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 116, 119 and 120, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is mounted with four LEDs 641a to 641d as light emitting elements. Although not shown, the left lamp substrate 612 of the upper frame also has four LEDs mounted thereon as light emitting elements in the same manner as the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

In addition, the full-color LED has three LEDs that emit red light, an LED that emits green light, and an LED that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three LEDs, it is possible to express full color. It is a thing.
In other words, it has three light-emitting elements that emit red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the outputs of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full-color LED.

Further, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . A white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. As shown in FIGS. mounted on top.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally long shape from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . Therefore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 . Thus, when the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to glow.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is made of colorless translucent resin. Therefore, through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 can be seen through. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are green or black, the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 610 becomes poor when the light emitting elements are turned off. When the light-emitting element emits light, it may appear that the light is emitted in a color different from the set color.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are white. As a result, the appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 610 is not degraded even if the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. can be done.
In addition, by making the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 white, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected on the mounting surface of the light emitting element by the upper frame lamp cover. It reflects efficiently toward the 613 side. As a result, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can appear brighter. Further, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in white, the coloring of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful. In particular, when the light emitting element emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

114 and 115, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp substrate 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622. As shown in FIGS.
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp portion 620 to emit light and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

Also, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, seven LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted on the upper portion of the right frame lamp substrate 621 as light emitting elements. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the lower portion of the right frame lamp substrate 621 as well. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the right frame lamp substrate 621 is white. A white coating film is formed by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element of the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the same manner as the upper right frame lamp substrate 611 .

The right-frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right-frame lamp substrate 621, and is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 621 . Therefore, the right frame lamp cover 622 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 . As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 emits light, the right-frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

By making the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621 white, the appearance of the right frame lamp portion 620 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is Efficient reflection toward the cover 622 side so that the right frame lamp cover 622 looks brighter and the color development of the light emitting element looks beautiful is the above-described upper frame lamp portion 610 . is similar to

114 and 115, the left frame lamp section 630 includes a left frame lamp substrate 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632. As shown in FIGS.
The left-frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the left-frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the glass door 505 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

Also, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, although not shown, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is white. A white coating film is formed by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631 on which the light emitting elements are mounted, as in the case of the upper right frame lamp substrate 611 .

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp substrate 631, and is attached to the front left portion of the glass door 505 as shown in FIGS.
The left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp substrate 631 . Therefore, the left frame lamp cover 632 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 . As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the left-frame lamp substrate 631 emits light, the left-frame lamp cover 632 appears to glow.

By making the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 white, the appearance of the left frame lamp portion 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is To make the left frame lamp cover 632 look brighter and to make the color development of the light emitting elements look beautiful by efficiently reflecting the light toward the cover 632 side, the upper frame lamp portion 610 described above is used. is similar to

Also, the glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 116 to 121) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member that forms the skeleton of the right portion of the glass door 505 , and the left base member is a member that forms the skeleton of the left portion of the glass door 505 . Also, the left base member is formed in a shape substantially symmetrical with the right base member 650 . The skeleton of the glass door 505 is configured by the right base member 650 and the left base member.

As shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted and the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 are mounted on the upper front portion of the right base member 650. An upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is provided.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, on the front right side of the right base member 650, a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which a right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and a right frame board mounting portion 653 to which a right frame lamp cover 622 is mounted. A cover mounting portion 654 is provided.

Although not shown, the left base member has an upper frame left board mounting portion to which the upper frame left lamp board 612 is mounted and an upper frame left cover mounting portion to which the left portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted. is provided.
Further, although not shown, the left base member is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 631 is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is mounted on the front left side of the left base member. .

Upper frame right lamp substrate 611, upper frame left lamp substrate 612, upper frame lamp cover 613, upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, upper frame left substrate mounting portion (not shown), upper frame right cover mounting portion 652, and an upper frame left cover attachment portion (not shown) constitute an upper frame lamp portion 610 .
As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
A right frame lamp portion 620 is composed of the right frame lamp substrate 621 , the right frame lamp cover 622 , the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 , and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 .
Further, a left frame lamp portion 630 is composed of a left frame lamp substrate 631, a left frame lamp cover 632, a left frame substrate mounting portion (not shown), and a left frame cover mounting portion (not shown).

The upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is a part to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted, and is provided on the front upper portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 .
Further, as shown in FIGS. 120 to 122, the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is provided with a board support rib 661a shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right side lamp board 611. As shown in FIG. The board support rib 661a is for supporting the upper frame right lamp board 611. As shown in FIG. When the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is placed at a predetermined position on the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 rests on the substrate support ribs 661a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119 and 120, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is provided with three positioning bosses 682a-c. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used to position the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and are formed in a cylindrical shape.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, a screw boss 681 is provided on the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 . This screw boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A screw hole 684 is provided in the center of the screw boss 681 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, a positioning hole 685a is provided in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a. This positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651. It penetrates from one side to the other side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, fixing holes 686a are provided at positions corresponding to the screw bosses 681 on the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. This fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right side substrate mounting portion 651, and extends from one surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the other surface. penetrates.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the opposite side of the mounting surface of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right substrate mounting portion 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided in the center of the screw boss 681 matches the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and screwed into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is attached to the upper frame right substrate. It is fixed to the part 651 .

As shown in FIG. 123, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. The fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the long diameter of the positioning hole 685a is the same as that of the screw 683a. It is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688 .
Furthermore, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

Thus, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. As a result, when the upper frame right lamp board 611 is fixed to the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are not confused with each other, and the assembling work can proceed smoothly. so that it can be
In addition, since the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a. This is so as not to be mistaken for the use hole 686a.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the positioning boss 682a is positioned as shown in FIGS. protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame. A tip of the positioning boss 682a that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a is referred to as a protruding portion 687. As shown in FIG. The projecting portion 687 is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the projecting portion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, and this screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684 to attach the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 to the upper frame right substrate. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the right lamp substrate 611 of the upper frame.
As shown in FIG. 123, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T1" and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T2", "T1>T2" is set. .
That is, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than that of the LED 641a.

Furthermore, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is surface-treated to reflect the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, silver plating is applied to the screw head 689 of the screw 683a as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 641a. Silver plating includes silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

Thus, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be greater than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a. The emitted light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 looks beautiful.

The upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is a portion to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached, and is provided on the front upper portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120 .
Also, the upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. The cover fitting groove 662 a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650 . Then, when the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662 a and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650 , the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached to the upper frame right cover mounting portion 652 . fixed to

The right frame board mounting portion 653 is a portion to which the right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and is provided on the front right portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 120 and 124 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 124, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with board support ribs 661b to 661e shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. As shown in FIG. The substrate supporting ribs 661b to 661e are for supporting the right frame lamp substrate 621. As shown in FIG. When the right-frame lamp substrate 621 is placed at a predetermined position on the right-frame substrate mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 rests on the substrate support ribs 661b to 661e.

116, 117, 119, and 120, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b in close proximity.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, and extends from one surface of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other side. penetrates to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right-frame lamp board 621 to the right-frame board mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one side surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 to the other side surface. .

Although not shown, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with positioning bosses at positions corresponding to the positioning holes 685b, and screw bosses are provided at positions corresponding to the fixing holes 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided in the right frame board mounting portion 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653. FIG. Then, a screw is inserted into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right frame lamp board 621, and the screw is screwed to the screw boss provided in the right frame board mounting portion 653, thereby the right frame lamp is mounted. A substrate 621 is fixed to the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 .
116, 117, 119 and 120, positioning bosses and screws are omitted in order to make it easier to see the positioning holes 685b and the fixing holes 686b.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 119, in this embodiment, both the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b and the opening area of the positioning hole 685b are different. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
As a result, when the right-frame lamp board 621 is fixed to the right-frame board mounting portion 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mistaken, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly. .

The right frame cover attachment portion 654 is a portion to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right portion of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS.
Further, the right frame cover attachment portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. The cover fitting groove 662 b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650 .

Then, when the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed as shown in FIGS. A cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover mounting portion 654 .
118 and 125, the left edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 (edge on the game board 504 side) covers the outside of the left edge of the right base member 650 (edge on the game board 504 side). is formed as

As described above, the right-frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 116), and the right-frame-board mounting portion 653 is shaped along the outer periphery of the right-frame lamp board 621. (see FIG. 124). The width W1 (FIG. 116) of the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the lateral direction is substantially the same as the width W2 (FIG. 124) of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 in the lateral direction.
That is, when the width of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 in the width direction is "W1" and the width of the right-frame substrate mounting portion 653 in the width direction is "W2", "W1≈W2" is set. It is As a result, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board mounting portion 653 .

The entire surface of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted is white. The entire mounting surface of the element can be made to function as a reflector, thereby making it possible to make the color development of the light emitting element look beautiful.
In addition, "substantially rectangular shape" means "approximately rectangular shape". Therefore, as long as the shape is approximately rectangular, for example, the long sides and short sides may have unevenness in the middle, and all or part of the long sides and short sides may be curved or inclined. Moreover, the corners may not be right angles, and the corners may be rounded. Also, the term "substantially rectangular" is a concept that includes "rectangular".

In addition, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is formed along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame board mounting portion 653. formed. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621 .
Therefore, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board mounting portion 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover mounting portion 654, the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 is covered with the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered with substrate 621 . Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 looks white, so that the light emitting element looks beautiful.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a lens portion 670 is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the right frame lamp cover 622 . As shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.
126(a) shows a partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 126(b) shows another partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. showing.

As shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 has the same thickness at all locations, but different curvatures depending on the location.
In this way, by forming the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness are joined together, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced. The light emitted from the light emitting element can be displayed clearly.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. The shape is similar to the right frame lamp cover 622 .

Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko game machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, A sub control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 corresponding to the sub control board 80 and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520 are provided.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub-control board 540 controls the output of effects, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524 . All of these control boards are harness-connected.

Also, the sub-control board 540, the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are harness-connected.
The sub control board 540 controls light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the contents of the effect based on commands transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 , the upper frame left lamp board 612 , the right frame lamp board 621 , and the left frame lamp board 631 .
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board for controlling the entire presentation and a sub-sub-board for controlling the image display of the image display device 23 .

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 includes a starting port switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has entered a starting port 532 provided in the game area of the game board 504. are connected (see FIG. 99). When the game ball wins the start port 532 and detects that the start port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, executes various lotteries based on the acquired random number value, and special symbol display device. The variable display of special symbols in 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 and the stop symbols based on the results of various lotteries, and the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 correspond to the determination. Control display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532 (the starting port switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 5
30 acquires a random value, and based on the acquired random value, a jackpot lottery (a lottery for a big win or a loser), a special symbol lottery (a lottery for which symbol to stop the special symbol), and a variation A pattern lottery (lottery for the time to variably display the special symbols) is executed (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Further, when the above various lotteries are executed, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating at least part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540 . Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 wins a big win in a big win lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command (jackpot command) to the sub-control board 540 indicating that the big win has been won.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub-control board 540 controls the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to the jackpot command. to emit light in a corresponding light emission pattern.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the big win, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, by causing the light emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors at the time of a big hit, the color development of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
When a jackpot is won, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 may be caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the big win, or all the lamp substrates may emit light. The element may be illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to a big win.

In addition, when the jackpot is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and the right frame lamp substrate 621 and The light-emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting element to "255", the light-emitting element can emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the payout control board 520 is electrically connected to the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When detecting that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command (door open command) indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540 .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the door open command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are displayed in white. Control to emit light.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When detecting that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating that the frame open switch 523 is turned on (frame open command) to the sub control board 540 .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the frame open command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are displayed in white. Control to emit light.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Further, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 emit light in white, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame are illuminated. The hall clerk can be notified that 502 is open.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the left frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the ON state of the starting hole switch 533 is detected, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on the acquired random number value , jackpot lottery (lottery to win or lose), special pattern lottery (lottery to determine which pattern to stop the special pattern), variation pattern lottery (lottery to determine the time to display the special pattern in a variable manner). At the same time, the special symbol display device 531 starts the variable display of the special symbols.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and the stop pattern of the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of the above various lotteries, and the special symbols in the special symbol display device 531 correspond to the determination. Controls the display of symbols.
Then, in the pachinko game machine 500, when the game ball enters the start port 532 and the ON state of the start port switch 533 is detected, one game starts, the special symbol display device 531 ends the variable display of the special symbols, One game can be finished when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the above various lotteries are executed, the main control board 530 transmits commands indicating at least part of the lottery results to the sub-control board 540 . Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 loses in the jackpot lottery, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub-control board 540 a command indicating the loss (loss command).

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives the losing command, it executes a drawing for the effect pattern at the time of losing (a lottery for selecting either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
The sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in a mode according to the result of the production pattern lottery. The light emitting element is caused to emit light, and the red LED mounted on the decoration substrate on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

FIGS. 127(a) and (b) show production patterns when a big win lottery is lost, (a) is a time chart showing production pattern 1 at the time of loss, and (b) is a time chart. , is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 at the time of miss.
In FIGS. 127(a) and (b), “LED1” indicates LEDs 641e to 641k (all full-color LEDs) mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621, and “LED2” indicates the upper frame right lamp substrate 611. Mounted LEDs 641a to 641d (all full-color LEDs) are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 127(a) and (b), “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504, and “LED4” indicates the decoration on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on a board with FIG. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504 is green.

In this embodiment, both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds.
As shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, LED1 (LED641e ~ 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) is lit (on) at the same time as the special symbols start to fluctuate. , Turn off (turn off) before the end of the special symbol fluctuation. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, LED2 (LED641a to 641d mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611) lights up after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. , It is before the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and is extinguished at the same time as the LED1 is extinguished. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED3 (one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration on the game board 504) changes the special symbol. Lights up after the start and turns off before the end of the special symbol fluctuation. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED4 (another red LED mounted on a board provided with a decoration on the game board 504) starts to fluctuate with special symbols. After that, it lights up at the same time as the LED3 lights up, and before the end of the variation of the special symbol, it goes out at the same time as the LED2 lights up. Also, in effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 127(b), when the performance pattern 2 is determined, the LED 1 is lit at the same time as when the performance pattern 1 is determined, at the same time as the special symbol variation starts, and the special symbol variation ends. turn off earlier. Also in effect pattern 2, similarly to effect pattern 1, the lighting time of LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.
Also, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when effect pattern 2 is determined, LED2 does not light up, unlike when effect pattern 1 is determined. Therefore, in effect pattern 2, the lighting time of LED 2 is 0 second.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the performance pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 lights up after the start of the variation of the special symbols, and before the end of the variation of the special symbols, the LED 1 goes off. turn off at the same time. Also, in effect pattern 2, the lighting time of LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, LED4 is after the start of the special symbol variation, and is lit at the same time as the LED3 is lit, and from the end of the special symbol variation. It is before and goes out before the LED 3 goes out. Also in the effect pattern 2, similarly to the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a game that is lost in the jackpot lottery, either the production pattern 1 or the production pattern 2 is determined by the production pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 emit light according to the decided production pattern. Control.
Then, the LED 1 is lit (lighted) for 6 seconds regardless of whether the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting (emission) time of the LED 1 is 6 seconds in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery.

When the performance pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 is lit for one second, and when the performance pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 is not lit.
For this reason, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 3 in the games that failed in the big winning lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, the LED 3 is lit for 2 seconds when the performance pattern 1 is determined, and is lit for 4 seconds when the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 4 in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Further, the LED 4 is lit (lighted) for 3 seconds regardless of whether the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 4 is 3 seconds in the games that failed in the jackpot lottery.
As described above, the average value of the lighting time of the LED 1 in the game lost in the big winning lottery is set longer than the average value of the lighting time of the LEDs 2 to 4 in the game lost in the big winning lottery.

As described above, the entire mounting surface of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 is white, and the right-frame lamp cover 622 is made of colorless translucent resin. Therefore, the light emission of the LED 1 (the LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) can be displayed beautifully, so even in a game that fails in the jackpot lottery, a beautiful effect using the LED 1 can be displayed. can.

Although the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-third embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless translucent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be colorless or white and have a translucent part.

Therefore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be entirely colorless and translucent, or may be entirely white and translucent.
Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is colorless and translucent only in the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element, for example, and the other portion is colored such as red or blue and translucent. It may have transparency or may not have translucency.
Furthermore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 has, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element white and translucent, and the other portions are translucent with a color such as red or blue. It may or may not have translucency.

Furthermore, all or part of the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in a color substantially the same as or similar to one emission color of the full-color LED as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 are set to blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “ 255”), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks substantially the same as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit light in the above blue, or a blue resin that looks similar to the above blue. It can be made of resin.

Note that due to manufacturing errors, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may vary, for example, from output value "0" for red (R), output value "0" for green (G), and output value "250" for blue (B). The emission color may be the same as the color of the light emitted at the time, or the emission color when the output value of red (R) is "5", the output value of green (G) is "5", and the output value of blue (B) is "255". It may be the same color as
Considering such a point, it is described as "substantially the same color".
In addition, "substantially the same color" is a concept including "same color". Also, "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes colors that are not exactly the same color but look the same color.
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE (Commission International de l'Eclairage) standard color system (XYZ color system).
FIG. 128 shows the range of "substantially the same color" as blue, taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 128, black circles indicate blue (output value “0” for red (R), output value “0” for green (G), and output value “255” for blue (B)). shows an example of the range of blue and "substantially the same color".

In addition, "similar color" is a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors in the vicinity of the target color.
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining analogous colors using a chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system.
FIG. 129 shows the range of “similar colors” of blue, taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 129, white circles indicate blue (output value “0” for red (R), output value “0” for green (G), output value “255” for blue (B)), and hatching around the white circles The circle marked with indicates an example of the range of "similar colors" of blue.

Also, the range of blue "similar colors" is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in FIG. It can be the range of "similar colors".
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Since it is a range recognized as , it can be set as a range of "similar colors" of blue.

The same applies to the range of “similar colors” of colors other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129, within the range of 0 to 0.3 on the x-axis and 0.6 or more on the y-axis, general players are green. Therefore, it can be regarded as a range of "similar colors" of green.
Further, for example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. is the range that is recognized as red, it can be regarded as the range of "similar colors" of red.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the mounting surface of the light emitting element (light emitting means) on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is entirely white, but at least a part of it is substantially white. It is good if it is.
For example, of the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611, the periphery of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 may be black.
In addition, "substantially white" is a concept including "white". Also, "substantially white" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely white but appear to be white.

Even when at least part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in a color substantially the same or similar to the color of light emitted by the light emitting means, at least part of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is substantially white. By configuring with, even if the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate can be seen through the lamp cover, it can be prevented from looking bad, the color development of the light emitting means can be made to look beautiful, and furthermore, the light is emitted. When the means emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

(2) In the twenty-third embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, but this is not restrictive.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a modification of the AA cross section of FIG. 119, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. As shown in FIG. 130, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent confusion between the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a.

(3) In the twenty-third embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, but it is not limited to this, and may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the twenty-third embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a may be painted white, for example.

(5) In the twenty-third embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two lamp substrates, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612, but is not limited to this. lamp substrates alone, or three or more lamp substrates.
Also, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be formed as one integral member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (upper frame right member) located in the right portion and a second member located in the central portion may be provided. It may be composed of three members: a member (upper frame center member) and a third member (upper frame left member) positioned on the left side.

(6) In the twenty-third embodiment, the right-frame lamp section 620 includes only one of the right-frame lamp substrates 621 as a lamp substrate. .
Also, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be one integrally formed member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a first member located in the lower portion. You may comprise from two members of 2 members (right frame lower side member).

(7) In the twenty-third embodiment, the left-frame lamp section 630 includes only one left-frame lamp substrate 631 as a lamp substrate. .
That is, as described in the twenty-third embodiment and modifications (5) to (7), each of the upper frame lamp portion 610, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 has only one lamp substrate. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Also, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be formed as one integral member. Alternatively, for example, a first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper portion and a first member located in the lower portion (left frame upper member) may be provided. It may be composed of two members, namely two members (left frame lower member).

Further, for example, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612 are attached to the front upper portion of the glass door 505, and the upper frame lamp is mounted so as to cover the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. The cover 613 may be attached to configure the upper frame lamp portion 610 .
Similarly, a right-frame lamp substrate 621 is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505, and a right-frame lamp cover 622 is attached so as to cover the right-frame lamp substrate 621 to form a right-frame lamp section 620. The left frame lamp portion 630 may be configured by attaching the left frame lamp substrate 631 to the front left portion of the glass door 505 and attaching the left frame lamp cover 632 so as to cover the left frame lamp substrate 631 .

That is, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 such as the right frame lamp portion 620 may be unitized, but the lamp substrate such as the right frame lamp substrate 621 is directly attached to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, and the lamp The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the substrate.

(8) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 is opened. and the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the staff in the hall.
However, not limited to this, for example, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can also notify the hall clerk that you are there.

Here, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state will be described, although the description partially overlaps with that of the nineteenth embodiment (B).
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99). .

The setting key switch 535 is a switch that is turned on by inserting a predetermined setting key from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, for example.
A setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when changing the set value during the setting change state. A reset switch is a switch that is operated after removing an error that has occurred to restore the state before the error occurred.

In the pachinko game machine 500, the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 are turned on with the power switch 511 turned off (power off state). Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. is determined (step S701 in FIG. 100).
Then, the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on (“Yes” in step S701 of FIG. 100).
When it is determined, the setting change state is entered (step S702 in FIG. 100).

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED.
In addition, in the setting change state, the set value is incremented by "1" each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. In this embodiment, the setting value has six levels from setting 1 to setting 6. In the setting change state, the setting value changes from "1" to "2" each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. ]→...→"5"→"6"→"1"→... cyclically.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is ended.

When the setting key switch 535 is turned on with the power switch 511 turned off, and the power switch 511 is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned off, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the conditions for shifting to the setting change state are not satisfied when the power switch 511 is turned on ("No" in step S701 of FIG. 100), the following First, it is determined whether the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

When it is determined that the frame open switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 in FIG. 100), the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. (Step S704 in FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED. This makes it possible to check the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub control board 540 a command (setting change start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting change state.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change start command, the sub-control board 540 turns on the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub control board 540 a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the setting confirmation state has been entered.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation start command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are switched to white. to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Also, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 emits white light, thereby indicating that the setting change state or setting confirmation state is being controlled. can inform the store clerk.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

When the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 and the left-frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, and when the light emitting element is blinked while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different between when it is being controlled and when it is controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the condition for shifting to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 turned off, and then turning on the power switch 511 in this state may be set as a transition condition to the setting change state. That is, it is not necessary to set the reset switch 536 ON as a condition for transition to the setting change state.

Furthermore, the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation state are not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is off, and turning on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be set as the transition condition to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light, and the glass door 505 is opened. and the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the staff in the hall.
Further, in the above modified example (8), in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. I tried to inform the hall clerk that it was done.
However, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, when the power is turned off, the light-emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like emits white light to indicate that the power is being turned off. can also inform

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko game machine 500 executes the processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 when the power switch 511 is turned on (recovering from power failure). FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing when recovering from power failure.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (when the power is turned off), the main control board 530 stores the information at the time of the power shutdown in the RWM.
Also, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from power failure), the main control board 530 determines whether or not the information at the time of recovery from power failure matches the information at the time of power failure. (Step S707 in FIG. 100).

When the information at the time of recovery from power failure matches the information at the time of power failure, it is determined that the RWM is normal ("Yes" in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the state recovery process is executed. (Step S708 in FIG. 100).
On the other hand, if the information at the time of recovery from the power failure does not match the information at the time of the power failure, it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality (“No” in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the RWM clear process is executed ( step S709 in FIG. 100).

In addition, the state restoration processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is processing for restoring the state of the solenoid, the state of the special design display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power failure.
Furthermore, the RWM clearing process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process of clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed, or if it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear process is executed.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the state return processing (step S708 in FIG. 100) is executed, or the RWM clear processing (step S709 in FIG. 100) is executed, then the timer interrupt permitting processing ( 100 step S710) is executed.
Then, when the processing for permitting the timer interrupt is executed, the series of processing executed when returning from power-off ends.

Further, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from power interruption), the main control board 530 transmits a command (power recovery start command) indicating recovery from power interruption to the sub control board 540. .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration start command, the sub-control board 540 turns on the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , to emit white light.

Furthermore, when executing the processing for permitting the timer interrupt, the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery end command) to the sub control board 540 to indicate that the series of processes executed when recovering from power failure has ended. Send.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light during the execution of the series of processes when recovering from power failure, and the light emitting element emits white light when the series of processes performed when recovering from power failure is completed. ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when the power is restored from the interruption, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the lamp substrate 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light, thereby informing the staff in the hall that the power is being restored from the interruption. can.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the store clerk in the hall can easily notice that the power supply is being restored.
It should be noted that the light emitting elements mounted on one or more lamp substrates among the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light during the recovery from power failure. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 and the left-frame lamp substrate 631 may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates may emit white light. good too.

Also, during recovery from power interruption, the light-emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to recovery from power interruption.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during recovery from power failure, the glass door The flickering pattern of the light emitting element can be made different when the 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the power is restored from the power off.

(10) In the twenty-third embodiment and modifications (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, or When the power is turned off, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrate 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light to indicate that the glass door 505 and the front frame 502 are open, and that the settings are changed or confirmed. The hall clerk is notified that the machine is being controlled or that the machine is recovering from a power cut.

However, the emission color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it detects that the door open switch 522 or the frame open switch 523 is turned on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, or when it recovers from power failure, it is mounted on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 or the like. The light-emitting elements in the game may be caused to emit light in a color that is not emitted during normal games.

Further, as a color that is not emitted during a normal game, for example, a specific red color can be mentioned. Furthermore, as a specific red color, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to "255" and the output values of green (G) and blue (B) are set to "0", the light emitting element Emitting red color can be mentioned. Such a red color is a red color that is not emitted during normal games. It is possible to make it easier for the staff in the hall to notice that it is being controlled to the setting confirmation state or that it is in the process of recovering from power-off.

(11) In the twenty-third embodiment, an example of the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500 was described, and the production lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate was configured in white was described. The twenty-third embodiment can also be applied when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10 .
FIG. 131 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 in the modified example of the twenty-third embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side).
The following description partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), but will be described again.

As shown in FIG. 131, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close.
A door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13 . When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged side by side is arranged inside the cabinet 13. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged at a position corresponding to a position above the device 14 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the door sensor, the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the pattern display device 14, the sub control board 80, etc. via the input port 51 or the output port 52. ing.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . As a result, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be visually recognized from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
A bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window. .

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is arranged on the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and production lamps (decorative lamp part ) 21 is attached.
Further, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23 on the upper side of the back side of the front door 12 .

The sub-control board 80 controls effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamp 21 , the speaker 22 , the image display device 23 , the main control board 50 and the like via the input port 81 or the output port 82 . Then, based on the command received from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect is to be output. It controls the output of the display device 23 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 131, the effect lamps (decorative lamp portions) 21 are arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12 and the upper frame lamp portion 26 arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12. A right frame lamp portion 27 is arranged, and a left frame lamp portion 28 is arranged along the front left edge of the front door 12 .
In other words, the upper frame lamp portion 26 is a decorative lamp portion formed horizontally from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12 .
The right frame lamp portion 27 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12 .
Further, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a decorative lamp portion formed vertically from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12 .

As shown in FIG. 131, the upper frame lamp portion 26 includes an upper frame lamp substrate 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front upper part of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).
The upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally long shape from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a. All of these eight LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Specifically, similarly to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 of the twenty-third embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting elements in the upper frame lamp substrate 26a. The white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

The upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the front upper portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the right frame lamp portion 27 includes a right frame lamp substrate 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right-frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the right-frame lamp section 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the right frame lamp substrate 27a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is white like the upper frame lamp substrate 26a.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and is attached to the front right portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is irradiated to the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the left frame lamp portion 28 includes a left frame lamp substrate 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate 28a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is white like the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the right frame lamp substrate 27a.

The left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12, and is made of colorless translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is irradiated to the left frame lamp cover 28b.

Then, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed from a colorless and translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp is The appearance of the upper frame lamp portion 26, the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 is improved by forming the entire mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the substrate 26a, the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and the left frame lamp substrate 28a in white. While preventing deterioration, the color development of the light-emitting element can be seen clearly.

Also, although not shown, the front right portion of the front door 12 is provided with a right frame board mounting portion to which the right frame lamp board 27a is mounted and a right frame cover mounting portion to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is mounted. .
Further, the right-frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right-frame lamp board 27a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the right-frame board mounting portion in the short direction. It is As a result, the right frame board mounting portion is covered with the right frame lamp board 27a.

The entire surface of the right-frame lamp board 27a on which the light-emitting elements are mounted is white. The entire mounting surface of can be made to function as a reflector, thereby making it possible to make the color development of the light emitting element look beautiful.

Similarly, the front left portion of the front door 12 is provided with a left frame board mounting portion to which the left frame lamp board 28a is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is mounted.
The left-frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left-frame lamp board 28a in the short direction is substantially the same as the width of the left-frame board mounting portion in the short direction. It is As a result, the left frame board mounting portion is covered with the left frame lamp board 28a. The entire surface of the left-frame lamp substrate 28a on which the light-emitting elements are mounted is made to function as a reflector so that the colors of the light-emitting elements can be clearly seen.

Further, as in the case where the game machine is the pachinko game machine 500, the right frame lamp board 27a has a positioning boss inserted when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion. A mounting hole and a fixing hole used for fixing (screwing) the right-frame lamp board 27a to the right-frame board mounting portion are provided adjacent to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. As a result, the positioning hole and the fixing hole are not mistaken, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly.

Further, the positioning boss has a protrusion that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss protrudes from the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a protrusion. This projecting portion is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protruding portion formed in a convex curved shape, so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, as in the case where the game machine is the pachinko game machine 500, when fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part, the right frame board mounting part is mounted from the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a. and secure it with a screw. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Furthermore, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.
As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the screw head so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine beautifully.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 27a in the right frame lamp cover 27b. The lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b can be reduced, and the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
The upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 has the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 .
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are connected with a harness so that information (commands) necessary for outputting effects can be transmitted in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. there is

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80, the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by harnesses.
Then, the sub-control board 80 determines the content of the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50, and controls to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Also, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Then, when this signal is input to the main control board 50, the combination lottery means 61 obtains a random number value and draws a winning number based on the obtained random number value. All motors 32 are driven and controlled to rotate all reels 31 .

After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61. , the rotation of the reel 31 associated with the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. At this time, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line, that winning combination is won, and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Also, when a lottery is drawn by the role lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 is mounted on the upper-frame lamp board 26a, the right-frame lamp board 27a, and the left-frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Controls the light emission of the device.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a command (special combination command) to that effect to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special combination command, the sub-control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the special combination. light up.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the special combination has been won.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, by causing the light-emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors when the special role is won, the color development of the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
When winning a special role, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and all the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may be made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. It can be made to emit light.

Further, when a special role is won, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role, and are mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. The light-emitting element may be made to emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.

Further, as described above, the door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, and the signal is input to the main control board 50. . Then, when the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (door open command) to the sub control board 80 .
Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. Thus, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the store clerk in the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is open.
When the front door 12 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.
Also, when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the front door 12 is open.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, one game is started, all the reels 31 are stopped, and processing such as payout of medals is performed. At times, a game may end.
Furthermore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 does not win, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (non-winning command) to the sub control board 80 .

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a non-win command, it executes a drawing for the effect pattern at the time of non-win (lottery for selecting either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
Then, the sub-control board 80 causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a mode according to the result of the production pattern lottery, and displays Control is performed so that the red LED mounted on the substrate provided in the decoration around the window emits light.

FIGS. 132(a) and (b) show production patterns when the combination lottery means 61 does not win, and (a) is a time chart showing production pattern 1 at the time of non-winning, (b) is a time chart showing effect pattern 2 at the time of non-winning.
In FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), "LED1" indicates an LED mounted on the right lamp board 27a, and "LED2" indicates an LED mounted on the upper lamp board 26a.
In addition, in FIGS. 132(a) and (b), “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on the board provided with the decoration around the display window, and “LED4” indicates the decoration provided around the display window. Figure 3 shows another red LED mounted on the board. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board provided for the decoration around the display window is green.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), "reel rotation start" indicates when the reel 31 starts rotating. "First stop operation" indicates when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). "Second stop operation" indicates when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). "Third stop operation" indicates when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). "Payout" indicates the time of processing such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in a game in which the role lottery means 61 has not been won, when the production pattern lottery determines the production pattern 1, LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a ) is turned on (turned on) when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and turns off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed.
Also, in effect pattern 1, LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is lit after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation. do. Moreover, LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in the production pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) is lit after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the first stop operation. .
Furthermore, in effect pattern 1, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. Therefore, the light is extinguished before the second stop operation. Also, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time. Furthermore, the LED4 is turned off at the same time when the LED2 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), in a game in which the role lottery means 61 has not been won, when the production pattern lottery determines the production pattern 2, LED1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a ) lights up (turns on) when the reel 31 starts to rotate, and turns off (turns off) when the second stop operation is performed, in the same way as when effect pattern 1 is determined.
Also, in the effect pattern 2, the LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and goes out at the second stop operation. . Also, LED1 and LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, in effect pattern 2, LED4 (the other red LED around the display window) is turned on after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, similarly to when effect pattern 1 is determined. , and turns off after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. Also, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time.

In this way, in the game in which the role lottery means 61 does not win, either the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined by the performance pattern lottery, and the light emission of the LEDs 1 to 4 is controlled according to the determined performance pattern. .
The LED 1 lights up when the reels 31 start rotating and goes out when the second stop operation is performed in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2 .
As for the LED 2, in the effect pattern 1, it lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off in the second stop operation, but does not light up in the effect pattern 2. - 特許庁

Furthermore, with effect pattern 1, LED 3 is lit after the start of rotation of reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the first stop operation. It lights up after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and goes out during the second stop operation.
Furthermore, in both of the production pattern 1 and the production pattern 2, the LED 4 is lit after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. It goes out before the second stop operation.

As described above, the average value of the lighting time of LED1 in the game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 is not won is set longer than the average value of the lighting time of LED2 to LED4 in the game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 fails to win. It is
Since the entire LED mounting surface of the right-frame lamp substrate 27a is white, and the right-frame lamp cover 27b is made of colorless and translucent resin, the LEDs 1 (right-frame lamp substrate Since the light emission of the LED mounted on the 27a can be displayed beautifully, even in a game in which the winning lottery means 61 is not won, a beautiful performance using the LED 1 can be displayed.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 5.
00, the setting change state and setting confirmation state are controlled by causing the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the like to emit white light in the setting change state and setting confirmation state. You can inform the hall clerk of that.
In the slot machine 10, the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off (power off state), and when the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 .
Also, in the setting change state, the set value is updated ("+1") each time the setting change switch is operated (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
When the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state (“Yes” in step S242 of FIG. 38), the setting value is confirmed, and when the setting key switch is turned off (“Yes” in step S243 of FIG. 38), The configuration change state ends.

When the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the slot machine 10 shifts to the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, in the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 although the setting value cannot be changed. This makes it possible to check the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command (setting change start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting change state.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, while the setting change state continues (during execution of the setting change process in FIG. 39), the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that it has shifted to the setting confirmation state.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
Thus, while the setting confirmation state continues, the light emitting element continues to emit white light, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a emit white light, thereby indicating that the hall is controlled in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can let the dealer know.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

When the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled to blink the light emitting element, the light emitting element is flashed when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change is performed. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different between when it is controlled to the state or the setting confirmation state.

Also, in the case where the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp substrate 26a and the like are switched to the white color when the power is restored from power-off. By emitting light at , it is possible to notify the staff in the hall that the power is being restored.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (at the time of power-off), the main control board 50 executes power-off processing shown in FIG.

Also, when the power is turned on (when recovering from power-off), the main control board 50 executes the power recovery process shown in FIG.
Furthermore, when starting the power restoration process, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (power restoration start command) to the sub-control board 80 .
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power restoration start command, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Further, when the main control board 50 ends the power restoration process, it transmits a command to that effect (power restoration end command) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light-emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power restoration process of FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power restoration process of FIG. 40 ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by causing the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp substrates such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a to emit white light during the execution of the power restoration process, it is possible to notify the staff in the hall that the power restoration process is being executed. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless translucent resin, and the entire surface of the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted is white. Therefore, if the light-emitting element emits white light, it will be conspicuous, so that the hall clerk can easily notice that the power restoration process is being executed.
During execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates may emit white light. Therefore, only the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or all the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards may emit white light. good too.

Further, during execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during the execution of the power restoration process, the front door 12 is opened. The flashing pattern of the light-emitting element can be made different between when the power supply is on, when it is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and when the power restoration process is being executed.

(12) In the 23rd embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, and in the modified example (11) the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to these.
For example, in a parrot as a game machine, a sealed game machine (medalless game machine), and a casino machine, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate provided in the decorative lamp part is configured in white, and the decorative lamp part is provided with By forming the lamp cover with a colorless or white translucent resin, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
“Parrot” is a slot machine that uses game balls as game media.

(13) The first to twenty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

<24th Embodiment>
The technical terms used in the twenty-fourth embodiment have the following meanings.
(1) Light diffusivity There is no definition stipulated by "ISO 80000-1" (JIS Z 8000-1) or the like for "light diffusivity". However, the light diffusion level is commonly expressed as "Haze". Therefore, the "light diffusivity" in the present invention is equivalent to (synonymous with) haze.

"Haze" is defined by "JIS K 7136", for example. "JIS
K 7136” defines haze of transmitted light as “the percentage of transmitted light that passes through a specimen and deviates from the incident light by 0.044 rad (2.5°) or more due to forward scattering.” is doing.
Therefore, the "light diffusivity" in the present invention is "0" from the incident optical axis, out of all transmitted light emitted from the light emitting element and transmitted through the light diffusing portions (light diffusing portions 615e, 670a, etc., which will be described later). It can be defined as the fraction of transmitted light deviated by more than 0.044 rad (2.5°).

Let "Tt" be the transmittance (total light transmittance) of the total transmitted light that passes through the test piece, and of the transmitted light that passes through the test piece, "0.044 rad (2.5°)" or more from the incident optical axis Assuming that the transmittance (diffused transmittance) of transmitted light is "Td", the haze can be expressed by the following formula.
Haze = (Td/Tt) x 100
The higher the haze value, the higher the light diffusion rate. As the light diffusing rate of the light diffusing portion increases, the opposite side viewed through the light diffusing portion appears cloudy.

The intensity of the transmitted light is measured in the range of "-90°" to "+90°", and the intensity of the transmitted light is half the intensity of the transmitted light at "0°". It is also known to measure angles (half-value angles). Further, the larger the half-value angle, the higher the light diffusion performance (in other words, the light diffusion rate). Therefore, the "light diffusivity" is not limited to the haze described above, and can be determined by the half-value angle of transmitted light.

(2) Luminance As a measure of brightness, there are "luminance", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance".
"Luminance" is an index indicating the intensity of light emitted from a light source toward an observer, and the unit is "cd (candela)/m ² ".
"Luminous intensity" is an index indicating the solid angle density of a luminous flux, and "cd" is used as a unit.
Furthermore, "illuminance" is an index indicating the amount of light flux incident per unit area of the light flux radiated from the light source to the plane body, and the unit is "lx (lux)" or "lm (lumen)". /m ² ” is used.

The luminous intensity is obtained by dividing the luminous flux by the unit solid angle, the illuminance is obtained by dividing the luminous flux by the unit area irradiated with the luminous flux, and the luminance is obtained by dividing the luminous intensity by the unit area irradiated.
Therefore, the amount of light, brightness, or intensity of light can be expressed using any of luminance, luminous intensity, and illuminance.
Therefore, the "brightness adjusting means 546" in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) described later may be referred to as "brightness adjusting means 546", or may be referred to as "illuminance adjusting means 546".
Also, the "brightness adjusting means 92" in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), which will be described later, may be referred to as "brightness adjusting means 92", or may be referred to as "illuminance adjusting means 92".
Similarly, the "brightness adjustment mode" can also be called "brightness adjustment mode" or "brightness adjustment mode".

The twenty-fourth embodiment relates to a title display portion of a gaming machine.
Hereinafter, the title display portion will be described for a case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (24th embodiment (A)) and a case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (24th embodiment (B)). .

<Twenty-Fourth Embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
The description of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) partially overlaps with the description of the nineteenth embodiment (B) and the twenty-third embodiment, but will be described again.
FIG. 133 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), and FIG. 135 is a block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

As shown in FIG. 133, the pachinko game machine 500 includes a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 133, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 , and a title display portion 615 as an effect lamp 541 is provided on the upper front portion of the game board 504 .
Furthermore, a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504 and below the title display portion 615 . A starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 are provided in this game area.
Furthermore, a glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502 so as to cover the front surface of the game board 504 . As a result, the title display portion 615 provided on the front surface of the game board 504 and the game area are covered with the glass door 505 .

Two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel at the center of the glass door 505 with a predetermined gap therebetween.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 , the glass plate is positioned in front of the game board 504 . As a result, the player can view the title display portion 615 provided on the front surface of the game board 504 and the game area through the glass plate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 .
Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper tray 506, a lower tray 507, a firing handle 508, a selection switch 544, an effect switch 545, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, a right frame lamp portion 620 as a production lamp 541 is provided on the front right portion of the glass door 505, and a left frame lamp portion 620 as the production lamp 541 is provided on the front left portion of the glass door 505. A ramp portion 630 is provided.
The right frame lamp portion 620 is a vertically elongated production lamp 541 extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp portion 630 extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left portion of the glass door 505. It is a vertically elongated production lamp 541 reaching up to.
In addition, the peripheral edge portion of the game board 504 on the front surface of the glass door 505, the peripheral edge portion of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 on the front surface of the glass door 505, and the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 Each part is given a different color.

Also, the title display portion 615 is an effect lamp 541 that emits light in the form of letters, symbols, or the like. Specifically, the title display portion 615 emits light in the form of characters, symbols, etc. indicating the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 500, for example.
Furthermore, the title display portion 615 is located between the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 (left side of the right frame lamp portion 620 and right side of the left frame lamp portion 630). It is provided above the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the player views the pachinko gaming machine 500 from the front, the title display portion 615 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the right-frame lamp section 620 includes a right-frame lamp substrate 621 and a right-frame lamp cover 622 .
The right-frame lamp board 621 is mounted with a light-emitting element (also referred to as “light-emitting means”) for causing the right-frame lamp section 620 to emit light, and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected. It is a lamp substrate and is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

Also, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
The full-color LED has three LEDs that emit red light, an LED that emits green light, and an LED that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three LEDs, it is possible to express full color. be.
In other words, it has three light-emitting elements that emit red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the outputs of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full-color LED.

The right-frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right-frame lamp board 621 and is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505 .
The right frame lamp cover 622 is formed in a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the glass door 505, and is made of translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right-frame lamp cover 622 covers the mounting surface of the right-frame lamp substrate 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted. Therefore, the right frame lamp cover 622 is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 621 . As a result, when the light-emitting element mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 621 emits light, the right-frame lamp cover 622 appears to glow.

A lens portion 670 is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 621 in the right frame lamp cover 622 . Furthermore, the inner surface of the lens portion 670 (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 621 side) is provided with a texturing portion 670b. Further, the texturing portion 670b is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 when the lens portion 670 is injection molded. Further, as the uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 670b, for example, a pattern provided with a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern provided with a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions, a pattern provided with a large number of hemispherical protrusions, or a stripe pattern. A pattern or the like having a large number of shaped protrusions can be used.

The texturing portion 670b provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 functions as a light diffusion portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element.
Thus, by providing the texturing portion 670b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 and functioning the texturing portion 670b as the light diffusion portion 670a, the LED can be made inconspicuous, and the entire lens portion 670 can be can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.

It should be noted that the light diffusing portion 670a is not limited to being formed by providing the texturing portion 670b on the inner surface of the lens portion 670 .
For example, the light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by providing the texturing portion 670b on the outer surface of the lens portion 670 (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp substrate 621). Further, for example, the light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by providing texturing portions 670b on both the inner surface and the outer surface of the lens portion 670 .

Further, for example, the light diffusing portion 670 a may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent for diffusing light into the resin forming the lens portion 670 . Examples of the light diffusing agent include silicon fine particles, acrylic fine particles, titanium oxide fine particles, calcium carbonate fine particles, and the like. Furthermore, for example, by varying the content of the light diffusing agent, the light diffusivity can be varied. That is, the content of the light diffusing agent can be increased to increase the light diffusivity, or conversely, the content of the light diffusing agent can be decreased to decrease the light diffusivity.
Furthermore, for example, a light diffusion sheet (also referred to as a “light diffusion film”) that diffuses light may be placed between the light emitting element and the lens portion 670 to form the light diffusion portion 670a. As the light diffusion sheet, for example, a resin sheet into which the above light diffusion agent is kneaded, a resin sheet having fine unevenness on the surface, and the like can be mentioned.

The light diffusing portion 670a may be formed by a combination of the texturing portion 670b and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the texturing portion 670b and a light diffusion sheet. It may be formed by a combination of a diffusing agent and a light diffusing sheet, or may be formed by a combination of texturing portions 670b, a light diffusing agent, and a light diffusing sheet.

Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the left-frame lamp section 630 includes a left-frame lamp substrate 631 and a left-frame lamp cover 632 . A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 631, and the left frame lamp cover 632 is provided with a lens portion 670 that guides light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp substrate 631 to the front side. The inner surface of the portion 670 is provided with a texturing portion 670b that functions as a light diffusion portion 670a that diffuses the light emitted from the LED. The left frame lamp portion 630 and the right frame lamp portion 620 are formed symmetrically.
Also in the left frame lamp portion 630, by providing a texturing portion 670b functioning as a light diffusion portion 670a on the inner surface of the lens portion 670, the LED is made inconspicuous, and the entire lens portion 670 shines uniformly. In addition, the player is prevented from feeling dazzling.

Also, as shown in FIG. 134, the title display portion 615 includes a title display base 615c, a title display substrate 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens portion 615d, and a title display cover 615b.
The title display base 615 c is a member that serves as the base of the title display portion 615 . A title display substrate 615a, a light diffusion sheet 615g, a lens portion 615d, and a title display cover 615b are attached to the front side of the title display base 615c to form a title display portion 615. FIG.

The title display substrate 615a is a lamp substrate on which a light-emitting element for causing the title display portion 615 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted.
FIG. 134 shows part of the title display board 615a, and LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the front surface thereof. In this way, LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements are mounted on the front surface of the title display board 615a. Moreover, all of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display substrate 615a is white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white).
As a result, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, the appearance of the title display portion 615 can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, since the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j can be efficiently reflected toward the title display cover 615b, the title display cover 615b can be made to appear brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 641a to 641j can be seen clearly.

In addition, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, "generally white" is a concept including "white". Also, "substantially white" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely white but appear to be white.
Furthermore, "similar color" is a concept that does not include the target color, but includes colors in the vicinity of the target color. Therefore, "an analogous color" to white is a concept that does not include white but includes colors near white.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129 of the twenty-third embodiment, the x-axis ranges from 0.3 to 0.4 and the y-axis ranges from 0.3 to 0.4. , since it is a range that is recognized as white by general players, it can be set as a range of "similar colors" to white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the title display substrate 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with screws 683a-683b.
Furthermore, when the title display board 615a is fixed to the title display base 615c with the screws 683a to 683b, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are exposed on the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display board 615a. . In this state, the height of the screw heads 689a-689b of the screws 683a-683b is set larger (higher) than the height of the LEDs 641a-641j when the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a-641j on the title display board 615a is used as a reference.
That is, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are set higher than the LEDs 641a to 641j from the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j on the title display board 615a.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b show light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j. The surface is treated to reflect
Specifically, silver plating is applied as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j. Silver plating includes silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw heads 689a-689b of the screws 683a-683b is set larger than the height of the LEDs 641a-641j with reference to the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a-641j. Moreover, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b are formed into convex curved surfaces. Furthermore, the surfaces of the screw heads 689a-689b of the screws 683a-683b are subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs 641a-641j to be reflected by the screw heads 689a-689b of the screws 683a-683b. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689b of the screws 683a to 683b can be made to appear to shine like light-emitting elements, so that the title display portion 615 can appear to shine more brightly.

The light diffusion sheet 615g is for diffusing light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display substrate 615a. That is, the light diffusion sheet 615g functions as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements. Also, as shown in FIG. 134, the light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display substrate 615a. Furthermore, the light diffusing sheet 615g is composed of a resin sheet into which a light diffusing agent is kneaded, a resin sheet having fine unevenness on the surface, or the like.

The lens portion 615d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j mounted on the title display substrate 615a to the title display cover 615b, and is made of translucent resin. As shown in FIG. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display substrate 615a, and a lens portion 615d is arranged in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 134, a texturing portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. The texturing portion 615f functions together with the light diffusion sheet 615g as a light diffusion portion 615e for diffusing light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j as light emitting elements. The texturing portion 615f is formed by providing a fine uneven pattern on the front surface of the lens portion 615d during injection molding of the lens portion 615d. Further, as the uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 615f, a pattern having a large number of streak-like protrusions is formed as shown in the enlarged view of the B portion in FIG.
The uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 615f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of streak-like protrusions. , a pattern having a large number of hemispherical projections, or the like.

The title display cover 615b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 615a. As shown in FIG. 134, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged in front of the title display substrate 615a, a lens portion 615d is arranged in front of the light diffusion sheet 615g, and the title display substrate 615a, the light diffusion sheet 615g, A title display cover 615b is attached so as to cover the lens portion 615d.
Also, the title display cover 615b is provided with characters, symbols, etc., and these characters, symbols, etc. emit light. Specifically, the portions of the title display cover 615b, such as characters and symbols, are made of translucent resin, and the portions other than the characters and symbols are made of non-translucent resin. . As a result, the title display cover 615b emits light in the form of characters, symbols, or the like.

As described above, in this embodiment, the light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged between the title display substrate 615a and the lens portion 615d, and the texturing portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. The light diffusion sheet 615g and the texturing portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d function as a light diffusion portion 615e that diffuses the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641j.
As a result, the LEDs 641a to 641j can be made inconspicuous, and the characters, symbols, etc. attached to the title display cover 615b can be made to shine uniformly, and further, the player is dazzled. You can try not to feel

The light diffusing portion 615e may be formed by kneading the above-described light diffusing agent into the resin forming the lens portion 615d.
Alternatively, the light diffusing portion 615e may be formed by the light diffusing sheet 615g, the texturing portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d, and the light diffusing agent kneaded into the resin forming the lens portion 615d.
Furthermore, without providing the light diffusing sheet 615g, the light diffusing part 615e may be formed by the texturing part 615f on the front surface of the lens part 615d and the light diffusing agent kneaded into the resin constituting the lens part 615d.
Further, the light diffusion portion 615e may be formed by the light diffusion sheet 615g and a light diffusion agent kneaded into the resin forming the lens portion 615d without providing the texturing portion 615f on the front surface of the lens portion 615d.

Further, in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630, a texturing portion 670b is provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 670, and the texturing portion 670b functions as a light diffusion portion 670a.
Further, in the title display portion 615, a light diffusion sheet 615g is arranged between the title display substrate 615a and the lens portion 615d, and a texturing portion 615f is provided on the front surface of the lens portion 615d. A texturing portion 615f on the front surface of 615d functions as a light diffusion portion 615e.

The light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615 e in the title display portion 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 670 a in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 . That is, the title display portion 615 scatters the light emitted from the light emitting elements more easily than the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
As a result, compared to the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630, the LEDs of the title display portion 615 can be made less conspicuous, and the LEDs can be seen to shine evenly. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that it is dazzling.

Further, as described above, the title display portion 615 is provided between the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 and above the center of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the height direction. When a player views the pachinko gaming machine 500 from the front, the title display portion 615 is positioned slightly above the line of sight of the player. Therefore, the light emitted from the title display portion 615 is more likely to be seen by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp portion 620 or the left frame lamp portion 630 .
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615e in the title display portion 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 670a in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. This makes it difficult for the player to feel that it is dazzling.

Characters, symbols, and the like are displayed in the title display portion 615. If the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615e in the title display portion 615 is low, the LEDs stand out, and the characters, symbols, and the like are not uniform. The light cannot be seen, or the player feels dazzling. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize characters, symbols, and the like.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615e in the title display portion 615 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 670a in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. The LED is made inconspicuous, the characters, symbols, etc. are made to appear to shine uniformly, and furthermore, the player is made to not feel dazzling, so that the player can easily recognize the characters, symbols, etc. .

Also, the distance from the title display substrate 615a and the LEDs 641a to 641j to the lens portion 615d in the title display portion 615 is set shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the LEDs to the lens portion 670 in the right frame lamp portion 620. .
As described above, the title display portion 615 is provided on the upper front portion of the game board 504, and the glass door 505 is attached so as to cover them. That is, the title display portion 615 is provided on the back side of the glass door 505 so that the player can visually recognize the title display portion 615 through the glass door 505 .

Therefore, since the glass door 505 is arranged in front of the title display portion 615, the distance from the title display substrate 615a and the LEDs 641a to 641j to the lens portion 615d cannot be increased.
Therefore, in the title display portion 615, the light diffusion sheet 615g and the texturing portion 615f constitute the light diffusion portion 615e, thereby making the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615e relatively high and making the LED inconspicuous. In addition, the characters, symbols, etc. are made to appear to shine uniformly, and the player is less likely to feel that they are dazzling.

On the other hand, the right frame lamp portion 620 is provided on the front right portion of the glass door 505, and no other structure is provided in front of the right frame lamp portion 620 (on the player side).
Therefore, in the right frame lamp portion 620, the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the LED to the lens portion 670 can be relatively long.
Specifically, in the title display portion 615, the maximum distance from the title display substrate 615a to the lens portion 615d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LEDs 641a to 641j is defined as the distance "M1".
In the right-frame lamp portion 620, the maximum distance from the right-frame lamp substrate 621 to the lens portion 670 in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LED is defined as the distance "M2".
The distance "M1" is set shorter than the distance "M2". That is, the distance "M2" is set longer than the distance "M1".

Thus, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 621 and the LED in the right frame lamp portion 620 to the lens portion 670 longer than the distance from the title display substrate 615a and the LED in the title display portion 615 to the lens portion 615d, Even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 670a in the right frame lamp section 620 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section 615e in the title display section 615, the player does not feel dazzled.
For the left frame lamp portion 630, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 620, the distance from the left frame lamp substrate 631 and LED to the lens portion 670 is set longer than the distance from the title display substrate 615a and LED to the lens portion 615d. ing.

In the title display portion 615, the title display substrate 615a is formed in a flat plate shape. The distance to portion 615d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp portion 620, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens portion 670 has a curved portion, an inclined portion, and the like. The distance from the substrate 615a to the lens portion 670 is not constant.
Therefore, the distance is compared between the portion where the distance from the title display substrate 615a to the lens portion 615d is the maximum and the portion where the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 621 to the lens portion 670 is the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 135 , the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a power board 510 , a payout control board 520 , a main control board 530 and a sub control board 540 .
The power board 510 is a board that controls the supply of power based on turning on the power switch 511 , and the payout control board 520 is a board that controls the operation of the payout device 524 .
Further, the main control board 530 is a board for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 540 is a board for controlling the output of effects. All of these control boards are harness-connected.

Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 respectively include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like.
Furthermore, the main control board 530 is electrically connected to a starting switch 533 and a special symbol display device 531 .
Further, the main control board 530 includes lottery means 555 , symbol control means 556 , and reservation means 557 .

The game area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports, and a starting port switch 533 for detecting the winning of the starting port 532 is provided.
In addition, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the lottery result based on the random number value obtained with the winning of the starting port 532 as a variation display and a stop display of the symbols. .

Furthermore, the lottery means 555 is a means for performing a lottery based on the random number obtained with the winning of the starting port 532 as a trigger.
Further, the symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling variable display and stop display of symbols in the special symbol display device 531 based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means 555 .
In addition, the holding means 556 is a means for holding a random number value obtained by winning a prize at the starting port 532 until starting the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number value.

When the game ball enters the starting port 532 and the starting port switch 533 is turned on (detects the winning of the starting port 532), the main control board 530 acquires a random value. Based on the obtained random number, the lottery means 555 performs a jackpot lottery (a lottery for a big win or a loser), a special symbol lottery (a lottery for a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 531 (stopped symbol)), and a variable A pattern lottery (lottery for the time (fluctuation time) for the special pattern display device 531 to variably display the pattern) is executed. Based on this lottery result, the symbol control means 557 controls the variable display and stop display of symbols in the special symbol display device 531 .

The sub control board 540 is electrically connected to the main control board 530, determines the content of the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. is the substrate.
As shown in FIG. 135, the sub-control board 540 includes a selection switch 544, an effect switch 545, an effect lamp 541 (a title display portion 615, a right frame lamp portion 620, and a left frame lamp portion 630), a speaker 542, and an image display. Device 543 is electrically connected.
In addition, the sub-control board 540 includes a brightness adjustment means 546 and a light emission control means 547 .

The selection switch 544 and the production switch 545 are switches used for production and the like, and are switches operated when the player displays predetermined information or makes various settings.
The selection switch 544 also includes an up switch 544a, a down switch 544b, a right switch 544c, and a left switch 544d.

The title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 as the production lamp 541 are lamps used for production, etc., and light or blink in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. It is a thing.
Also, the speaker 542 is used for presentation and the like, and outputs a predetermined sound effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
Furthermore, the image display device 543 is used for effects and the like, and displays the result of the lottery by the lottery means 555 and the like by means of an image.

The luminance adjusting means 546 adjusts the luminance of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630. The light emission control means 547 controls the title display portion 615, the right frame It controls the light emission of the light emitting elements of the lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
The sub-control board 540, the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are harness-connected. Luminance adjusting means 546 adjusts the luminance of LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards, and light emission control means 547 controls light emission of LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When the lottery means 555 executes the lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the result of the lottery to the sub-control board 540 . Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the result of the lottery, the sub-control board 540 determines the contents of the effect based on the command, and according to the determined contents of the effect, the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp. It controls the unit 630 , the speaker 542 and the image display device 543 .

Specifically, when the main control board 530 wins a big win in a big win lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a big win command to the sub control board 540 indicating that the big win has been won.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot.
Also, as a pattern corresponding to the big win, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot. In particular, since the title display section 615 is arranged at a position slightly above the line of sight of the player, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot.

In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, it determines the content of the performance corresponding to the jackpot, and according to the determined content of the performance, the title display unit 615, the right frame lamp unit 620, the left frame lamp unit 630, and the speaker. 542 and an image display device 543 are controlled.
In this case, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to emit light when causing the light emitting elements of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a big win. is controlled to be shorter than the time during which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 emit light.

For example, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a big win. The light emitting element 630 is controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting element of the title display portion 615 is controlled to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display portion 615 is arranged slightly above the line of sight of the player, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements of the title display portion 615 easily catches the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light emitting element of the title display portion 615 emits light for a long time, the player is likely to feel dazzled.

In particular, when executing an effect corresponding to a big win, the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 are made to emit flashy light, so the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 are lengthened. The player feels dazzling when the light is emitted for a certain period of time.
Therefore, when performing a performance corresponding to a big win, the light emitting element of the title display part 615 is made shorter than the light emitting element of the right frame lamp part 620 and the left frame lamp part 630. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the light is dazzling.

The time for which the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 are made to emit light is shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are made to emit light only when executing an effect corresponding to a big win. do not have.
For example, even when executing an effect corresponding to a high-probability state (probability-variable state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot lottery is higher than that of a normal game, the time during which the light-emitting elements of the title display portion 615 are caused to emit light is set to the right-frame lamp portion. 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 can be made shorter than the time during which the light emitting elements emit light.

In addition, when the big win lottery results in a big win and the sub-control board 540 receives the big win command, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 to be the big win. It may also flash in a corresponding pattern. At this time, the light emission control means 547 controls the time for blinking the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to be shorter than the time for blinking the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
For example, when the light emission control means 547 blinks the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 in a pattern corresponding to a big win, the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion The light emitting element 630 is controlled to blink for 10 seconds, and the light emitting element of the title display portion 615 is controlled to blink for 7 seconds.

In addition, "blinking" means that the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on and off.
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which the light emitting element is lit for 1 second and turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which the light emitting element is lit for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern for which the light emitting element is lit for 1 second and turned off for 2 seconds. Examples include a pattern in which turning off the light for 2 seconds is repeated, and a pattern in which the light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 500, for example, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 and the ON state of the starting port switch 533 is detected, one game starts and the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 ends. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one game can be finished. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without the next game being started after the last game is finished, the sub-control board 540 enters the game standby state. can be controlled to shift to

Further, when shifting to the game standby state, the sub-control means 540 displays a demonstration screen on the image display device 543 .
In the game standby state, the light emission control means 547 makes the light emitting element of the title display portion 615 emit light longer than the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. Control.

As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 500 can be easily conspicuous, and the player can be guided to play a game with the pachinko gaming machine 500 .
In addition, the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 500 is in the game standby state can be visually recognized even from a distance by the player or the hall clerk, and the fact that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is on can be confirmed by the player or the hall. store clerk can instantly confirm.
Furthermore, the power consumption of the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 is set larger than that of the title display portion 615 . Therefore, in the game standby state, the light-emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are made shorter than the light-emitting elements of the title display section 615, thereby increasing the power saving effect. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the payout control board 520 is electrically connected to a door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 . The door open switch 522 is a switch for detecting opening of the glass door 505, and the frame open switch 523 is a switch for detecting opening of the front frame 502.
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on and a door open error occurs. Also, a door open signal indicating ON of the door open switch 522 is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a door opening command indicating that the door opening switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the door open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting element of the title display section 615 to turn off.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame open switch 523 is turned on, resulting in a frame open error. Also, a frame open signal indicating that the frame open switch 523 is turned on is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530 . When detecting that the frame open switch 523 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a frame open command indicating that the frame open switch 523 is turned on to the sub control board 540 .
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the frame open command, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting elements of the title display section 615 to be extinguished in the same manner as when the door open command is received.

Since the title display portion 615 is provided between the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 and above the center of the pachinko game machine 500 in the height direction, the title display portion 615 is conspicuous. By turning off the light-emitting element of the part 615, it is possible to make the player and the pachinko hall clerk aware that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 500 (it is not in a normal state).
It should be noted that turning off the light emitting element of the title display portion 615 is not limited to when a door open error or a frame open error occurs. For example, the light-emitting element of the title display section 615 can be extinguished when the payout device 524 has an abnormal payout error or when the set value has an incorrect set value error.

Further, after the last game is finished, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without the next game being started, and then the selection switches 544 (up switch 544a, down switch 544b, When the right direction switch 544c or left direction switch 544d) is operated, the sub control board 540 displays the menu screen shown in FIG. 136(1) on the image display device 543. FIG.
Similarly, when the game standby state is entered and the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 543, the selection switch 544 (the upward switch 544a, the downward switch 544b, the rightward switch 544c, or the leftward switch 544d is pressed). ) is operated, the sub-control board 540 displays the menu screen shown in FIG. 136(1) on the image display device 543 .

Further, when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 543, by operating the upward switch 544a or the downward switch 544b of the selection switch 544, the "volume adjustment mode" or "brightness adjustment mode" can be selected. Become.
When the effect switch 545 is operated while the "brightness adjustment mode" is selected, the sub-control board 540 shifts to the brightness adjustment mode, and causes the image display device 543 to perform the brightness adjustment shown in FIG. 136(2). Display the mode screen.

In the brightness adjustment mode, the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 can be adjusted.
As shown in FIG. 136(2), in this embodiment, in the brightness adjustment mode, the title display substrate 615a, the right frame lamp substrate 621, and the left frame lamp substrate are displayed in five stages from "level 1" to "level 5". The brightness of the LEDs mounted on 631 can be adjusted.

When the screen of the brightness adjustment mode is displayed on the image display device 543, any one of "level 1" to "level 5" can be selected by operating the right direction switch 544c or the left direction switch 544d of the selection switch 544. selectable.
Then, when the effect switch 545 is operated with any level selected, the sub-control board 540 determines the luminance at that level. At this time, the brightness adjusting means 546 controls the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 615a, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 so as to correspond to the determined level.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between each level of “level 1” to “level 5” and the brightness of each LED of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630. FIG.
In FIG. 137, the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 when set to "level 5" is set to "100", which is used as the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 137 indicates a value with respect to the reference value “100”, and does not indicate a candela per square meter (cd/m ² ).

As shown in FIG. 137, the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is "100" at maximum and "20" at minimum. On the other hand, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is "80" at maximum and "16" at minimum.
In addition, at any level from "level 1" to "level 5", the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is "20%" lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. is set to

Furthermore, when changing from "level 5" to "level 4", the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "80", which is a decrease of "20%". Similarly, when the level is changed from "level 5" to "level 4", the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "80" to "64", which is a decrease of "20%".

Further, when the level is changed from "level 5" to "level 3", the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "100" to "60", which is a decrease of "40%". Similarly, when changing from "level 5" to "level 3", the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 changes from "80" to "48", which is a decrease of "40%".
Also, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 changes from "80" to "40", which is a decrease of "50%". Similarly, when changing from "level 4" to "level 2", the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 changes from "64" to "32", which is a decrease of "50%".

Thus, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display portion 615 is set to be darker than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
The luminance adjusting means 546 is configured to change the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 and the luminance of the LED of the title display portion 615 at the same change rate.
Note that the brightness of each LED of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 at each level of "level 1" to "level 5" is not limited to the values shown in FIG. . Further, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five stages of "level 1" to "level 5".

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness adjusting means 546 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 615 at the same rate of change. , but it is not limited to this.
FIG. 138 shows the levels of “level 1” to “level 5” and the LEDs of the title display section 615, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 in the modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the relationship with a brightness|luminance.

In FIG. 138, similarly to FIG. 137, the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 when set to "level 5" is set to "100", which is used as the reference value. Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 138 also indicates a value with respect to the reference value “100”, and does not indicate a candela per square meter (cd/m ² ).

As shown in FIG. 138, the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is "100" at maximum and "20" at minimum. On the other hand, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is "80" at maximum and "12" at minimum.
At “level 5”, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is set to a value “20%” lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
At “level 4”, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is set to a value “25%” lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
At “level 3”, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is set to a value about “27%” lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .

At “level 2”, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is set to a value “30%” lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
At “level 1”, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is set to a value “40%” lower than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
In this way, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display portion 615 is set to a lower value than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. is set to be large.

Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 4", the luminance changes from "100" to "80", which is a decrease of "20%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 4", it changes from "80" to "60", which is a decrease of "25%".
Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 3", the luminance changes from "100" to "60", which is a decrease of "40%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 3", it changes from "80" to "44", which is a decrease of "45%".

Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 2", the luminance changes from "100" to "40", which is a decrease of "60%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 2", it changes from "80" to "28", which is a decrease of "65%".
Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 1", the luminance changes from "100" to "20", which is a decrease of "80%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 1", it changes from "80" to "12", which is a decrease of "85%".

Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 4" to "level 2", the luminance changes from "80" to "40", which is a decrease of "50%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 4" to "level 2", it changes from "60" to "28", which is a decrease of about "53%".
Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 4" to "level 1", the luminance changes from "80" to "20", which is a decrease of "75%".
On the other hand, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 4" to "level 1", the brightness changes from "60" to "12", which is a decrease of "80%".

Thus, the brightness of the LEDs of the title display portion 615 is set to be darker than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
In addition, when changing the luminance of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630, the luminance adjustment means 546 adjusts the rate of change of the luminance of the LED of the title display portion 615 to the right side. It is configured to be larger than the change rate of the luminance of the LEDs of the frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 .
Note that the brightness of each LED of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 at each level of “Level 1” to “Level 5” is not limited to the values shown in FIG. In addition, the brightness levels that can be adjusted in the brightness adjustment mode are not limited to the five stages of "level 1" to "level 5."

For example, in FIG. 138, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 at "level 1" is set to "1", and the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 at "level 1" is set to "2". good too. That is, when the level is changed to "level 1", the brightness of each LED of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 may be greatly reduced. In this case, when the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 615 is changed from "level 5" to "level 1", it changes from "80" to "1", which is a decrease of about "99%". Further, when the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 is changed from "level 5" to "level 1", the luminance changes from "100" to "2", which is a decrease of "98%".

(2) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the title display section 615 is provided on the front upper portion of the game board 504 and on the back side of the glass door 505, but the present invention is not limited to this.
FIG. 139 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 500A in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
As shown in FIG. 139, for example, a title display portion 615 as a production lamp portion 541 may be provided on the front upper portion of the glass door 505 . That is, the title display portion 615 may be formed in a horizontally long shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the glass door 505, for example.
In this case, the player visually recognizes the title display portion 615 in front of the glass door 505 and above the game area of the game board 504 .

In addition, the pachinko game machine 500A of the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG. 139 is the same as the twenty-fourth embodiment shown in FIG. It is the same as the pachinko game machine 500 of (A).
Even when the title display portion 615 is provided on the front upper portion of the glass door 505, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 615e in the title display portion 615 is equal to that of the light diffusion portions in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630. Setting higher than the light diffusion rate of 670a is the same as the pachinko game machine 500 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG.

(3) FIG. 140 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 500B in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
As shown in FIG. 140, an upper frame lamp portion 610 as a production lamp portion 541 is provided on the front upper portion of the glass door 505. The upper frame lamp portion 610 is provided with a title display portion 615 that emits light in the form of letters or the like, A peripheral decorative portion 616 that is a portion other than the title display portion 615 may be provided.
In this case, an upper frame lamp portion 610 is provided in front of the glass door 505 and above the game area of the game board 504, and a title display portion 615 is provided in the upper frame lamp portion 610. It will happen. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the title display portion 615 in front of the glass door 505 and above the game area of the game board 504 .

In addition, the pachinko game machine 500B of the modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG. 133 is the same as the pachinko game machine 500 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG.
Further, even when the upper frame lamp portion 610 is provided on the front upper portion of the glass door 505, and the title display portion 615 and the peripheral decoration portion 616 are provided in the upper frame lamp portion 610, light diffusion in the title display portion 615 is achieved. Setting the light diffusion rate of the portion 615e higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 670a in the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 is the pachinko game machine of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A) shown in FIG. Similar to 500.

Also, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 , the peripheral decorative portion 616 , the right frame lamp portion 620 and the left frame lamp portion 630 .
Furthermore, the light emission control means 547 is configured to have the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decoration portion 616 emit light in the same pattern and in different patterns. there is
Further, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 616 to emit light in different patterns. It is controlled to be longer than the light emission time of the same pattern.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 wins a big win in a big win lottery, the main control board 530 transmits a big win command to the sub control board 540 indicating that the big win has been won.
In addition, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, it determines the content of the effect corresponding to the big win, and according to the determined content of the effect, the upper frame lamp portion 610 (the title display portion 615, the peripheral decoration portion 616), the right It controls the frame lamp unit 620 , the left frame lamp unit 630 , the speaker 542 and the image display device 543 .

At this time, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp portion 610 (the title display portion 615 and the peripheral decoration portion 616), the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the big win. Execute the production to let you.
In addition, when executing an effect corresponding to a big win, the light emission control means 547 controls the light emission time of the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp portion 610 (the title display portion 615 and the peripheral decorative portion 616) to the right frame lamp portion 620 and the right frame lamp portion 620. It is controlled to be shorter than the light emission time of the light emitting element of the left frame lamp section 630 . For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 620 and the left frame lamp section 630 are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 610 (the title display section 615 and the peripheral decoration section 616) are controlled to emit light for 7 seconds. .

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to a big win, when the light emitting elements of upper frame lamp portion 610 (title display portion 615, peripheral decorative portion 616) are caused to emit light for 7 seconds, light emission control means 547 controls, for example, the title The light emitting elements of the display portion 615 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 616 are caused to emit light in the same pattern for 3 seconds and in different patterns for 4 seconds. In this manner, the light-emitting elements of the title display portion 615 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration portion 616 are caused to emit light in different patterns, and the light-emitting elements of the title display portion 615 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decoration portion 616 are caused to emit light in the same pattern. Make it longer than the flash time.

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to the big win, the light emission control means 547 causes the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the big win. As a pattern corresponding to the big win, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot. In particular, since the title display section 615 is arranged at a position slightly above the line of sight of the player, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the jackpot lottery has won a jackpot.

(3) The right frame lamp portion 620, the left frame lamp portion 630, and the title display portion 615 are not limited to being composed of one lamp portion, and may each be composed of a plurality of lamp portions.
Specifically, the right frame lamp portion 620 can be composed of three lamp portions, for example, a first right frame lamp portion, a second right frame lamp portion, and a third right frame lamp portion.
Similarly to the right frame lamp portion 620, the left frame lamp portion 630 is composed of three lamp portions, for example, a first left frame lamp portion, a second left frame lamp portion, and a third left frame lamp portion. can do.

Furthermore, the title display portion 615 can be composed of two lamp portions, for example, a first title display portion and a second title display portion.
Then, when comparing the first right frame lamp portion, the first left frame lamp portion, and the first title display portion, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the first title display portion is the same as the first right frame lamp portion and the first title display portion. It may be set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first left frame lamp section.

(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (A), the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630 can be adjusted by the brightness adjusting means 546. FIG.
In this regard, as described above, as a measure of brightness, "luminance", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance" can be cited, and the "luminance adjusting means 546" is equivalent to the "luminous intensity adjusting means 546" or the "illuminance can be referred to as adjustment means 546''.
Then, the luminous intensity of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615 , the right frame lamp portion 620 , and the left frame lamp portion 630 may be adjusted by the luminous intensity adjusting means 546 .
Also, the illuminance adjusting means 546 may adjust the illuminance of the surface irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display portion 615, the right frame lamp portion 620, and the left frame lamp portion 630. FIG.

<Twenty-Fourth Embodiment (B): When Gaming Machine is Slot Machine>
141 is a front view of the slot machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), and FIG. 142 is a view of the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) from the front side (player side). is a perspective view.
FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the right frame lamp portion 27 of the slot machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) as viewed from the front side (player side).

Furthermore, FIG. 144(1) is a diagram showing a texturing portion 29f formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the texturing part 27f formed in the surface of the part 27d.
Further, FIG. 145(1) is a plan sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), and FIG. 146 is a block diagram of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).

As shown in FIG. 141, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close.
A door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13 . When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a pattern display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged side by side is arranged inside the cabinet 13. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged at a position corresponding to a position above the device 14 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, a transparent display window 18 is provided in the central portion of the front door 12 . The display window 18 is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the pattern display device 14 . As a result, the player can visually recognize the symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window 18 from the front side of the slot machine 10 .

141 and 142, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window 18, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 43 are provided. , a selection switch 88, a performance switch 89, a medal slot 47, and the like are arranged.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141, an image display device 23 is arranged on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and above the display window 18 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a sub-control board housed in a sub-board case 87 is located above the back side of the front door 12 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23 . 80 are placed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a title display portion 29 as a production lamp 21 is provided on the front upper portion of the front door 12, and a title display portion 29 as the production lamp 21 is provided on the front right portion of the front door 12. A frame lamp portion 27 is provided, and a left frame lamp portion 28 as the production lamp 21 is provided on the front left portion of the front door 12 .
The title display portion 29 is a horizontally elongated performance lamp 21 extending from near the right end to near the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12 .
The right frame lamp portion 27 is a longitudinally elongated effect lamp 21 extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right portion of the front door 12 .
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a vertically long effect lamp 21 extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left portion of the front door 12 .

Also, the title display portion 29 is a production lamp 21 that emits light in the form of characters, symbols, or the like. Specifically, the title display portion 29 emits light in the form of characters, symbols, etc. indicating the model name of the slot machine 10, for example.
Furthermore, the title display portion 29 is located between the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 (to the left of the right frame lamp portion 27 and to the right of the left frame lamp portion 28), and is positioned at the height of the slot machine 10. It is provided above the center of the direction. Thus, when the player views the slot machine 10 from the front, the title display portion 29 is positioned slightly above the player's line of sight.
In addition, the peripheral edge portion of the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12, the peripheral edge portion of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 on the front surface of the front door 12, and the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28. Each part is colored differently.

Further, the title display portion 29 includes a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
The title display board 29a is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the title display portion 29 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. A plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted as light emitting elements on the title display substrate 29a. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The title display cover 29b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the title display board 29a, and is attached to the front upper portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
The title display cover 29b is provided with letters, symbols, etc., and these letters, symbols, etc. emit light.
Specifically, a lens portion 29d is provided at a position facing the title display substrate 29a in the title display cover 29b. The lens portion 29d is formed in the shape of a letter, a symbol, or the like, and is made of translucent resin. In addition, portions of the title display cover 29b other than the lens portion 29d are made of a non-translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light-emitting elements mounted on the title display substrate 29a is irradiated toward the inside of the title display cover 29b and passes through the lens portion 29d formed in the shape of characters, symbols, etc. , to the outside of the title display cover 29b. As a result, the title display cover 29b appears to emit light in the form of characters, symbols, or the like.

Further, the inner surface of the lens portion 29d (the surface on the side of the title display substrate 29a) is provided with a texturing portion 29f. The texturing portion 29f functions as a light diffusing portion 29e that diffuses light emitted from the LED as a light emitting element. It is formed by providing Further, as the uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 29d, a pattern having a large number of quadrangular pyramid-shaped projections is formed as shown in FIG. 144(1).

In this manner, by providing the texturing portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d and making the texturing portion 29f function as the light diffusion portion 29e, the LED can be made inconspicuous. In addition, the entire lens portion 29d can be made to appear to shine uniformly, and characters, symbols, etc. can appear to shine uniformly. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled when looking at the characters, symbols, etc. attached to the title display portion 29 .

The uneven pattern forming the textured portion 29f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions, and may be, for example, a pattern having a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions or a pattern having a large number of hemispherical protrusions. , or a pattern or the like provided with a large number of streak-like projections.
Further, the light diffusing portion 29e is not limited to being formed by providing the texturing portion 29f on the inner surface of the lens portion 29d.
For example, the light diffusion portion 29e may be formed by providing the texturing portion 29f on the outer surface of the lens portion 29d (the surface opposite to the title display substrate 29a). Further, for example, the light diffusion portion 29e may be formed by providing texturing portions 29f on both the inner surface and the outer surface of the lens portion 29d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusing portion 29e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent for diffusing light into the resin forming the lens portion 29d.
Further, for example, a light diffusion sheet for diffusing light is arranged between the title display substrate 29a and the lens portion 29d, that is, between the light emitting element and the lens portion 29d, thereby forming the light diffusion portion 29e. may

Further, the light diffusing portion 29e may be formed by, for example, a combination of the textured portion 29f and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 29f and a light diffusion sheet. , may be formed by a combination of a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of a textured portion 29f, a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet.

As shown in FIG. 143, the right-frame lamp section 27 includes a right-frame lamp base 27c, a right-frame lamp substrate 27a, and a right-frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp base 27c is a member that serves as the base of the right frame lamp portion 27. As shown in FIG. A right-frame lamp portion 27 is configured by attaching a right-frame lamp substrate 27a and a right-frame lamp cover 27b to the front side of the right-frame lamp base 27c.

The right-frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light-emitting element for causing the right-frame lamp section 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light-emitting element is connected are mounted. It is attached to the front right portion of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).
Further, as shown in FIG. 143, four LEDs 160a to 160d as light emitting elements are mounted on the front surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160d on the right frame lamp board 27a is white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white).
As a result, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, the appearance of the right frame lamp portion 27 can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, since the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, the right frame lamp cover 27b can be made to appear brighter. Furthermore, the colors of the LEDs 160a to 160d can be seen clearly.
Note that the “substantially white” and the “similar color” to white are as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, the right-frame lamp substrate 27a is fixed to the right-frame lamp base 27c with screws 683a to 683c.
Furthermore, when the right-frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the right-frame lamp base 27c with the screws 683a-683c, the screw heads 689a-689c of the screws 683a-683c are on the mounting surface side of the LEDs 160a-160c on the right-frame lamp board 27a. exposed to. In this state, the height of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c is set larger (higher) than the height of the LEDs 160a to 160c when the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c on the right frame lamp board 27a is used as a reference. .
That is, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are set higher than the LEDs 160a to 160c from the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a to 160c on the right frame lamp substrate 27a.

Furthermore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are formed in convex curved surfaces (dome shapes), and the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are coated with light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c. The surface is treated to reflect
Specifically, silver plating is applied as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160c. Silver plating includes silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw heads 689a-689c of the screws 683a-683c is set larger than the height of the LEDs 160a-160c with reference to the mounting surface of the LEDs 160a-160c. Moreover, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are formed into convex curved surfaces. Furthermore, the surfaces of the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c are subjected to a surface treatment that reflects light. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs 160a-160c to be reflected by the screw heads 689a-689c of the screws 683a-683c. Therefore, the screw heads 689a to 689c of the screws 683a to 683c can be made to appear to shine like light emitting elements, so that the right frame lamp section 27 can appear to shine brighter.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right portion of the front door 12. As shown in FIG.
The right frame lamp cover 27b has a lens portion 27d, an auxiliary lens portion 27g, a decoration portion 27i, and a side wall portion 27h.
The lens portion 27d guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a to the front side (player side), and is made of translucent resin. Further, the lens portion 27d is provided at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 27a in the right frame lamp cover 27b.

A textured portion 27f is provided on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 27a side). The texturing portion 27f functions as a light diffusing portion 29e that diffuses light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d as light emitting elements. It is formed by providing a pattern. Further, as the uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 27d, a pattern having a large number of quadrangular pyramid-shaped projections is formed as shown in FIG. 144(2).

Further, the auxiliary lens portion 27g, like the lens portion 27d, guides the light emitted from the LEDs 160a to 160d mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a to the front side (player side), and has translucency. It is made of a resin that has The inner surface of the auxiliary lens portion 27g is provided with a texturing portion 27f that functions as a light diffusion portion 29e, like the lens portion 27d.
Furthermore, the decorative portion 27i is provided around the lens portion 27d and is made of a resin that does not transmit light. The surface of the decorative portion 27i is plated with silver.

Further, the side wall portion 27h is a portion that supports the lens portion 27d and the decoration portion 27i, and is formed to protrude forward from a portion corresponding to the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 27a. Further, like the decorative portion 27i, the side wall portion 27h is made of resin that does not transmit light, and the surface of the side wall portion 27h is plated with silver.
Further, in the right frame lamp portion 27 as well, texturing portions 27f are provided on the inner surfaces of the lens portion 27d and the auxiliary lens portion 27g. In addition, the entire lens portion 27d and the auxiliary lens portion 27g can be seen to shine uniformly, and furthermore, the player can be prevented from feeling dazzling.

The uneven pattern forming the texturing portion 27f is not limited to a pattern having a large number of square pyramid-shaped protrusions, and may be, for example, a pattern having a large number of triangular pyramid-shaped protrusions or a pattern having a large number of hemispherical protrusions. , or a pattern or the like provided with a large number of streak-like projections.
Further, the light diffusing portion 27e is not limited to being formed by providing the texturing portion 27f on the inner surface of the lens portion 27d.
For example, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by providing the texturing portion 29f on the outer surface of the lens portion 27d (the surface opposite to the right frame lamp substrate 27a). Further, for example, the light diffusion portion 27e may be formed by providing texturing portions 27f on both the inner surface and the outer surface of the lens portion 27d.

Furthermore, for example, the light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent for diffusing light into the resin forming the lens portion 27d.
Further, for example, a light diffusion sheet for diffusing light is arranged between the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the lens portion 27d, that is, between the light emitting element and the lens portion 27d, thereby forming the light diffusion portion 27e. You may
Further, the light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by, for example, a combination of the textured portion 27f and a light diffusing agent, or may be formed by a combination of the textured portion 27f and a light diffusion sheet. , may be formed by a combination of a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet, or may be formed by a combination of a texturing portion 27f, a light diffusion agent and a light diffusion sheet.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141, the left frame lamp portion 28 includes a left frame lamp substrate 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a, and the left frame lamp cover 28b is provided with a lens portion 28d that guides light emitted from the LEDs on the left frame lamp substrate 28a to the front side. The inner surface of the portion 28d is provided with a texturing portion 28f that functions as a light diffusion portion 28e that diffuses the light emitted from the LED. The left frame lamp portion 28 is formed in a shape symmetrical with the right frame lamp portion 27 .
Also in the left frame lamp portion 28, by providing a texturing portion 28f functioning as a light diffusion portion 28e on the inner surface of the lens portion 28d, the LED becomes inconspicuous and the entire lens portion 28d shines uniformly. In addition, the player is prevented from feeling dazzling.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 144(1) and 144(2), the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29
The texturing portion 29f as the light diffusion portion 29e formed on the surface has a finer uneven pattern than the texturing portion 27f as the light diffusion portion 27e formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. ing.
Furthermore, the grained portion 28f as the light diffusion portion 28e formed on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 is the grained portion formed on the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 as the light diffusion portion 27e. It is similar to the processed portion 27f.

As a result, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28. It is That is, the light emitted from the light-emitting element scatters more easily in the title display portion 29 than in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 .
Therefore, compared to the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28, the title display portion 29 can make the LEDs less conspicuous and can be made to appear to shine evenly. It is possible to make it difficult for people to feel that it is dazzling.

Further, as described above, the title display portion 29 is provided between the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 and above the center of the slot machine 10 in the height direction. When the player views the slot machine 10 from the front, the title display part 29 is positioned slightly above the line of sight of the player. Therefore, the light emitted from the title display portion 29 is more likely to be seen by the player than the light emitted from the right frame lamp portion 27 or the left frame lamp portion 28 .
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is divided into the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28. It is set higher than the rate so that the player is less likely to feel that it is dazzling.

Characters, symbols, and the like are displayed in the title display portion 29. If the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is low, the LEDs may stand out, and the characters, symbols, and the like may not be uniform. The light cannot be seen, or the player feels dazzling. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize characters, symbols, and the like.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is divided into the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28. set higher than the rate. As a result, the characters, symbols, etc., appear to shine uniformly, making it easier for the player to recognize the characters, symbols, etc.

Also, the distance from the title display substrate 29a and the LEDs in the title display portion 29 to the lens portion 29d is set shorter than the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the LEDs in the right frame lamp portion 27 to the lens portion 27d.
Specifically, in the title display portion 29, the maximum distance from the title display substrate 29a to the lens portion 29d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LED is defined as the distance "M3".
In the right frame lamp portion 27, the maximum distance from the right frame lamp substrate 27a to the lens portion 27d in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the LED is defined as a distance "M4".
The distance "M3" is set shorter than the distance "M4". That is, the distance "M4" is set longer than the distance "M3".

Thus, by setting the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the LED in the right frame lamp portion 27 to the lens portion 27d longer than the distance from the title display substrate 29a and the LED in the title display portion 29 to the lens portion 29d, Even if the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dazzled.
For the left frame lamp portion 28, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27, the distance from the left frame lamp substrate 28a and LED to the lens portion 28d is set longer than the distance from the title display substrate 29a and LED to the lens portion 29d. ing.

In the title display portion 29, the title display substrate 29a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens portion 29d has a curved portion, an inclined portion, and the like. The distance to the portion 29d is not constant.
Similarly, in the right frame lamp portion 27, the right frame lamp substrate 27a is formed in a flat plate shape, but the lens portion 27d has a curved portion, an inclined portion, and the like. The distance from the substrate 27a to the lens portion 27d is not constant.
Therefore, the distance is compared between the portion where the distance from the title display substrate 29a to the lens portion 29d is the maximum and the portion where the distance from the right frame lamp substrate 27a to the lens portion 27d is the maximum.

145(1), the left frame lamp portion 28 includes a left frame lamp substrate 28a on which the LEDs 160 are mounted, and a left lamp substrate 28a that covers the mounting surface of the LEDs 160 on the left frame lamp substrate 28a. A frame lamp cover 28b is provided.
The left frame lamp cover 28b also includes a lens portion 28d and a side wall portion 28h.
The lens portion 28d guides the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a to the front side (player side), and is made of translucent resin. Further, the lens portion 28d is provided at a position facing the left frame lamp substrate 28a in the left frame lamp cover 28b.

The side wall portion 28h is a portion that supports the lens portion 28d, and is formed to protrude forward from a portion corresponding to the outer peripheral edge of the left frame lamp substrate 28a. Further, the side wall portion 28h is made of a resin that does not transmit light.
Since the side wall portion 28h is formed of a non-translucent resin and the lens portion 28d is formed of a translucent resin, the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a The light does not pass through the side wall portion 28h near the left frame lamp substrate 28a to the outside of the left frame lamp cover 28b, but passes through the lens portion 28d far from the left frame lamp substrate 28a to the outside of the left frame lamp cover 28b.

As a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a can be prevented from traveling toward the display window 18 provided at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, so that the left frame lamp board 28a It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the display window 18 from being reflected by the display window 18 and making the display window 18 difficult to see.

Note that, as shown in Modified Example 1 of section A in FIG. 145(2), the side wall portion 28h may be provided only on the right side (the display window 18 side). Even in this way, the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a can be prevented from traveling in the direction of the display window 18, and the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from becoming difficult to see due to the reflected light from the display window 18.例文帳に追加

145(3), for example, the shape of the lens portion 28d in the cross-sectional plan view is triangular, and the surface on the right side of the lens portion 28d (on the side of the display window 18) is indicated. The angle formed with the window 18 may be set to be an obtuse angle. Even in this way, the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a can be prevented from traveling toward the display window 18, and the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a can be prevented from traveling toward the display window 18. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from being obscured by the emitted light.

Furthermore, although not shown, the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 may be provided at a position behind the display window 18 (opposite side to the player). That is, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 may be shifted (offset) to the rear side from the position of the display window 18 . Even in this way, the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 27a and the left-frame lamp substrate 28a can be prevented from traveling toward the display window 18, and the right-frame lamp substrate 27a and It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from being obscured by the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a.

Further, although not shown, the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 may be provided on the front side (player side) of the display window 18, contrary to the above-described case. That is, the mounting positions of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 may be shifted forward (offset) from the position of the display window 18 . Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LEDs 160 mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the left frame lamp substrate 28a from traveling toward the display window 18. It is possible to prevent the display window 18 from being obscured by the light emitted from the LED 160 mounted on the left frame lamp substrate 28a.

As shown in FIG. 146, the slot machine 10 has a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 .
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Also, on the main control board 50, via the input port 51 or the output port 52, the bed switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the settlement switch 43, the pattern display device 14, the sub control board 80, etc. are electrically connected. It is connected. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with winning lottery means 61, reel control means 65, prize determination means 66, payout means 67, and the like.

When the bet switch 40 is operated, credited medals are betted. Also, when medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, the inserted medals are betted. When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, the main control board 50 draws a lottery with the combination lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 with the reel control means 65. to rotate all the reels 31.

After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and controls the motor 32 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61. The reel 31 is stopped.
Then, the game result is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Also, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the effective line, the winning determination means 66 determines that the winning combination has been won, and the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. conduct.

The sub-control board 80 controls output of effects, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, and the like. Also, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the selection switch 88, the effect switch 89, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. It is Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 is provided with effect output control means 91, brightness adjustment means 92, light emission control means 93, and the like.

The selection switch 88 and effect switch 89 are switches used for effects and the like, and are switches operated by the player when displaying predetermined information or when performing various settings.
Furthermore, the selection switch 88 includes an up switch 88a, a down switch 88b, a right switch 88c, and a left switch 88d.

The brightness adjustment means 92 adjusts the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28. The light emission control section 93 controls the title display section 29 and the right frame lamp section. 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28.
The sub-control board 80, the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by harnesses. Brightness adjusting means 92 adjusts the brightness of LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards, and light emission control means 93 controls light emission of LEDs as light emitting elements mounted on these boards.

When the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub-control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect pattern based on the received command, and the light emission control means 93 follows the determination and controls the title display board 29a. , the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the left frame lamp substrate 28a.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a special combination command to the sub control board 80 to that effect.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special role command, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect pattern corresponding to the special role based on the special role command, and the light emission control means 93 emits the title according to the determination. The light-emitting elements of the display substrate 29a are caused to emit light in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the special role.

In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the special combination has been won. In particular, since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the line of sight of the player, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the special combination has been won.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special combination command, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect pattern corresponding to the special combination based on the special combination command, Light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the display substrate 29a, the right frame lamp substrate 27a, and the left frame lamp substrate 28a is controlled. At this time, the light emission control means 93 makes the light emission time of the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a shorter than the light emission time of the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. to control.

For example, when the light emission control means 93 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in the effect pattern corresponding to the special role, the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a are controlled to emit light for 7 seconds.
Since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the line of sight of the player, the light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 easily enters the player's eyes. For this reason, if the light emitting element of the title display portion 29 emits light for a long time, the player is likely to feel dazzled.

In particular, when executing an effect corresponding to a special role, the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to flash brightly, so that the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are used. If the light is emitted for a long time, the player feels dazzling.
Therefore, when the performance corresponding to the special combination is executed, the light emitting element of the title display part 29 is made shorter than the light emitting element of the right frame lamp part 27 and the left frame lamp part 28. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the light is dazzling.

The time for which the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are made to emit light is shorter than the time for which the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are made to emit light. Not exclusively.
For example, even when it is decided to execute AT after winning a lottery as to whether or not to execute AT, the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are caused to emit light in rainbow colors, and the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 are turned off. The light emission time can be made shorter than the light emission time of the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 .

Further, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61 and the sub-control board 80 receives the special combination command, the light emission control means 93 controls the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and The light emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a (the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28) may blink in a pattern corresponding to the special role. At this time, the light emission control means 93 makes the time for blinking the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a shorter than the time for blinking the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. to control.

For example, when the light emission control means 93 blinks the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in a production pattern corresponding to the special role, the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are controlled to blink for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements mounted on the title display board 29a are controlled to blink for 7 seconds.

Further, "blinking" means that the light-emitting element is repeatedly turned on and off as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).
Examples of blinking patterns include a pattern in which the light emitting element is lit for 1 second and turned off for 1 second, a pattern in which the light emitting element is lit for 2 seconds and turned off for 2 seconds, and a pattern for which the light emitting element is lit for 1 second and turned off for 2 seconds. Examples include a pattern in which turning off the light for 2 seconds is repeated, and a pattern in which the light emitting element is turned on for 2 seconds and turned off for 1 second.

Further, in the slot machine 10, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a prescribed number of medals have been bet, one game is started, all the reels 31 are stopped, and the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not a prize has been won. When the determination is made and the medal payout process is performed by the payout means 67, one game can be completed.
Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without betting medals after the last game is finished, the sub-control board 80 shifts to the game standby state. can be controlled as follows.

Specifically, when the game is over, the main control board 50 transmits a game end command to the sub-control board 80 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after receiving the game end command, the sub-control board 80 shifts to the game standby state, and switches the display of the image display device 23 from the game screen to the demonstration screen. .
In the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 changes the light emission pattern of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 from the light emission pattern in the game state to the light emission in the game standby state. Move to pattern. Specifically, in the game standby state, the light emission control means 93 makes the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 emit light longer than the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28. control to As a result, the slot machine 10 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can be guided to play a game on the slot machine 10.例文帳に追加

When medals are inserted from the medal slot 47 and bet, or when the bet switch 40 is operated and credited medals are bet, the main control board 50 sub-submits a bet command to that effect. Send to the control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives a bet command in the game standby state, it ends the game standby state and switches the display of the image display device 23 from the demo screen to the game screen. Further, the light emission control means 93 switches the light emission pattern of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 29, the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 from the game standby state light emission pattern to the game state light emission pattern.

Errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include, for example, a medal clogging (retention) error in the hopper 35, an empty medal error in the hopper 35, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 in the hopper 35, a medal retention error in the medal selector, and a medal retention error in the medal selector. , an error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector, an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector, an abnormal insertion error in medals, a full sub-tank, an opening of the front door 12, etc. mentioned.

When detecting the occurrence of an error, the main control board 50 transmits an error command indicating the fact to the sub-control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 to be extinguished.
Since the title display portion 29 is provided between the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 and above the center in the height direction of the slot machine 10, the title display portion 29 is conspicuous. By extinguishing the light emitting element 29, it is possible to make the player or hall clerk aware that any error has occurred in the slot machine 10 (it is not in a normal state).

In addition, in the slot machine 10, after the last game is finished, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) passes without any medals being bet. When the direction switch 88c or the left direction switch 88d) is operated, the sub-control board 80 causes the image display device 23 to display a menu screen similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in FIG. 136(1). display.
Furthermore, when the selection switch 88 (one of the upward switch 88a, the downward switch 88b, the rightward switch 88c, or the leftward switch 88d) is operated in the game standby state, the sub-control board 80 displays the image A menu screen similar to the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG. 136(1) is displayed on the display device 23 .

When the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 23, by operating the upward switch 88a or the downward switch 88b of the selection switch 88, the "volume adjustment mode" or the "brightness adjustment mode" can be selected.
Then, when the effect switch 89 is operated with the "brightness adjustment mode" selected, the sub-control board 80 shifts to the brightness adjustment mode, and the image display device 543 displays the pachinko game shown in FIG. A brightness adjustment mode screen similar to that of the machine 500 is displayed.

In the brightness adjustment mode, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.
In this embodiment, similarly to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to adjust the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the frame lamp substrate 28a.

When the screen of the brightness adjustment mode is displayed on the image display device 23, any level from "level 1" to "level 5" can be selected by operating the right direction switch 88c or the left direction switch 88d of the selection switch 88. selectable.
Then, when the effect switch 89 is operated with any level selected, the sub-control board 80 determines the luminance at that level. At this time, the brightness adjusting means 92 controls the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the title display board 29a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the determined level.

In this embodiment, similarly to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in FIG. is. On the other hand, the brightness of the LED of the title display portion 29 is "80" at maximum and "16" at minimum.
The brightness of the LED of the title display portion 29 is set to be darker than the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28, as in the example of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in FIG. be.
Further, the luminance adjusting means 92 is configured to change the luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 and the luminance of the LED of the title display portion 29 at the same rate of change. is also the same as the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 shown in FIG.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness adjusting means 92 adjusts the brightness of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 and the brightness of the LED of the title display section 29 at the same rate of change. , but it is not limited to this.
Similar to the modification of the pachinko game machine 500 shown in FIG. may be configured to be larger than the rate of change in luminance of the LEDs of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 .

(2) FIG. 147 is a front view of a slot machine 10A in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B).
As shown in FIG. 147, an upper frame lamp portion 26 serving as a production lamp portion 21 is provided on the upper front portion of the front door 12. The upper frame lamp portion 26 includes a title display portion 29 that emits light in the form of characters or the like, A peripheral decorative portion 26d, which is a portion other than the title display portion 29, may be provided.
The slot machine 10A of the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 141 is the same as the slot machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG.

Also in the slot machine 10A of the modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. Setting the light diffusion rate and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28 higher than that of the light diffusion portion 28e is the same as in the slot machine 10 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B) shown in FIG.

Further, the light emission control means 93 controls the title display portion 29, the peripheral decorative portion 26d, the right frame lamp portion 2,
7, and the light emission of the light emitting elements of the left frame lamp portion 28 are controlled.
Furthermore, the light emission control means 93 is configured to have the light emitting elements of the title display portion 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 26d emit light in the same pattern and in different patterns. there is
Further, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements of the title display portion 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 26d to emit light in different patterns. It is controlled to be longer than the light emission time of the same pattern.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61 , the main control board 50 transmits a special combination command to the sub control board 80 to that effect.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the special combination command, the effect output control means 91 determines the effect pattern corresponding to the special combination based on the special combination command, Light emission of the light emitting elements of the frame lamp portion 26 (the title display portion 29 and the peripheral decorative portion 26d), the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 is controlled.

At this time, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp portion 26 (the title display portion 29 and the peripheral decoration portion 26d), the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Execute the lighting effect.
In addition, when executing an effect corresponding to a special role, the light emission control means 93 sets the light emission time of the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp portion 26 (the title display portion 29 and the peripheral decoration portion 26d) to the right frame lamp portion 27. And the light emitting element of the left frame lamp section 28 is controlled to be shorter than the light emitting time. For example, the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28 are controlled to emit light for 10 seconds, and the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp section 26 (the title display section 29 and the peripheral decorative section 26d) are controlled to emit light for 7 seconds. .

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to a special role, when the light emitting elements of the upper frame lamp portion 26 (the title display portion 29 and the peripheral decorative portion 26d) are caused to emit light for 7 seconds, the light emission control means 93, for example, The light-emitting elements of the title display portion 29 and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 26d are caused to emit light in the same pattern for 3 seconds and in different patterns for 4 seconds. In this manner, the light emitting elements of the title display portion 29 and the light emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion 26d are caused to emit light in different patterns in the same pattern. Make it longer than the flash time.

Furthermore, when executing an effect corresponding to the special role, the light emission control means 93 causes the light emitting elements of the title display section 29 to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. As a pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light-emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". As a result, the light-emitting element can emit light in so-called rainbow colors, and the player can be notified that the special combination has been won. In particular, since the title display section 29 is arranged at a position slightly above the line of sight of the player, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the special combination has been won.

(3) The right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28, and the title display portion 29 are not limited to being composed of one lamp portion, and may be composed of a plurality of lamp portions.
Specifically, the right frame lamp portion 27 can be composed of three lamp portions, for example, a first right frame lamp portion, a second right frame lamp portion, and a third right frame lamp portion.
Similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28 is composed of three lamp portions, for example, a first left frame lamp portion, a second left frame lamp portion, and a third left frame lamp portion. can do.

Furthermore, the title display portion 29 can be composed of two lamp portions, for example, a first title display portion and a second title display portion.
Then, when comparing the first right frame lamp portion, the first left frame lamp portion, and the first title display portion, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the first title display portion is It may be set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the first left frame lamp section.

(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the texturing portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 is more uneven than the texturing portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. Although the pattern of is set finely, it is not limited to this.
FIG. 148(1) shows a texturing portion 29f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 and a texturing portion 27f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the diffusing portion 27e).

In FIG. 148(1), the projection on the right side is one of many projections that constitute the texturing portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the projection on the left side is the right frame lamp portion 27. 1 shows one of a large number of projections forming a texturing portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 148(1), both the protrusions forming the grained portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the protrusions forming the grained portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are formed in a dome shape. .
Further, in the example of FIG. 148(1), the area of the bottom of the dome-shaped projections forming the textured portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the dome-shaped projections constituting the textured portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are set to be the same.

In the example of FIG. 148(1), the height of the dome-shaped protrusions forming the texturing portion 29f of the title display portion 29 is equal to the height of the dome-shaped protrusions forming the texturing portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27. It is set higher than the height.
As a result, the radius of the curved surface on which the light emitted from the LED is incident can be made smaller in the title display portion 29 than in the right frame lamp portion 27, so that the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion can be increased. can.

FIG. 148(2) shows a texturing portion 29f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 and a texturing portion 27f (light diffuser portion 29e) formed on the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modification of the diffusion portion 27e);
In FIG. 148(2), the projection on the right side is one of many projections that constitute the texturing portion 29f formed on the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29, and the projection on the left side is the right frame lamp portion 27. 1 shows one of a large number of projections forming a texturing portion 27f formed on the lens portion 27d of FIG.

In the example of FIG. 148(2), the protrusions forming the texturing portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the protrusions forming the texturing portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are both formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid. there is
Further, in the example of FIG. 148(2), the area of the bottom of the quadrangular pyramid-shaped protrusion that constitutes the grained portion 29f of the title display portion 29 and the square pyramidal shape that constitutes the grained portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27 are set to be the same.

In the example of FIG. 148(2), the height of the quadrangular pyramidal projections forming the texturing portion 29f of the title display portion 29 is the same as the height of the quadrangular pyramidal projection forming the texturing portion 27f of the right frame lamp portion 27. It is set higher than the height of the projection.
As a result, the angle between the light emitted from the LED and the incident surface of the light can be made smaller in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27, so that the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section can be reduced. can be raised.
In this manner, while the title display portion 29 and the right frame lamp portion 27 are set to have the same area of the bottom portion of the protrusions forming the texturing portions, the heights of the protrusions forming the texturing portions are made different. , the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion can be varied.

(5) In the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the brightness of the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 can be adjusted by the brightness adjustment means 92. FIG.
In this regard, as described above, as a measure of brightness, "luminance", "luminous intensity", and "illuminance" can be cited, and the "luminance adjusting means 92" is the same as the "luminance adjusting means 92" or the "illuminance can be referred to as the adjustment means 92''.
Then, the luminous intensity of the light emitting elements of the title display portion 29, the right frame lamp portion 27, and the left frame lamp portion 28 may be adjusted by the luminous intensity adjusting means 92. FIG.
In addition, the illuminance adjusting means 92 may adjust the illuminance of the surface irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting elements of the title display section 29, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28. FIG.

(6) As described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the right-frame lamp section 27 includes a right-frame lamp substrate 27a and a right-frame lamp cover 27b, and the left-frame lamp section 28 includes a left-frame lamp substrate. 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display portion 29 includes a title display board 29a and a title display cover 29b.
Then, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, the light emitting element (LED) mounting surfaces of the right frame lamp substrate 27a, the left frame lamp substrate 28a, and the title display substrate 29a are white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white). ).

As a result, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, the appearance of the right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28, and the title display portion 29 can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected toward the right frame lamp cover 27b, the left frame lamp cover 28b, and the title display cover 29b. The frame lamp cover 28b and the title display cover 29b can be made to appear brighter. Furthermore, the color development of the light-emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
Note that the “substantially white” and the “similar color” to white are as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (A).

Further, for example, the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28 are set larger than the title display portion 29, and the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the left frame lamp substrate 28a is displayed in the title display. It can be set to be larger (wider) than the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the substrate 29a.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a, the left frame lamp board 28a, and the title display board 29a can each be fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683).
Further, the number of fixing members for fixing the right-frame lamp board 27a to the predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the left-frame lamp board 28a to the predetermined mounting position are determined according to the title display board 29a. can be set larger than the number of fixing members for fixing to the mounting position.

Further, when the right-frame lamp board 27a is fixed to the predetermined mounting position by the fixing member, the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member is exposed on the side of the light-emitting element mounting surface of the right-frame lamp board 27a. In this state, the height of the head of the fixing member is set larger (higher) than the height of the light emitting element when the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp substrate 27a is used as a reference. That is, the height of the head portion of the fixing member from the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is set larger (higher) than the light emitting element.

Furthermore, the head portion of the fixing member is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head portion of the fixing member is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element. . Specifically, silver plating is applied as a surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting element. Silver plating includes silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

Similarly to the right frame lamp board 29a, the left frame lamp board 28a and the title display board 29a are also fixed to predetermined mounting positions by fixing members, and the head portions of the fixing members are exposed to the mounting surface side of the light emitting elements. make it Also, the height of the head portion of the fixing member is set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element. Furthermore, the head portion of the fixing member is formed in a convex shape, and the surface of the head portion of the fixing member is subjected to surface treatment for reflecting light.

In this manner, the height of the head of the fixing member is set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element, and the head of the fixing member is formed in a convex curved shape. By applying a light-reflecting surface treatment to the surface, the light emitted from the light-emitting element can be reflected by the head of the fixing member. As a result, the head portion of the fixing member can be made to appear to shine like a light-emitting element, so that the right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28, and the title display portion 29 appear to shine brighter. can be

In addition, the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the right frame lamp substrate 27a and the left frame lamp substrate 28a is set larger than that of the title display substrate 29a. Further, the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are set to have more fixing members for fixing to predetermined mounting positions than the title display board 29a.
That is, for the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a, the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements of which is larger than the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing to the predetermined mounting positions is determined from the title display board 29a. set a lot.

As a result, although the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements of the right-frame lamp board 27a and the left-frame lamp board 28a is larger than the title display board 29a, the number of fixing members for fixing to predetermined mounting positions is greater than that of the title display board. Since the number is larger than 29a, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected.

Further, as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the texturing portion 29f (light diffusion portion 29e) formed on the surface of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 is the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27. The textured portion 27f (light diffusing portion 27e) formed on the surface of the surface has a finer uneven pattern.
Furthermore, on the surface of the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, a texturing portion 27f (light diffusion portion 27e) similar to the surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 is formed.

Thus, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 29e in the title display portion 29 is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 27e in the right frame lamp portion 27 and the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion 28e in the left frame lamp portion 28. It is
For this reason, the light emitted from the light emitting elements is more likely to scatter in the title display section 29 than in the right frame lamp section 27 and the left frame lamp section 28. The head portion of the fixing member for fixing the display substrate 29a can be made inconspicuous, the entire lens portion 29d can be made to shine uniformly, and furthermore, the player can be prevented from being dazzled. You can make it less noticeable.

In addition, as described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the light emission control means 93, when winning a special role (the sub-control board 80 receives a special role command), or when winning an AT lottery When it is decided to execute) or when it shifts to the game standby state, the right frame lamp part 27 (light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) and the left frame lamp part 28 (on the left frame lamp board 28a light emitting elements mounted) and the title display portion 29 (light emitting elements mounted on the title display substrate 29a) are caused to emit light or blink in different patterns.
As a result, patterns of effects using the right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28, and the title display portion 29 can be diversified.

Further, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be made of substantially the same resin.
"Substantially identical" is a concept that includes items that are approximately the same but are not exactly the same due to manufacturing errors or the like, and items that are not exactly the same but appear to be the same. Also, "substantially identical" is a concept that includes "identical."
In this manner, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 are formed of substantially the same resin, thereby forming them. Since it is possible to share the resin raw material for the production, the trouble of managing the resin raw material can be reduced.

Further, the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 can be formed of a colored (for example, red or blue) translucent resin.
Furthermore, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 are partly made of transparent resin, and the other parts are made of the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29. It can be formed of substantially the same colored and translucent resin.

Specifically, the lens portion 27d of the right-frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left-frame lamp portion 28 are partly made of a transparent resin, and the other parts are made of, for example, a blue color having translucency. It can be formed with a resin that has
Then, the light emission control means 93 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 27a and the left-frame lamp substrate 28a so that the light emitting elements arranged at the positions corresponding to the portions formed of transparent resin are also colored blue. The light-emitting elements arranged at positions corresponding to the portions made of resin can also be controlled to emit light or blink in the same color.

At this time, the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 27a and the left-frame lamp substrate 28a all emit light or blink in the same color, but are arranged at positions corresponding to portions formed of transparent resin. The light-emitting element and the light-emitting element arranged at the position corresponding to the portion formed of the blue resin can appear to emit light or blink in different colors.
As a result, patterns of effects using the right frame lamp portion 27, the left frame lamp portion 28, and the title display portion 29 can be diversified.

Contrary to the above case, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28 are made of colored translucent resin, and the lens portion of the title display portion 29 is A part of 29d is made of a transparent resin, and the other part is made of translucent resin having substantially the same color as the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 and the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28. may be formed with
Furthermore, the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 28d of the left frame lamp portion 28, and the lens portion 29d of the title display portion 29 are all partially formed of transparent resin, and the other portions are made of transparent resin. Alternatively, it may be formed of a colored and translucent resin.

Further, for example, for the right frame lamp portion 27, the lens portion 27d can be formed so as to cover the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 27a.
Further, for example, a textured portion 27f may be provided on the entire inner surface of the lens portion 27d of the right frame lamp portion 27 (the surface on the right frame lamp substrate 27a side), and the textured portion 27f may function as the light diffusion portion 27e. can. The light diffusing portion 27e may be formed by kneading a light diffusing agent into the resin forming the lens portion 27d.

In the left frame lamp portion 28, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27, a lens portion 28d is formed so as to cover the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 28a. A texturing portion 28f can be provided on the entire surface to form a light diffusion portion 28e.
Further, for the title display portion 29, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28, a lens portion 29d is formed so as to cover the entire light emitting element mounting surface of the title display substrate 29a. A texturing portion 29f can be provided on the entire inner surface of the portion 29d to form a light diffusion portion 29e.

As described above, in the right frame lamp portion 27, the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 27a is covered with the lens portion 27d, and the light diffusion portion 27e is provided on the entire surface of the lens portion 27d. In order to fix the light-emitting elements mounted on the right-frame lamp substrate 27a and the right-frame lamp substrate 27a when the portion 27 (the right-frame lamp substrate 27a through the lens portion 27d) is viewed from the front and when viewed from the side. Since the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member (screw 683) and the like can be made inconspicuous, the design can be kept from being spoiled.
Also, the left frame lamp portion 28 and the title display portion 29 can obtain the same effects as those described above for the right frame lamp portion 27 .

Further, the right frame lamp portion 27 can be composed of three lamp portions, for example, a first right frame lamp portion, a second right frame lamp portion, and a third right frame lamp portion.
Furthermore, for the left frame lamp portion 28, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27, for example, the three lamp portions of the first left frame lamp portion, the second left frame lamp portion, and the third left frame lamp portion Can be configured.
Further, the title display portion 29 also has three lamp portions, for example, a first title display portion, a second title display portion, and a third title display portion, similarly to the right frame lamp portion 27 and the left frame lamp portion 28. can be constructed from

The first right-frame lamp section includes a first right-frame lamp substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted, and the first left-frame lamp section includes a first left-frame lamp substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted. The first title display portion includes a first title display substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted.
The light emitting element mounting surfaces of the first right-frame lamp substrate, the first left-frame lamp substrate, and the first title display substrate can be white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white).

Further, the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first right frame lamp substrate and the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first left frame lamp substrate are the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the first title display substrate. Can be set larger.
Furthermore, the first right-frame lamp board, the first left-frame lamp board, and the first title display board are each fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member (screw 683), and the first right-frame lamp board is fixed. The number of fixing members for fixing to the predetermined mounting position and the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting position are determined to fix the first title display board to the predetermined mounting position. can be set larger than the number of fixing members for

Further, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed to the predetermined mounting position by the fixing member, the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member is exposed on the side of the light emitting element mounting surface of the first right frame lamp board. Thus, at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the first right frame lamp substrate.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting element.

Similarly to the first right frame lamp substrate, when the first left frame lamp substrate and the first title display substrate are fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head portion of the fixing member faces the mounting surface side of the light emitting element. At this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element. Further, the head of the fixing member can be formed in a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to surface treatment for reflecting light.

In this way, the first right frame lamp portion constituting the right frame lamp portion 27, the first left frame lamp portion constituting the left frame lamp portion 28, and the first title display portion constituting the title display portion 29 , the total area of the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the first right frame lamp substrate and the first left frame lamp substrate can be set larger than the total area of the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the first title display substrate.
Then, the number of fixing members for fixing the first right frame lamp substrate, the number of fixing members for fixing the first left frame lamp substrate, and the number of fixing members for fixing the first title display substrate You can set more.
As a result, although the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light-emitting elements of the first right-frame lamp board and the first left-frame lamp board is larger than that of the first title display board, the number of fixing members for fixing to the predetermined mounting positions is small. Since the number of title display substrates is greater than that of the first title display substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting elements can be efficiently reflected.

That is, a first lamp substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted, and a second lamp substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements are mounted and the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting elements is set larger than that of the first lamp substrate. and a lamp substrate.
Further, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements in the first lamp substrate and the second lamp substrate can be white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white).
Further, the first lamp substrate and the second lamp substrate are each fixed at a predetermined mounting position by a fixing member, and the number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp substrate at the predetermined mounting position is less than the number of fixing members. , the number of fixing members for fixing the second lamp substrate to a predetermined mounting position can be set larger.

Further, when the first lamp substrate is fixed to the predetermined mounting position by the fixing member, the head portion of the fixing member is exposed to the light emitting element mounting surface side of the first lamp substrate. The height of the head portion of the fixing member can be set to be greater than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element in one lamp substrate.
Similarly to the first lamp substrate, when the second lamp substrate is fixed to a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head portion of the fixing member is placed on the light emitting element mounting surface side of the second lamp substrate. At this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the second lamp substrate.

Furthermore, in both the first lamp substrate and the second lamp substrate, the head portion of the fixing member is formed in a convex curved shape so that the surface of the head portion of the fixing member reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element. Surface treatment can be applied.
As a result, the head portion of the fixing member can appear to shine like a light-emitting element, so that the first lamp portion including the first lamp substrate and the second lamp portion including the second lamp substrate 2 can be made to look brighter and brighter.
Further, since the second lamp substrate has a larger number of fixing members for fixing to a predetermined mounting position than the first lamp substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected. .

Further, contrary to the case described above, the second lamp substrate is provided with a first lamp substrate and a second lamp substrate in which the total area of the mounting surface of the light emitting element is set larger than that of the first lamp substrate. The number of fixing members for fixing the first lamp substrate at the predetermined mounting position may be set larger than the number of fixing members for fixing the substrate at the predetermined mounting position.
Since the total area of the light emitting element mounting surface of the first lamp substrate is smaller than that of the second lamp substrate, it is difficult to mount more light emitting elements than the second lamp substrate. Since the number of fixing members for fixing in position is set larger than that of the second lamp substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reflected by the heads of many fixing members. can be compensated for by reflected light from the head of the fixing member.

Further, the right frame lamp substrate 27a can be composed of three substrates, for example, a first right frame lamp substrate, a second right frame lamp substrate, and a third right frame lamp substrate.
Similarly, the left frame lamp substrate 28a can also be composed of three substrates, for example, a first left frame lamp substrate, a second left frame lamp substrate, and a third left frame lamp substrate.
Also, the title display substrate 29a can be composed of two substrates, for example, a first title display substrate and a second title display substrate.

That is, the right-frame lamp substrate 27a, the left-frame lamp substrate 28a, and the title display substrate 29a are not limited to being composed of one lamp substrate, and may be composed of a plurality of lamp substrates.
A first right-frame lamp substrate, a second right-frame lamp substrate, a third right-frame lamp substrate, a first left-frame lamp substrate, a second left-frame lamp substrate, a third left-frame lamp substrate, a first title display substrate, And the mounting surface of the light-emitting elements in the second title display substrate can be made of white (“substantially white” or “similar color” to white).

In addition, the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements in the first right-frame lamp substrate, the second right-frame lamp substrate, and the third right-frame lamp substrate, the first left-frame lamp substrate, the second left-frame lamp substrate, and the third 3. The total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate can be set larger than the total area of the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the first title display substrate and the second title display substrate.
Furthermore, a first right frame lamp substrate, a second right frame lamp substrate, a third right frame lamp substrate, a first left frame lamp substrate, a second left frame lamp substrate, a third left frame lamp substrate, a first title display substrate, and the second title display substrate are fixed to predetermined mounting positions by fixing members (screws 683).
The total number of fixing members for fixing the first right-frame lamp board, the second right-frame lamp board, and the third right-frame lamp board to predetermined mounting positions, the first left-frame lamp board, the second left-frame lamp board, and the The total number of fixing members for fixing the frame lamp board and the third left frame lamp board to the predetermined mounting positions is equal to the total number of fixing members for fixing the first title display board and the second title display board to the predetermined mounting positions. It can be set more than the total number of fixing members.

Further, when the first right frame lamp board is fixed to the predetermined mounting position by the fixing member, the head (screw head 689) of the fixing member is exposed on the side of the light emitting element mounting surface of the first right frame lamp board. Thus, at this time, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the first right frame lamp substrate.
Furthermore, the head of the fixing member can be formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape), and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to surface treatment for reflecting light emitted from the light emitting element.

Regarding the second right frame lamp substrate, the third right frame lamp substrate, the first left frame lamp substrate, the second left frame lamp substrate, the third left frame lamp substrate, the first title display substrate, and the second title display substrate, As with the first right-frame lamp board, when it is fixed at a predetermined mounting position with a fixing member, the head of the fixing member is exposed to the mounting surface of the light emitting element. As a reference, the height of the head of the fixing member can be set larger than the height of the light emitting element. Further, the head of the fixing member can be formed in a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the fixing member can be subjected to surface treatment for reflecting light.

As a result, the first right-frame lamp substrate, the second right-frame lamp substrate, the third right-frame lamp substrate, the first left-frame lamp substrate, the second left-frame lamp substrate, and the third left-frame lamp substrate emit light. Although the total area of the element mounting surface is larger than that of the first title display substrate and the second title display substrate, the total number of fixing members for fixing to the predetermined mounting positions is greater than that of the first title display substrate and the second title display substrate. Since it is larger than the substrate, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be efficiently reflected.

In addition, in the above description, the screw 683 is used as the fixing member, but the fixing member is not limited to the screw 683 . As the fixing member, for example, a locking pin that is press-fitted into the locking hole and fixed may be used. In this case, when the lamp board is fixed to the predetermined mounting position with the locking pin, the head of the locking pin is exposed to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board. Further, in a state in which the lamp substrate is fixed to a predetermined mounting position by the locking pin, the height of the head of the locking pin is set larger than the height of the light emitting element with reference to the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board. . Furthermore, the head of the locking pin is formed in a convex curved shape, and the surface of the head of the locking pin is subjected to surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be reflected by the head of the locking pin, so that the head of the locking pin can appear to shine as if it were a light emitting element.

<25th embodiment>
The twenty-fifth embodiment relates to lighting control of the special symbol display device 531 of the pachinko game machine 500. FIG.
149 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 150 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 in the twenty-fifth embodiment as seen from the front side (player side).
As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the pachinko game machine 500 includes an outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown) and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. As shown in FIGS.
A game board 504 is provided in the center of the front frame 502 , and a game area is provided on the front side of the game board 504 .

Furthermore, the game area of the game board 504 is provided with a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports, and a starting port switch 533 for detecting the winning of the starting port 532, and a special symbol display. A device 531 and an image display device 543 are provided (see FIG. 135 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A)).
Furthermore, the special symbol display device 531 is a device that displays the lottery result based on the random number value acquired with the winning of the starting port 532 as a variation display and stop display of the symbols.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 500 includes a main control board 530 that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 540 that controls the output of effects (see FIG. 135 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (A)). Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 respectively include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like. Furthermore, the main control board 530 and the sub-control board 540 are electrically connected.
A starting switch 533 and a special symbol display device 531 are electrically connected to the main control board 530 .
Further, the main control board 530 includes lottery means 555 , symbol control means 556 , and reservation means 557 .

The lottery means 555 is means for performing a lottery (jackpot lottery, special pattern lottery, fluctuation pattern lottery) based on a random number value obtained with the winning of the starting port 532 as a trigger.
The symbol control means 557 is a means for controlling variable display and stop display of symbols in the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery results of the lottery means 555 . That is, the special symbol display device 531 is controlled by symbol control means 557 provided on the main control board 530 .
Furthermore, the holding means 556 is a means for holding the random number value acquired by the winning of the starting port 532 until the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the random number value is started.

When the game ball wins the starting hole 532 and the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on this random number value, the lottery means 555 performs a jackpot lottery, a special symbol lottery, And execute the fluctuation pattern lottery. In addition, the jackpot lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not the big win, the special pattern lottery is a lottery to determine the pattern (stop pattern) to be stopped and displayed on the special pattern display device 531, and the fluctuation pattern lottery is a special lottery. This is a lottery for determining the time (fluctuation time) for the pattern display device 531 to variably display the pattern. Based on these lottery results, the symbol control means 557 controls the variable display and stop display of symbols in the special symbol display device 531 .

Also, before the variable display of the symbols based on the previously acquired random number value is completed, the game ball enters the starting hole 532, the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, and the main control board 530 acquires the random number value. do. In this case, the holding means 556 holds the random number and the lottery result based on the random number until the variable display of the symbols based on the random number starts.
The holding means 556 can hold up to four random numbers and lottery results based on the random numbers. That is, the upper limit of the number of reservations is set to "4".

In addition, the lottery means 555 determines the variation pattern of "10 seconds" in the variation pattern lottery when the number of reservations is "0" to "2", and when the number of reservations is "3", in the variation pattern lottery A variation pattern of "5 seconds" is determined, and when the number of reservations is "4", a variation pattern of "1 second" is determined by a variation pattern lottery. As a result, when the number of reservations is "0" to "2", the fluctuation time of the special design is "10 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "3", the fluctuation time of the special design is "5 seconds". , When the number of reservations is "4", the variation time of the special symbol is "1 second". It should be noted that the fact that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened is referred to as "shortening of working hours".

Also, when a big win is achieved in a big win lottery, the game shifts to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the special game, a large winning opening (not shown) provided in the game area of the game board 504 is opened. Furthermore, after the end of the special game, the probability of winning a big win in a big win lottery shifts to a high probability state (probability variable state) in which the probability is higher than that of the normal game. Then, in the variable probability state, when the game is played a predetermined number of times (the number of variations of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number), the variable probability state is terminated and the game returns to the normal game.

FIG. 151(1) is a diagram showing eight LEDs 531a to 531h provided in the special symbol display device 531. FIG.
Also, FIG. 151(2) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the special symbol is stopped and displayed when the big win lottery is lost, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the lighting pattern at the time of the stop display of a design.
Furthermore, FIGS. 152(1) to 152(8) are diagrams showing lighting patterns during variable display of special symbols.

In FIGS. 151(1) to (3) and FIGS. 152(1) to (8), the eight LEDs 531a to 531h are denoted by "a" to "h".
In addition, in FIGS. 151 (2) to (3) and FIGS. 152 (1) to (8), lit LEDs are indicated by “●” (black circles), and extinguished LEDs are indicated by “○” (white circles). is shown.

As shown in FIG. 151(1), the special symbol display device 531 has eight LEDs 531a to 531h. The eight LEDs 531 a to 531 h provided in the special pattern display device 531 are controlled to be turned on or off by the pattern control means 557 provided in the main control board 530 .
Also, as shown in FIG. 151 (2), the lighting pattern at the time of stop display of the special symbols when the big winning lottery is lost is to turn on only one LED 531a and turn off the seven LEDs 531b to 531h. It is a thing. That is, the display mode in which only one LED 531a is turned on and the seven LEDs 531b to 531h are turned off corresponds to the stop design of the special design at the time of losing. In this display mode, it is displayed that the lottery result (game result) is lost.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151 (3), when the jackpot lottery wins a jackpot, the lighting pattern during the stop display of the special symbols is to turn on the four LEDs 531a, 531b, 531e and 531f, and 531c and 531d. , LED 531g, and LED 531h are turned off. That is, in FIG. 151 (3), the display mode in which the LED indicated by "●" (black circle) is turned on and the LED indicated by "○" (white circle) is turned off corresponds to the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of the big win. In this display mode, it is displayed that the lottery result (game result) is a big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 152(1) to (8), the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbols is to sequentially light the eight LEDs, LED531a to LED531h, one by one. When only one LED 531h shown in FIG. 152(8) is turned on and seven LEDs 531a to 531g are turned off, then only one LED 531a shown in FIG. 152(1) is turned on. , to turn off the seven LEDs 531b to 531h. That is, during the variable display of the special symbols, the display modes shown in FIGS. 152(1) to 152(8) are repeated.
In addition, the display mode when the special symbols are stopped and displayed when the big hit lottery shown in FIG. They have the same display mode.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing the timing of turning on or off each LED during variable display and stop display of special symbols when the number of reservations is "0" and the winning lottery is lost.
In FIG. 153, the variable display of the special symbols is started at the timing of "A". As a result, the game result (lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is hidden.

Also, in FIG. 153, at the timing of "A", the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode in which the light is turned off.
Furthermore, in FIG. 153, between "A" and "B", the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Between "A" and "B", the eight LEDs of LEDs 531a to 531h are sequentially lit one by one. Further, as described above, when the number of reservations is "0", the variation time of the special symbol is "10 seconds".

Then, at the timing of "B" in FIG. 153, the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the stop display is started. As a result, the game result is displayed.
Also, in FIG. 153, at the timing of "B", the display mode at the time of stop display of the special symbol at the time of loss shown in FIG. is turned off.
Furthermore, between "B" and "C" in FIG. 153, the stop display of the special symbols indicating that the big winning lottery is lost continues.

Then, at the timing of "C" in FIG. 153, the stop display of the special symbols is finished, and the variable display is started again. As a result, the game result is hidden again.
In addition, the LED 531a continues to light up from "B" to "D" in FIG. And, in FIG. 153, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode during the stop display of the special symbol at the time of loss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" It corresponds to the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbols.

As described above, the display mode during the stop display of the special symbols at the time of loss (FIG. 151 (2)) and the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbols (FIG. 152 (1)) are the same display. It is a mode. Therefore, even if the stop pattern of the special pattern at the time of loss shifts to the first pattern during the variable display, the lighting pattern of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special pattern display device 531 remains the same in appearance. is.

Thus, at the time of stop display of the special symbol at the time of loss, only one LED 531a lights up, and seven LEDs 531b to 531h go out (FIG. 151 (2)). After that, when the game ball enters the starting port 532, the game is started. At this time, the lottery means 555 executes the jackpot lottery, the special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern lottery, and the symbol control means 557 starts the variable display of the special symbols. Thereafter, the special pattern is variably displayed over the variation time determined by the variation pattern lottery, and when the variation time determined by the variation pattern lottery elapses, the special pattern determined by the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed. As a result, the game result (lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed, and the game ends.

Then, during the period from the start to the end of one game, any one of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 is lit and extinguished at least once, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed. A game result is displayed.
In FIG. 153, the number of reservations is "0", the variation pattern of "10 seconds" is determined in the variation pattern lottery, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for 10 seconds. ), the three LEDs 531a to 531c are turned on and off four times, and the five LEDs 531d to 531h are turned on and off three times.

In addition, in either a low probability state (regular game) with a predetermined probability of winning a jackpot lottery, or a high probability state (variable state) with a higher probability than a predetermined probability of winning a jackpot lottery. As indicated by 153, three LEDs 531a to 531c are lit and extinguished four times, and five LEDs 531d to 531h are lit and extinguished three times during the period from the start to the end of one game.
As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the LEDs (LED531a to LED531h) on the special symbol display device 531 are lit during the period from the start to the end of one game, so the special symbol display device 531 It is possible to check the presence or absence of failures for all the above LEDs.

FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the timing of turning on or off each LED during variable display and stop display of special symbols when the number of reservations is "4" and the winning lottery is lost.
As described above, when the number of holdings is "4", the variation pattern of "1 second" is determined by the variation pattern lottery. That is, when the number of reservations is "4", the variation time of the special symbol is 1 second. In FIG. 154, between "A" and "B", the special symbols are being changed and displayed.

In FIG. 154, the variable display of the special symbols is started at the timing of "A". As a result, the game result (lottery result of the jackpot lottery) is hidden. Also, in FIG. 154, at the timing of "A", the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbols shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode in which the light is turned off. This point is the same as in FIG.

Further, in FIG. 154, between "A" and "B", the eight LEDs, LED531a to LED531h, are sequentially lit one by one. In FIG. 154, between "A" and "B", three LEDs 531a to 531c are lit and extinguished twice, and five LEDs 531d to 531h are lit and extinguished once. Thus, in FIG. 154, the time between "A" and "B" is 1 second, which is shorter than in FIG. less.
Then, at the timing of "B" in FIG. 154, the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the stop display is started. As a result, the game result is displayed.

Also, in FIG. 154, at the timing of "B", the display mode at the time of stop display of the special symbol at the time of loss shown in FIG. is turned off. Furthermore, between "B" and "C" in FIG. 154, the stop display of the special symbols indicating that the big winning lottery is lost continues. Then, at the timing of "C" in FIG. 154, the stop display of the special symbols is finished, and the variable display is started again. As a result, the game result is hidden again. This point is the same as in FIG.

Also in FIG. 154, the LED 531a continues to illuminate from "B" to "D" in the same manner as in FIG. Then, in FIG. 154, the lighting of the LED 531a between "B" and "C" corresponds to the display mode during the stop display of the special symbol at the time of loss, and the lighting of the LED 531a between "C" and "D" It corresponds to the first display mode during the variable display of the special symbols.
Furthermore, in FIG. 154, the manner of lighting or extinguishing of each LED between "C" and "F" is the same as the manner of lighting or extinguishing of each LED between "A" and "C".

And even if the number of reservations becomes "4" and the fluctuation time of the special symbols becomes shorter than that in FIG. Any of the eight LEDs 531a to 531h on the special symbol display device 531 is turned on and off at least once. In FIG. 154, three LEDs 531a to 531c are lit and extinguished twice, and five LEDs 531d to 531h are lit and extinguished once during the period from the start to the end of one game. After that, the game result is displayed by stop-displaying the special symbols.

Also, in either the normal game or the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. Each is lit and extinguished once.
As a result, it is confirmed whether or not all the LEDs (LED531a to LED531h) on the special symbol display device 531 light up from the start to the end of one game even if the variation time of the special symbol becomes short. Since it can be made possible, it is possible to check whether or not there is a failure in all the LEDs on the special symbol display device 531 .

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the special symbol display device 531 has eight LEDs, but the number of LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 is not limited to eight.
The number of LEDs provided in the special symbol display device 531 may be more than eight, such as nine or ten, or less than eight, such as five or six.

(2) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 151(1), the LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 are arranged in two rows of four each, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The LEDs included in the special symbol display device 531 may be arranged, for example, in a ring.
Also, for example, the special symbol display device 531 may be configured using a 7-segment LED.

(3) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the number of reservations is "0" to "2", the special symbol variation time is set to "10 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "3", the special symbol variation time is set to "5 seconds", and when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to "1 second", but this is not restrictive.
The fluctuation time of the special symbols in each number of reservations can be set as appropriate.

(4) In the 25th embodiment, when the number of reservations is "0" and the jackpot lottery is lost, each LED is lit or extinguished in the pattern shown in FIG. 153, and the number of reservations is "4" and the jackpot lottery is lost. 154, each LED is turned on or off in the pattern shown in FIG. 154, but the pattern is not limited to this. Each LED on the special symbol display device 531 may be lit and extinguished at least once from the start to the end of one game, and each LED on the special symbol display device 531 from the start to the end of one game can be set appropriately.

(5) FIG. 155 shows, in the modification of the twenty-fifth embodiment, the lighting or extinguishing of each LED during variable display and stop display of special symbols when the number of reservations is "4" and the big winning lottery is lost. It is a time chart which shows a timing.
The modified example shown in FIG. 155 is different from FIG. 154 in that the LED 531a is once turned off at the timings of “C” and “F”, and is otherwise the same as FIG.

In the modification shown in FIG. 155, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531, the off display data for lighting or extinguishing in the pattern shown in FIG. and first variable display data for turning off the light. Similarly, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 is provided with second to eighth variable display data for lighting or extinguishing each pattern shown in FIGS. 152(2) to (8).

Also, the deviation display data and the first to eighth variable display data are stored in the ROM provided in the sub-control board 540. FIG.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 540 lights or extinguishes each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in FIG. memorize As a result, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 is lit or extinguished in the pattern shown in FIG. 151(2).
Similarly, when the sub-control board 540 lights or extinguishes each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 in the pattern shown in FIG. Stores variable display data. As a result, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 is lit or extinguished in the pattern shown in FIG. 152(1).

Between "B" and "C" in FIG. 155, the sub-control board 540 stores the deviation display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. As a result, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 is lit or extinguished in a pattern (FIG. 151 (2)) corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol at the time of loss.
155, between "C" and "D", the sub-control board 540 stores the first variable display data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. As a result, each LED provided in the special symbol display device 531 is lit or extinguished in the first pattern (FIG. 152 (1)) during the variable display of the special symbols.

Then, in the modification shown in FIG. 155, at timing "C", the sub-control board 540 clears the deviation display data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM, and then stores it in the predetermined storage area of the RWM. Store the first variable display data. In this way, the data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is rewritten from the deviation display data to the first variable display data. Therefore, in the modification shown in FIG. 155, the LED 531a appears to be turned off once at timing "C".
In FIG. 155, since the same processing as at timing "C" is performed at timing "F", the LED 531a appears to be extinguished once.

Also, in FIG. 155, by turning off the LED 531a once at the timings of "C" and "F", the player and the store clerk in the hall can see the special symbol display device 531, thereby completing one game. The timing at which the next game is started can be confirmed. That is, it is possible to grasp the division of the game.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, at the end of the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 (for example, when the losing display data is stored), an external signal indicating that one game has been played is output.
A game information display device (also referred to as a “data display”) is provided above the pachinko gaming machine 500, and external signals output from the pachinko gaming machine 500 are input to the gaming information display device. be.

Furthermore, the game information display device adds 1 to the numerical value indicating the number of games played each time an external signal indicating that one game has been played is input. By looking at this numerical value, the player can know the total number of games played on the pachinko gaming machine 500 for the current day and the past few days.
Even if the game player or the hall clerk cannot confirm the switching between the variable display and the stop display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 because of the high speed, the numerical value indicating the number of games played on the game information display device is updated. By seeing the (addition), the timing at which one game ends and the next game starts can be confirmed. That is, it is possible to grasp the division of the game.

<26th Embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to lighting control of LEDs provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 .
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing each LED provided on the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 156, on the main control board 50, a closing detection LED 59a, a left stop operation detection LED 59b, a middle stop operation detection LED 59c, a right stop operation detection LED 59d, a start operation detection LED 59e, a left index detection LED 59f, and a middle index detection. An LED 59g and a right index detection LED 59h are provided.
In FIG. 156, the eight LEDs are labeled “a” to “h”. All of these LEDs are controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board 50 .

The insertion detection LED 59a is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 and the insertion sensor 44 detects the inserted medal.
When the insertion sensor 44 is turned on (medals are detected), the main control board 50 turns on the insertion detection LED 59a, and when the insertion sensor 44 is turned off (medals are no longer detected), the main control board 50 The insertion detection LED 59a is extinguished.

The left stop operation detection LED 59b is an LED that lights up when the left stop switch 42 is operated.
When the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights the left stop operation detection LED 59b, and when the left stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The left stop operation detection LED 59b is turned off.

The middle stop operation detection LED 59c is an LED that lights up when the middle stop switch 42 is operated.
When the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights the middle stop operation detection LED 59c, and when the middle stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The middle stop operation detection LED 59c is turned off.

The right stop operation detection LED 59d is an LED that lights up when the right stop switch 42 is operated.
When the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights the right stop operation detection LED 59d, and when the right stop switch 42 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 The right stop operation detection LED 59d is turned off.

The start operation detection LED 59e is an LED that lights up when the start switch 41 is operated.
When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the main control board 50 lights the start operation detection LED 59e, and when the start switch 41 is turned off (released), the main control board 50 detects the start operation. LED 59e is turned off.

The left index detection LED 59 f is an LED that lights up when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 .
When the left reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the left index detection LED 59f and turns off the left reel sensor 33 (detects the index of the left reel 31). ), the main control board 50 turns off the left index detection LED 59f.

The middle index detection LED 59 g is an LED that lights up when the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index of the middle reel 31 .
When the middle reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the middle index detection LED 59g and turns off the middle reel sensor 33 (detects the index of the middle reel 31). ), the main control board 50 turns off the middle index detection LED 59g.

The right index detection LED 59 h is an LED that lights up when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31 .
When the right reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 turns on the right index detection LED 59h, and the right reel sensor 33 is turned off (detects the index of the right reel 31). ), the main control board 50 turns off the right index detection LED 59h.

As shown in FIG. 146 of the twenty-fourth embodiment (B), the symbol display device has three reels 31 (left, middle, right) and three reels (left, middle) for driving each reel 31, respectively. , right) motor 32 and three (left, middle, right) reel sensors 33 for detecting the position of each reel 31 respectively.
Each reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 respectively. Also, each reel 31 is provided with one index. Furthermore, each index is detectable by the corresponding reel sensor 33 .

The position of each reel 31 at the moment when each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index is taken as a reference position.
Then, when each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index, a signal (index signal) indicating that effect is input to the main control board 50 . Thereby, the main control board 50 can determine that each reel 31 has passed the reference position each time each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 counts the number of pulses of the drive signal output to each (stepping) motor 32 from the moment each reel sensor 33 detects the corresponding index, thereby allowing each reel 31 to move to the reference position. It is possible to determine how much the position is rotated from .

FIG. 157(1) shows a lighting pattern when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31. FIG. FIG. 157(2) shows a lighting pattern when the middle reel sensor 33 detects the index of the middle reel 31. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 157(3) is a diagram showing a lighting pattern when the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31. As shown in FIG.
In FIGS. 157(1) to (3), the eight LEDs are denoted by letters “a” to “h”. In FIGS. 157(1) to 157(3), lit LEDs are indicated by “●” (black circles), and unlit LEDs are indicated by “◯” (white circles).

As shown in FIG. 157(1), when the left reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the left reel 31), the main control board 50 lights the left index detection LED 59f. In FIG. 157(1), the insertion sensor 44, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, the start switch 41, the middle reel sensor 33, and the right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(2), when the middle reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the middle reel 31), the main control board 50 lights the middle index detection LED 59g. In FIG. 157(2), the insertion sensor 44, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, the start switch 41, the left reel sensor 33, and the right reel sensor 33 are all off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157(3), when the right reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the right reel 31), the main control board 50 lights the right index detection LED 59h. In FIG. 157(3), the insertion sensor 44, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, the start switch 41, the left reel sensor 33, and the middle reel sensor 33 are all off.

FIG. 158 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the previous game ended with the left reel sensor 33 detecting the index of the left reel 31 and the current game started under this situation.
As described above, when the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31, the left index detection LED 59f lights up. When the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f remains illuminated even after the game ends.

In FIG. 158, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) with the specified number of medals bet at timing "A", the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 rotate. starts. Thus, a game on the slot machine 10 is started. Further, when the rotation of the left reel 31 starts, the left reel sensor 33 stops detecting the index of the left reel 31 . As a result, the left index detection LED 59f is extinguished.

In FIG. 158, between "A" and "B" is a section during which the reel 31 is accelerating. Even if the index is detected by the reel sensor 33 between "A" and "B", it is before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, so this index detection is for validating the stop operation. not treated as
In FIG. 158, all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B". After all the reels 31 have reached a constant speed state, when the index is detected by the reel sensor 33 for all the reels 31, the operation of each stop switch 42 can be accepted. That is, each reel 31 can be stopped.

In FIG. 158, after all the reels 31 have reached the constant speed state, the left reel sensor 33 detects the index of the left reel 31 at the timing of "C". The index will be detected. As a result, each reel 31 can be stopped at timing "C".
Further, in the slot machine 10, the game result is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, being able to stop each reel 31 means being able to display the game result (symbol combination). In FIG. 158, the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed at timing "C".
Further, in FIG. 158, between "A" and "C" is a section in which the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted although the reel 31 is rotating. That is, it is a section in which the reel 31 cannot be stopped.

In FIG. 158, when the left stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at timing "D", the left reel 31 is stopped and stopped at timing "E". Between "C" and "D" is a section where the left reel 31 can be stopped, and between "D" and "E" is a section where the left reel 31 is decelerating.
In FIG. 158, when the middle stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at timing "F", stop control of the middle reel 31 is performed, and at timing "G", the middle reel 31 stops. Further, between "C" and "F" is a section in which the middle reel 31 can be stopped, and between "F" and "G" is a section where the middle reel 31 is decelerating.

In FIG. 158, when the right stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) at timing "H", the right reel 31 is stopped and stopped at timing "I". Further, the period from "C" to "H" is a section in which the right reel 31 can be stopped, and the period from "H" to "I" is a section in which the right reel 31 is decelerating.
Then, at the timing of "I" in FIG. 158, all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. Thus, the game at the slot machine 10 is finished.

Thus, the left reel sensor 33 detects the index, but the middle reel sensor 3
3 and the right reel sensor 33 do not detect the index, the left index detection LED 59f is turned on, and the middle index detection LED 59g and the right index detection LED 59h are turned off. In this state, when the prescribed number of medals are betted and the start switch 41 is turned on, the game is started. At this time, the rotation of the three reels 31 starts. After that, when all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state and the indexes of all the reels 31 are detected by the reel sensors 33, each reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it becomes possible to display the game result. When all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the game result (symbol combination) is displayed and the game ends.

During the period from the start of the game until the stop operation of each reel 31 becomes possible (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed), the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59g on the main control board 50 are displayed. All of the detection LEDs 59h are lit and extinguished at least once. After that, each reel 31 can be stopped.
As a result, it is confirmed whether or not the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 light up during the period from the start of the game until the reels 31 can be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h.

FIG. 159 is a time chart showing an example of the operation when the game is started this time under the condition that the previous game was ended while none of the reel sensors 33 detected the index.
When none of the reel sensors 33 detect the index, the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h are all extinguished. When the game ends in this state, the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h remain off even after the game ends.

In FIG. 159, when the start switch 41 is turned on with the specified number of medals bet at timing "A", the rotation of the three reels 31 starts. Thus, a game on the slot machine 10 is started.
In FIG. 159, all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state at timing "B". Further, in FIG. 159, the reel 31 is accelerating between "A" and "B". Furthermore, in FIG. 159, between "A" and "B", the index of the left reel 31 is detected by the left reel sensor 33, and the left index detection LED 59f lights up, but the left reel 31 reaches the constant speed state. detection of this index is not treated as enabling the stop operation.

In FIG. 159, after all the reels 31 reach the constant speed state, the index of the left reel 31 is detected by the left reel sensor 33 at timing "C". will detect the index. As a result, the reels 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed) at the timing of "C".
Further, in FIG. 159, a section from "A" to "C" is a section in which the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (the reel 31 cannot be stopped) although the reel 31 is rotating.
Furthermore, the operation after the timing of "D" in FIG. 159 is the same as in FIG.
Then, at the timing of "I" in FIG. 159, all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. Thus, the game at the slot machine 10 is finished.

In this way, even when the previous game ends with none of the reel sensors 33 detecting the index, each reel 31 can be stopped from the start of the current game (game result (symbol combination) can be displayed). Until then, the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 are all turned on and off at least once.
This makes it possible to check whether or not the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 light up before the stop operation of each reel 31 becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to check whether or not the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h have failed.

FIG. 160 is a time chart showing another example of the operation when the game is started this time under the condition that the previous game was ended while none of the reel sensors 33 detected the index.
In FIG. 160, similarly to FIG. 159, none of the reel sensors 33 detect the index, and therefore the left index detection LED 59f, middle index detection LED 59g, and right index detection LED 59h are all extinguished. , the previous game ends.

Also in FIG. 160, similarly to FIG. 159, at timing "A", the start switch 41 is turned on with the specified number of medals bet, and the game is started. At this time, the three reels 31 start rotating.
Furthermore, in FIG. 160, similarly to FIG. 159, all the reels 31 reach the constant speed state at timing "B". In FIG. 160, between "A" and "B" is a section in which the reel 31 is accelerating.

In FIG. 160, the index is not detected by the reel sensor 33 between "A" and "B", and after all the reels 31 reach the constant speed state at the timing of "B", When the right reel sensor 33 detects the index of the right reel 31 at timing “C”, the index of all the reels 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 . As a result, at the timing of "C", each reel 31 can be stopped (the game result (symbol combination) can be displayed).

In FIG. 160, between "A" and "C", although the reel 31 is rotating, operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (reel 31 cannot be stopped). 158 and FIG. 159.
Furthermore, the operation after the timing of "D" in FIG. 160 is the same as in FIGS.
Then, at the timing of "I" in FIG. 160, all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result (symbol combination) is displayed. Thus, the game at the slot machine 10 is finished.

Thus, in FIG. 160 as well, the left index detection LED 59f on the main control board 50, middle Both the index detection LED 59g and the right index detection LED 59h are turned on and off at least once.
This makes it possible to check whether or not the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h on the main control board 50 light up before the stop operation of each reel 31 becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to check whether or not the left index detection LED 59f, the middle index detection LED 59g, and the right index detection LED 59h have failed.

As described above in the twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth embodiments, in both the pachinko game machine and the slot machine, after the game start condition is satisfied until the game result can be displayed, the main A plurality of LEDs controlled by a control board are turned on and off at least once.
In particular, in a situation where one of the plurality of LEDs controlled by the main control board is lit and the other LEDs are extinguished, even if the game start conditions are met, the game result can be displayed. In between, a plurality of LEDs controlled by the main control board are turned on and off at least once.
As a result, in both the pachinko game machine and the slot machine, after the game start condition is satisfied and before the game result can be displayed, the plurality of LEDs controlled by the main control board are checked for failure. can be made verifiable.

<27th Embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to the thickness of lead wires (also referred to as "signal lines"), and corresponds to a modification of the twenty-first embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the start-related lead wires are directly connected to the main control board 530, but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the start-related lead wires are not directly connected to the main control board 50, but are connected to the relay board 300. is connected to the main control board 50 via .

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing various lead wires, relay board 300, and main control board 50 in the twenty-seventh embodiment.
In the other embodiments including the first embodiment, the term "start switch 41" is used, but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the term "start switch unit 41" is used.
The start switch unit 41 detects movement of a start lever 41a (operating body) operated by a player by means of a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element provided inside, and outputs the signal to the outside.
A connector 41b for outputting a signal is attached to the rear end of the start switch unit 41. As shown in FIG.

The harness J is composed of three lead wires j1, j2, and j3, and harness J connector terminals are attached to both ends thereof. In other words, the three lead wires j1, j2, and j3 are combined as a harness J into one connector terminal. A harness J connector terminal at one end of the harness J is connected to the connector 41 b of the start switch unit 41 , and a harness J connector terminal at the other end is connected to the connector 300 a mounted on the relay board 300 .

A lead wire j1 is a lead wire for outputting a signal from the light emitting element of the start switch unit 41, and a lead wire j2 is a lead wire for outputting a signal from the light receiving element of the start switch unit 41. FIG. Also, the lead j3 is a GND line.
As described above, the "starting lead wire" in the twenty-seventh embodiment corresponds to the lead wires j1 and j2. However, this is not restrictive, and the GND wire of the lead wire for starting may be included in the "lead wire for starting". In this case, the "starting leads" correspond to leads j1, j2 and j3.

By connecting these lead wires j1 to j3 to the relay board 300, the light-emitting element signal and the light-receiving element signal of the start switch unit 41 (these are collectively referred to as start signals) can be input to the relay board 300. becomes.
For example, when the signal on the lead wire j1 (light emitting element) is turned on and the signal on the lead wire j2 (light receiving element) is turned off when the start lever 41a is not operated, the lead wire j1 The operation of the start lever 41a is detected based on the fact that the signal of the (light emitting element) is turned on and the signal of the lead wire j2 (light receiving element) is turned on.

Each of the lead wires j1 to j3 has a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, but includes a substantially circular cross section). Furthermore, the thicknesses (cross-sectional diameters) of the lead wires j1 to j3 are all formed to be "α" (the same). Strictly speaking, lead wires do not have completely the same thickness because lead wires have manufacturing errors to some extent. Therefore, the “same thickness” includes the range of “±ε”, where “ε” is the range of manufacturing error (variation). In other words, the same thickness "α" is synonymous with "α±ε".
Moreover, the cross-sections of the lead wires j1 to j3 are not limited to the circular shape, and may be non-circular in cross-section. In this case, the “thickness” of the lead wire refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in the cross-sectional shape.

Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the three lead wires j1 to j3 have the same thickness "α". The wire j3 is not limited to have the same thickness as the lead wires j1 and j2, and may be thinner than the lead wires j1 and j2, or may be thicker than the lead wires j1 and j2. In the following description, it is assumed that the three lead wires j1 to j3 have the same thickness "α".

The start switch unit 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 141, is attached to the front door 12 so that the player can operate the start lever 41a. On the other hand, the main control board 50 is attached to the back plate 13b of the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 22, for example.
On the other hand, the relay board 300 is attached to the back side of the front door 12, for example. Signals from various switches (bed switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, etc.) attached to the front surface of the front door 12 are input to the relay board 300. It is configured to be input from the board 300 to the main control board 50 via the harness L.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the relay board 300, a connector 300b is mounted. Although connectors 300a to 300c are illustrated as connectors on relay board 300 in FIG. 161, this does not mean that the connectors are limited to these.
On the other hand, the lead wire k1 of the bed switch 40, the lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42, and the lead wire k3 of the settlement switch 43 are collectively referred to as a harness K, which are combined into one harness K connector terminal. In FIG. 161, one lead wire k2 of the stop switch 42 is illustrated, but actually, each of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 has a lead wire. That is, the lead wire k2 is composed of three lead wires k2-L (left stop switch 42), k2-C (middle stop switch 42), and k2-R (right stop switch 42). In the following description, "lead wire k2" means one lead wire k2 out of three lead wires k2.
Then, the harness K connector terminal is connected to the connector 300 b on the relay board 300 . As a result, the bet switch signal, each stop switch signal, and the settlement switch signal are also input to the relay board 300 .

Each of the lead wires k1, k2, and k3 has a circular cross section (not limited to a perfect circle, but includes a substantially circular cross section). Here, when the thicknesses (cross-sectional diameters) of the lead wires k1, k2, and k3 are β1, β2, and β3, respectively, the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 may be the same or different. . In other words, "β1=β2=β3" or "β1≠β2, β1≠β3, β2≠β3".
Further, similarly to the lead wires j1 to j3, the lead wires k1 to k3 are not limited to having a circular cross section, and may have a non-circular cross section. In this case, the "thickness" of the lead wires k1 to k3 refers to the maximum dimension (maximum length) in cross section.
Furthermore, similarly to the lead wires j1 to j3, the lead wires k1 to k3 have the same thickness within the range of "±ε", where "ε" is the range of manufacturing error (variation).

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when the minimum thickness among the thicknesses β1, β2, and β3 of the lead wires k1 to k3 is "βmin", the relationship between the thickness "α" of the lead wires j1 to j3 is "α<βmin”.
In other words,
α<β1, α<β2, and α<β3
is.
In this way, the lead wires j1 and j2 (and j3 may be included) relating to starting are thin lead wires (particularly, thinner than the lead wires for other operation switch signals), so that the lead wires relating to starting can be made thinner. can be made as inconspicuous as possible. In addition, by using a thin lead wire for starting, it becomes easier to disconnect when fraudulent acts (remodeling, etc.) are performed, so fraudulent acts are difficult and abnormalities are detected in the event of fraudulent acts. be easily discovered. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraud than thin lead wires. This is because it is difficult to

As shown in FIG. 161, a connector 300c is mounted on the relay board 300, and a connector 50b is mounted on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. A harness L connector terminal at one end of the harness L is connected to the connector 300 c of the relay board 300 , and a harness L connector terminal at the other end of the harness L is connected to the connector 50 b of the main control board 50 .
A start signal, a bet signal, a stop signal, and a settlement signal are input from the relay board 300 to the main control board 50 through the harness L.

In the example of FIG. 161, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 are combined into one connector terminal, and the lead wires k1 to k3 for the bet signal, stop signal, and settlement signal are combined into one connector terminal. In other words, the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 for the bet signal or the like are provided as separate connector terminals.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wires j1 to j3 of the start switch unit 41 and the lead wires k1 to k3 for the bet signal, etc., may all be combined into one connector terminal and connected to the connector on the relay board 300. good. In this case also, the thinnest lead wires in the one connector terminal are the start-related lead wires j1 and j2 (and j3 may be included).

Although the twenty-seventh embodiment has been described above, the first to twenty-seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, but are implemented in combination as appropriate. It is possible to

<Appendix>
The invention described in the original specification, etc. of the present application (original invention) can be, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 38. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the inventions described in this specification are not meant to be limited to inventions 1 to 38 originally.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a game machine that does not execute processing related to game media after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off a blocker before executing backup processing as power-off processing, even if medals are inserted during execution of backup processing, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, there is known a technique of not performing the medal addition process (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power failure occurs at the moment a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power shutdown process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. In terms of control, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process (the medal bet process or the medal credit process) after the power failure.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to prevent addition processing of game media from being executed even when a power failure occurs substantially at the same time when game media are inserted from a game medium slot. .

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 1 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A))
a game medium slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in a passage (medal passage) for game media (medals) inserted from a game medium slot, and is in a state (on state) that permits passage of game media or a state (off state) that disallows passage of game media. ) controllable blocker (45);
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) provided in the path of the game medium inserted from the game medium insertion port and capable of detecting the game medium (the detection means B is downstream of the detection means A). ) and
When an event occurs in which power supply is interrupted while the blocker is controlled to allow the passage of game media, the power supply interrupt event is detected, and the game media is removed. Let T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) be the time until the blocker is controlled to disallow passage,
When the game medium is released from the game medium slot into the gaming machine under the condition that the blocker is controlled to permit passage of the game medium, the game medium is invisible from the front of the gaming machine. From the time when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) to when the game medium is detected by the detection means B and when the game medium is no longer detected by the detection means B (position M4 in FIG. 2) When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the game medium is released from the game medium inlet into the gaming machine, and when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the power is cut off. In this case, until the detection means B stops detecting the game medium, the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage of the game medium by detecting an event in which the supply of power is interrupted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game media are not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the addition processing (betting processing and credit processing) of the game media is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is cut immediately after the game medium is released into the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game media from being executed after the power failure occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to a gate trace of a substrate case in a game machine provided with a substrate case in which a control substrate is housed.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, a board case is known which accommodates a main control board inside. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, gate traces remain on the substrate case. A technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the trace of the gate on the substrate case is unclear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the inside of the main control board may be accessed by opening the gate mark.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the use of the gate traces of the substrate case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 (The corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
a predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function;
a control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (the surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A substrate case (substrate case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.) and accommodates the control substrate,
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be visually recognized,
A gate trace (57b) during molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate,
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the trace of the gate.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC on the control substrate is not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. can be prevented.
In addition, since there is no gate trace of the substrate case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control substrate, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate trace. Accordingly, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a predetermined IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board cannot output a normal effect.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of invention 3 (the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
A sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub-control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board is capable of outputting an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state, when information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. An effect (effect when the reel corresponding to a predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, at the "N+a" game, information from the main control board can be received, and thereafter, at the "N+a" game, information is received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch has been operated. When, the effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (the effect following the predetermined effect, and the effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. After that, when predetermined information is received in the "N+a+1" game, an effect for the "N+a+1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, an effect following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game shifts to the "N+a+1" game, the sudden change of the performance due to the return of communication during the "N+a" game can be eliminated. As a result, it is possible to output an effect that does not cause discomfort before and after the disconnection occurs.

4. Original Invention 4
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a game machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. After stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next stop switch operation is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept the stop operation even if the second stop switch is operated from the time the first stop switch is operated until the reel status becomes the stopped state ( For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, if the time from when the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted is long, the game cannot be finished at high speed.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 4 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
a reel (31);
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
Reel control means (65) for driving and controlling the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on detection of operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
Internal lottery means (role lottery means 61) and
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is pushed. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off until the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated for a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under the condition that all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is obtained. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, an excitation state (four-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses after the excitation state. is configured to terminate the excitation state when
Let T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) be the time from the moment the stop button pushed to the deepest position is released until the sensor is turned off, and let T2 be the predetermined time,
T1<T2
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it was assumed that the start of the excitation state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest position is released are at the same time. Sometimes the energized state ends after the sensor turns off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. original invention 5
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 5 The original invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, JP-A-2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk. When a constant current is supplied to the DC motor, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving the hopper motor until the first medal is discharged. The required time is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor rotates at a constant speed, and the player may feel that the first medal ejection is delayed.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal is delayed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 5 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
a hopper (35) for storing medals;
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the driving of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (eight pieces) of holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disc rotates, the tokens held in the holding section are sequentially discharged from the discharge section (103),
A first position is defined as a position of the holding section holding the last discharged medal at the moment when the last discharged medal in one payout process is discharged from the discharging section;
A second position is a position of the holding section that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting section,
When the one payout process ends, the control means is configured such that the holding section holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between a first position and a second position. and controlling the driving of the hopper motor so as to stop the rotation of the hopper disk.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holder that holds the first ejected token is stopped between the first position and the second position, it takes a long time to reach the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when it stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. Feelings can be hidden from the player.

6. original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board mounted inside the cabinet and the sub-control board mounted on the rear surface of the front door.
In a conventional game machine, there is known one having an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. Moreover, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor explodes.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect and the electrolytic solution scatters. Another object of the present invention is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a defect.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 6 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control board (80) that controls the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
An electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board. Even if the electrolyte scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing malfunction of the main CPU.
Also, even if the electrolytic capacitor explodes, the main CPU can be prevented from directly receiving the impact, thereby preventing damage to the main CPU.

7. original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and effect output control on the sub control board side.
In the conventional game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of performance contents, and each performance content is different when the special role is won (internal) and when the special role is not won (non-internal). have different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery both during internal and non-internal operations.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 7 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (ninth embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each reel;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) that controls the production,
The main control means is
An internal lottery that draws lots so that there are cases where the first lottery results (e.g., "BB" wins alone while not inside) or the second lottery results (e.g., "no wins" while inside BB) Means (role lottery means 61),
a plurality of stop position determination tables that define stop positions of the reels corresponding to positions of the reels at the moment the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using one of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop positions of the reels in the game in which the first lottery result is obtained and in the game in which the second lottery result is obtained, using the same stop position determination table;
The sub-control means is
a plurality of effect determination tables that define effects to be output;
An effect output control means (91) that determines the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables and outputs the determined effect,
The effect output control means determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means on the side of the main control means stops in the same manner in the game in which the internal lottery means results in the first lottery result and the game in which the internal lottery means results in the second lottery result. The stop position of the reel is determined using the position determination table, but the effect output control means on the side of the sub-control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thus, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. original invention 8
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional game machine, a protruding side protruding outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known to bend the gap between the cabinet and the front door to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is slightly opened so that the protruding side is separated from the front door so that foreign matter can enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent a fraudulent act of slightly opening the front door and allowing a foreign object to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 8 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) openably attached to the cabinet;
a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing portion (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed is provided at the bottom of the cabinet,
A second closing portion (12a) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position below the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door,
A third closing portion (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door,
When the front door is closed, the first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
The first closing portion is arranged between the second closing portion and the third closing portion even when the front door is at the detection start position.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing portion and the third closing portion are detected. The first blocking part is pulled out from between. Also, when the door sensor detects that the front door is open, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the fact that the front door is open can be notified without the first closing portion coming out from between the second closing portion and the third closing portion before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open. Even in the possible position, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of foreign objects entering through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. original invention 9
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section display.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having an advantageous section display is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous interval indicator, lighting control of the advantageous interval indicator at the time of recovery from power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from a power failure.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 9 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
An advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section,
After the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is illuminated, when the power supply is resumed while the setting change switch is turned off, the advantageous interval indicator is turned off after the activation of interrupt processing. Make it possible to execute processing for lighting,
Processing for turning off the advantageous interval indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is interrupted while the advantageous interval indicator is lit. After executing

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation at the time of recovery from power failure.

10. original invention 10
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
A conventional gaming machine generally has three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to use four reels and stop buttons in conventional gaming machines. However, if the number of stop buttons is four, there is a problem that the stop button operation error tends to occur at the time of AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult for the stop button to be erroneously operated when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(b) Means for Solving the Problem of the Original Invention 10 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
four reels (31A-31D);
Four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, both the left and right stop buttons can be operated using the left and right ends of the operation button as marks. , the operation error of the stop button can be made less likely to occur.

11. original invention 11
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 11 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of indicating a specified number.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that allows a game to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even in a game that can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 11 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When an operation mode is notified in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquisition number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, the game can be started when a game value of at least a prescribed number of a plurality of prescribed numbers (“2” or “3”) is inserted,
In the information game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the information game state, when the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (in FIG. 42 , displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, it should be displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode ("0A" is displayed when the specified number is "2"). Characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, it is possible to display the information corresponding to the specified number at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify an appropriate specified number in the game.
Also, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. original invention 12
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is requested to initialize information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, after the AT is finished, there is a case where the next AT is won early, and there is a case where it is desired to take over the difference in the number of ATs from the previous AT.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to enable the transfer of the difference number of sheets from the previous informing game state (AT) while initializing the information on the advantageous interval at the end of the advantageous interval.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 12 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to "0". a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores a value of
a second difference number counter (sub-difference number counter) for storing an accumulated difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value in the second control means (sub-control board 80);
At the end of the advantageous interval, the first difference counter may be cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous interval, so that the rule of initializing the information on the advantageous interval can be complied with. In addition, there is a case where the second difference number counter is not cleared, and in that case, it is possible to take over the difference number of the previous information game state at the start of the next information game state.

13. original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in an information game state.
Conventionally, there is known a game machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number during AT (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given as to how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning a replay.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number at the time of winning a replay.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 13 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42);
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
a differential number counter for storing a cumulative difference number indicating the difference between the number of gaming value bets and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. In a game in which at least a minor win is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is terminated without judging the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for ending (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter updating process (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (step S434). ”) makes it possible to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2. In the game winning the replay, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference number counter is not judged (step S434). without executing the process) to execute the process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter does not satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous interval ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is not updated. is a value that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, proceed to step S434), and the value ("Yes" in step S434), the processing for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game in which a replay is won, regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous interval counter satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the difference counter is updated. is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number in the game in which the replay is won.
Furthermore, speeding up of program processing can be achieved.

14. original invention 14
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function in a predetermined prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines having an instruction function have been known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the prescribed number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 14 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
An information game state (AT) in which an instruction function for informing the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the information game state can be executed,
an advantageous interval counter (advantageous interval clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous interval;
An information game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, the number of games played or the difference number) related to the information game state,
Having a game in which at least a first specified number (specified number "3") or a second specified number (specified number "2") of gaming values can be inserted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, the processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (see FIG. 48 , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the second specified number being inserted, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the information game state, in the game started based on the first specified number being inserted, it is possible to update the advantageous interval counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game making it possible to update the counter (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the game started based on the introduction of the second specified number in the information game state, it is possible to update the advantageous section counter (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game counter Make update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 According to the original invention, the advantageous interval counter can be updated by either the first specified number or the second specified number of games, thereby optimizing the advantageous interval. .
In addition, by not updating the information game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the information game counter. can.

15. original invention 15
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 15 The original invention relates to a game machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it is known to use a harness composed of a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of a game machine. One of the signal lines is a signal line for starting.
In the prior art, since the start-related signal is used in a lottery, it is necessary to suppress any bullying with respect to the start-related signal line.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult to specify the signal line related to the start and to suppress the goto behavior.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 15 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (21st embodiment) is
In a game machine (slot machine 10, pachinko game machine 500) having a control board (main control board 50, 530),
Having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of a game (for example, lead wire No. 7 of harness D in FIG. 111),
The second signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (e.g., lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111) are both A signal line different from the signal line for starting a game,
the first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it is possible to make it difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which any one of a plurality of set values can be set.
In the prior art, for example, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change process ends, and it was not possible to easily grasp the timing at which the setting change process ended from the outside.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, in the case where the game is started immediately after the setting change process is completed, if the completion of the setting change process is notified, the notification of the completion of the setting change process and the notification output in the game are the same. There is a risk that it will be output (overlapping) at the same time, and there is a risk that it will be difficult to understand the important information that is output in the game.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing the degree of advantage for a player,
Specific operation detecting means for detecting that a specific operation is performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535);
a speaker (22, 542);
In the setting change state, when the condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96) from the speaker. and
The game start condition (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number has been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated. In the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the game ball has entered the start port 532). In one game that is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 (“T12” or “T22” in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied after shifting to the normal state,
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, the following equation is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0) )
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if the game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is played before the game ends. Since the output is finished, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating the end of the setting change state.

17. original invention 17
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the light emission of the light emitting means mounted on the lamp substrate can be clearly seen.
A known game machine includes a lamp substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and a lamp cover that covers the lamp substrate, and the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky-white resin material. (for example, JP-A-2015-196069).
Here, the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate is generally green or black.
However, if the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky-white resin material, the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate may be seen through when the LED is turned off. There is a possibility that it will appear to emit light in a color different from the set color.
Further, even when the lamp cover is made of a colorless translucent resin material, the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate can be seen through when the LED is turned off, and the color of the LED mounting surface can be seen through when the LED is turned off. There is a possibility that it will appear to emit light in a different color.
The original problem to be solved by the invention was to prevent the appearance of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate from being seen through the lamp cover, and to make the color of the LEDs look beautiful when they emit light. be.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 17 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with an openable front door (eg, glass door 505),
There is a lamp cover (for example, upper frame lamp cover 613) covering a lamp substrate (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting means (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted,
At least part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same color or a similar color when the light emitting means emits light in one color,
At least a part of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is substantially white.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 17 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is configured in substantially white color, when the light emitting means is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if you can see through, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming bad.
In addition, when the light emitting means emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of a substantially white color, it can be made to appear to emit light in the color exactly as set by the light emitting means.

18. original invention 18
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 18 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 18 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (for example, right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp substrate (for example, right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion (for example, the right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is mounted;
a cover attachment portion (for example, right frame cover attachment portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The lamp substrate has a substantially rectangular shape,
The width of the lamp substrate in the lateral direction (“W1” in FIG. 116) is substantially the same as the width of the substrate mounting portion in the lateral direction (“W2” in FIG. 124). and

(c) Effect of Original Invention 18 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, since the width of the lamp substrate in the lateral direction and the width of the substrate mounting portion in the lateral direction are substantially the same, the substrate mounting portion can be covered with the lamp substrate, and the light emitting element can be mounted on the lamp substrate. Since the surface can function as a reflector, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

19. original invention 19
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 19 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 19 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610) on an openable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp substrate (for example, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted,
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion (eg, upper frame right side board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is mounted;
a cover attachment portion (for example, upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
A fixture (for example, a screw 683a) used when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion has an exposed portion (screw head 689) exposed to the mounting surface side,
The height of the exposed portion from the mounting surface ("T1" in FIG. 123) is larger than the height of the light emitting element from the mounting surface ("T2" in FIG. 123),
The exposed portion is subjected to a surface treatment (for example, silver plating) that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, so when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, by setting the height of the exposed portion from the light emitting element mounting surface to be greater than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface and applying a surface treatment to the exposed portion to reflect the light emitted from the light emitting element, Since the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the exposed portion, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.

20. original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 20 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 20 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (for example, upper frame lamp section 610) on an openable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp substrate (for example, the upper frame right lamp substrate 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641d) are mounted,
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion (eg, upper frame right side board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is mounted;
a cover attachment portion (for example, upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The lamp substrate has a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which a positioning member (positioning boss 682a) is inserted when the lamp substrate is positioned at a predetermined position of the substrate mounting portion. A fixing hole (fixing hole 686a) used when fixing to the mounting portion is provided in close proximity,
The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different,
The positioning member has a projecting portion (projecting portion 687) that projects toward the mounting surface when the lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position of the board mounting portion,
The protruding portion is characterized by being formed in a convex curved shape.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 20 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, since the opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are made different, when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion, the positioning hole and the fixing hole are not mistaken. It is possible to proceed with the assembly work smoothly.
Furthermore, since the protruding portion of the positioning member is formed in a convex curved shape, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the convex curved protruding portion, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen. .

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 21 Same as the problem of original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 21 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (for example, right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
A lamp substrate (for example, right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion (for example, the right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is mounted;
a cover attachment portion (for example, right frame cover attachment portion 654) to which the lamp cover is attached;
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The lamp cover is characterized by having a lens portion (lens portion 670) formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 21 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, since the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the lamp cover can be reduced while the light emitted from the light emitting element can be obtained. can be seen more clearly by the lens part.

22. original invention 22
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 22 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 22 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (eg, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (eg, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
Lamp substrates (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged above the front door;
a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on the side portion of the front door;
The upper lamp part and the side lamp part each have the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
When a specific lottery result (a big win in a jackpot lottery) is obtained, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates are arranged in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result. It is characterized in that it is controlled to emit light (each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255").

(c) Effect of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, by causing the light-emitting elements to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a specific lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the specific lottery result by clear light.

23. original invention 23
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 23 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 23 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (eg, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (eg, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
Lamp substrates (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged above the front door;
a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on the side portion of the front door;
The upper lamp part and the side lamp part each have the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
When the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result (a big win in a jackpot lottery) is obtained, the light-emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates, It is characterized in that it is controlled to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Further, when the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result is obtained, the light emitting element emits white light to indicate the opening of the front door or the specific lottery result with clear light. It is possible to notify hall clerks and players.

24. original invention 24
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 24 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 24 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (eg, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (eg, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
Lamp substrates (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged above the front door;
a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on the side portion of the front door;
The upper lamp part and the side lamp part each have the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
When a setting change state in which the advantage to the player can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the advantage cannot be changed but can be confirmed, the lamp substrate is mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates. and controlling the light-emitting element to emit at least white light.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 24 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light-emitting element emits white light so that the hall clerk can be notified by the clear light that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled. can let you know.

25. original invention 25
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 25 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 25 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (eg, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (eg, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
Lamp substrates (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged above the front door;
a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on the side portion of the front door;
The upper lamp part and the side lamp part each have the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
The light-emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp substrates is controlled to emit at least white light when returning from a power failure.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 25 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, when the power is restored from the interruption, the light-emitting element emits white light, so that it is possible to notify the staff in the hall with clear light that the restoration from the power interruption is in progress.

26. original invention 26
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 26 Same as the problem of the original invention 17.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 26 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp section (eg, upper frame lamp section 610 and right frame lamp section 620) on an openable and closable front door (eg, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp part is
Lamp substrates (for example, upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and right frame lamp substrate 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 641k) are mounted;
a lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
a board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
a cover attachment portion to which the lamp cover is attached (for example, an upper frame right side cover attachment portion 652 and a right frame cover attachment portion 654);
The lamp cover has a colorless or white translucent part,
The mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white,
The decorative lamp part is
an upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged above the front door;
a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on the side portion of the front door;
The upper lamp part and the side lamp part each have the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), so that a plurality of the lamp substrates are provided,
It is mounted on at least one lamp substrate (right frame lamp substrate 621) among the plurality of lamp substrates during a predetermined game in which the lottery means does not win (during a game in which the jackpot lottery fails). controlling the light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to k) to emit light;
The average value of the time during which the light-emitting element is illuminated during the predetermined game is the average of the time during which other lamps (red LEDs mounted on a board provided with decorations on the game board 504) are lit during the predetermined game. It is characterized by being set longer than the value.

(c) Effects of the Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is configured in white, when the light emitting element is turned off, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover. Even if it is seen through, the appearance of the decorative lamp part is not deteriorated.
In addition, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate. Since the surface is composed of white, it is possible to make it appear that the light emitting element emits light in the set color.
Furthermore, even in a predetermined game in which the lottery means does not win, a beautiful performance using the light-emitting element can be presented to the player.

27. original invention 27
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 27 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a title display section that emits light in the form of characters or the like.
In a conventional game machine, a title display section (illumination unit) is provided on the upper part of the front surface, and characters, etc. attached to the title display section are displayed to the player by emitting light from an LED provided inside the title display section. A visibly displayed method is known (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-312984).
In the above-described conventional game machine, stamper processing is applied to the inner surface of the lens portion provided in the title display portion, and light emitted from the LED is diffused by the stamper processing so that the entire surface of the lens portion emits light.
Here, the "stamping" is to form fine dots, which are concave portions of a predetermined shape, on the inner surface of the lens portion at a predetermined density. This concave portion has a square shape or a round shape. The quadrangular recess has a planar slope, and the round recess has a curved slope. Then, the concave portions on the inner surface of the lens portion formed by stamper processing refract or reflect the light emitted from the LED so that the entire surface of the lens portion appears to emit light.
However, even if the light emitted from the LED is diffused by stamper processing so that the entire surface of the lens portion emits light, the player who sees the title display portion may feel dazzled. etc. becomes difficult for the player to recognize.
The original problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent a player who sees the title display from feeling dazzled, and to make it easier for the player to recognize characters, etc. attached to the title display.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 27 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
A light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than a light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.

28. original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 28 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 28 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
a lens portion (670, 615d) provided to cover the light emitting element;
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
The light diffusing portion in the predetermined title display portion includes a texturing portion (615f) formed on the surface of the lens portion in the predetermined title display portion, and the lens portion and the light emission in the predetermined title display portion. and a light diffusing sheet (615g) placed between the elements.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 28 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
In addition, the predetermined title display portion is formed from the texturing portion formed on the surface of the lens portion in the predetermined title display portion and the light diffusion sheet disposed between the lens portion and the light emitting element in the predetermined title display portion. By configuring the light diffusing portion in the above, the light diffusing rate of the light diffusing portion can be increased, so that the player can be prevented from feeling glare. Characters can be easily recognized by the player.

29. original invention 29
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 29 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 29 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
A lamp substrate (right frame lamp substrate 621, title display substrate 615a) on which light emitting elements (LED 641a etc.) are mounted,
a lens portion (670, 615d) provided to cover the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate;
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
The maximum distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the predetermined title display portion is defined as a distance "M1";
The maximum distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in the direction perpendicular to the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the predetermined side lamp portion is defined as a distance "M2";
The distance "M1" is set shorter than the distance "M2".

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
Further, by setting the distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in the predetermined side lamp portion longer than the distance from the lamp substrate to the lens portion in the predetermined title display portion, light diffusion in the predetermined side lamp portion can be achieved. Even if the light diffusion rate of the part is lower than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion part in the predetermined title display part, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling glare.

30. original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 30 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 30 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
luminance adjusting means (546) for adjusting the luminance of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The luminance adjusting means is configured to change the luminance of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion and the luminance of the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion at the same rate of change. do.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 30 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
In addition, when the brightness of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion is lowered (darkened), the brightness of the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion can also be lowered (darkened) at the same rate of change. It is possible to prevent glare from being felt in a predetermined title display portion.

31. original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 31 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 31 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
luminance adjusting means (546) for adjusting the luminance of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjusting means adjusts the rate of change of the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section when changing the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section. It is characterized in that the rate of change in luminance of the light-emitting element of a predetermined side lamp portion is made larger than that of the light-emitting element.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 31 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
In addition, if the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion is lowered (darkened), the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display portion can be further lowered (darkened), so that the player can easily select the desired title. It is possible to prevent glare from being felt on the display unit.

32. original invention 32
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 32 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 32 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section,
The light emission control means controls the time for causing the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section to emit light when executing a predetermined effect for causing the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section to emit light. is controlled to be shorter than the time during which the light-emitting element of the predetermined side lamp section emits light.
In addition, the original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section,
The light emission control means controls the time for blinking the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section when executing a predetermined effect of blinking the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section. is controlled to be shorter than the blinking time of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
In addition, when the predetermined effect is executed, the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display portion are lighted or blinked is shorter than the time for which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion are lighted or blinked. It is possible to prevent glare from being felt on the display unit.

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 33 Same as the problem of Original Invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 33 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section,
In a game standby state, the light emission control means controls the light emission time of the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion to be longer than the light emission time of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
Further, in the game standby state, the emission time of the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion is set longer than the emission time of the light emitting element of the predetermined side lamp portion, thereby making the game machine more conspicuous. A player can be guided to play a game on the gaming machine.

34. original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 34 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 34 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
A predetermined title display section (615) that is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine and emits light in the form of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section,
The light emission control means is characterized in that, when a predetermined error occurs, the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion is extinguished.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
In addition, when a predetermined error occurs, by turning off the light-emitting element of the predetermined title display portion, the occurrence of the predetermined error can be easily noticed by the player or hall clerk.

35. original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 35 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 35 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
An upper lamp part (610) provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine,
The upper lamp part
A predetermined title display portion (615) that emits light in the form of letters or the like;
and a peripheral decorative portion (616) other than the title display portion,
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion, the predetermined title display portion and the peripheral decorative portion,
The light emission control means controls the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion and the light emitting element of the peripheral decorative portion to emit light in different patterns. and the light-emitting elements are controlled to emit light in the same pattern for a longer period of time.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 35 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
Further, the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display portion and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion emit light in the same pattern during the time period during which the light-emitting elements of the predetermined title display portion and the light-emitting elements of the peripheral decorative portion emit light in different patterns. Since it is longer than the time, it is possible to diversify the pattern of presentation using the predetermined title display portion and peripheral decoration portion.

36. original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 36 Same as the problem of the original invention 27.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 36 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment (A)) is
A predetermined side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) provided on at least one side of the front surface of the game machine (pachinko game machine 500);
An upper lamp part (610) provided on the upper part of the front surface of the gaming machine,
The upper lamp part
A predetermined title display portion (615) that emits light in the form of letters or the like;
and a peripheral decorative portion (616) other than the title display portion,
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light-emitting element (LED 641a, etc.);
A light diffusion part (670a, 615e) that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
Light emission control means (547) for controlling light emission of the light emitting elements in the predetermined side lamp portion, the predetermined title display portion and the peripheral decorative portion,
When a specific lottery result that shifts to a game state advantageous to the player is obtained, the light emission control means causes the light emitting element of the predetermined title display portion to emit light only when the specific lottery result is obtained. It is characterized by controlling to emit light at

(c) Effect of Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined title display portion is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion portion in the predetermined side lamp portion. The predetermined title display section can prevent the player from feeling glare than the predetermined side lamp section, and the player can recognize characters, etc. attached to the predetermined title display section. can be made easier.
Further, when the result of the specific lottery is obtained, the light-emitting element of the predetermined title display part emits light in a pattern that emits light only when the result of the specific lottery is obtained. can be made easier.

37. original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting elements controlled by a main control means.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known to have a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) controlled by a main control means (main board) (for example, JP-A-2017-047069).
Specifically, the main control means is connected to a main control display device having 26 LEDs LED "A" to LED "Z". In addition, among the 26 LEDs, eight of LED "G" to LED "N" constitute the first special symbol display portion. Furthermore, the main control means performs variable display and stop display of the first special symbol by turning on or off the eight LEDs that constitute the first special symbol display section. In particular, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit, two of the LED "M" and LED "N" are blinking every 100 msec blinking display I do. Then, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display section.
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, only two LEDs, LED "M" and LED "N", blink during the variable display of the first special symbol, so the presence or absence of failure of other LEDs is checked. I can't.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to confirm the presence or absence of failure of the light-emitting elements controlled by the main control means after the game start condition is satisfied and before the game result can be displayed. is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 37 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Main control means (530) for controlling the progress of the game;
A light-emitting element A (LED531a), a light-emitting element B (LED531b) and a light-emitting element C (LED531c) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means satisfies the conditions for starting the game (the game ball enters the starting port 532, When the starting port switch 533 is turned on), all of the light-emitting element A, light-emitting element B, and light-emitting element C are turned on and off at least once, after which the game result can be displayed (special It is characterized by controlling so that the pattern is stopped and displayed).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, light-emitting element A, light-emitting element B, and light-emitting element C are activated at least once after the game start condition is satisfied and before the game result can be displayed. Since they are lit and extinguished, it is possible to confirm whether or not these light emitting elements are lit, and it is possible to confirm whether or not these light emitting elements are faulty.

38. original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 38 Same as the problem of the original invention 37.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention 38 (Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Main control means (530) for controlling the progress of the game;
A light-emitting element A (LED531a), a light-emitting element B (LED531b) and a light-emitting element C (LED531c) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means is
A lottery means (555) that performs a lottery based on a random number value obtained by winning a prize in the starting port (532);
holding means (557) for holding a random number acquired by winning a prize in a starting slot until starting the variable display of symbols corresponding to the lottery results based on the random number,
The main control means provides a low probability state in which the probability of winning by the lottery means is a predetermined probability in a situation where the light emitting element A is lit, the light emitting element B is extinguished, and the light emitting element C is also extinguished, or the predetermined probability. In the case of a high probability state with a higher probability and the number of random numbers reserved in the reserve means being "0", when the lottery means does not win and the variable display of symbols is started. , the light-emitting element A, the light-emitting element B, and the light-emitting element C are all turned on and off at least once, and then the variable display of the pattern is finished.

(c) Effect of the Original Invention 38 According to the original invention, at least one light emitting element A, one light emitting element B, and one light emitting element C are displayed during the period from the start of the pattern variation display to the end of the pattern variation display. Since the lights are turned on and off several times, it is possible to confirm whether or not these light emitting elements are turned on, and it is possible to confirm whether or not these light emitting elements are faulty.

10, 10A slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 21 Production lamp (decorative lamp part)
22 speaker 23 image display device 24 operation button 25 operation instruction lamp 26 upper frame lamp portion 26a upper frame lamp substrate 26b upper frame lamp cover 26d peripheral decorative portion 27 right frame lamp portion 27a right frame lamp substrate 27b right frame lamp cover 27c right frame Lamp base 27d Lens portion 27e Light diffusion portion 27f Texturing portion 27g Auxiliary lens portion 27h Side wall portion 27i Decorative portion 28 Left frame lamp portion 28a Left frame lamp substrate 28b Left frame lamp cover 28d Lens portion 28e Light diffusion portion 28f Texturing portion 29 Title display portion 29a Title display substrate 29b Title display cover 29d Lens portion 29e Light diffusion portion 29f Texturing portion 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 42a stop button 42b stopper 42c coil spring 42d moving piece 42e detection sensor 43 checkout switch 44a, 44b insertion sensor 45 blocker 46 passage sensor 47 medal slot 47a medal guard 47b Medal holder 48 Shoot passage 49 Shoot sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a screw hole 50b connector 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROMs
55 Main CPU
56 board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Crimped portion 57b Gate mark 57c Indented portion 57d Projection 57e Projection 58 Lower cover 58a Crimped portion 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 59a Insertion detection LED
59b Left stop operation detection LED
59c Medium stop operation detection LED
59d Right stop operation detection LED
59e Start operation detection LED
59f left index detection LED
59g middle index detection LED
59h Right index detection LED
61 Winning Lottery Means 62 Winning Flag Control Means 63 Push Order Instruction Number Selection Means 64 Effect Group Number Selection Means 65 Reel Control Means 66 Winning Judgment Means 67 Payout Means 71 Control Command Transmission Means 73 Set Value Display LED
74 management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display substrate 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3-bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROMs
85 Sub CPU
86 electrolytic capacitor 87 sub-board case 88 selection switch 88a upward switch 88b downward switch 88c rightward switch 88d leftward switch 89 production switch 91 production output control means 92 brightness adjustment means 93 light emission control means 101 hopper disk 102 holding section 103 ejection Part 110 reel base 120 reel control board 121 reel board case 130 passage forming member 131 upper medal receiving opening 132 returning medal passage 133 lower medal receiving opening 134 paid-out medal passage 151 setting key insertion opening 152 setting key switch 153 setting change (reset) switch 160a-160d LED (full color LED)
300 Relay board 300a to 300c Connectors 500, 500A, 500B Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 upper tray 507 lower tray 508 firing handle 510 power board 511 power switch 512 firing board 513 firing device 520 payout control board 521 key insertion slot 522 door open switch 523 frame open switch 524 payout device 525 external terminal board 530 main control board (main control means)
530a hole 531 special pattern display device 531a to 531h LED
532 Start port 533 Start port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h connectors 539b' to 539h' connector legs 540 sub-control board 541 production lamp (decorative lamp part)
542 speaker 543 image display device 544 selection switch 544a upward switch 544b downward switch 544c rightward switch 544d leftward switch 545 production switch 546 brightness adjustment means 547 light emission control means 550 substrate case 555 lottery means 556 pattern control means 557 reservation means 560 Upper case 560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Crimp part 563a-563g Opening part 564 Boss 565 Side wall 570 Lower case 570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 572 Crimp part BH, JL Harness 610 Upper frame lamp part 611 Upper frame right lamp substrate 612 Top Frame Left Lamp Substrate 613 Upper Frame Lamp Cover 615 Title Display Part 615a Title Display Substrate 615b Title Display Cover 615c Title Display Base 615d Lens Part 615e Light Diffusion Part 615f Texturing Part 615g Light Diffusion Sheet 616 Peripheral Decorative Part 620 Right Frame Lamp Part 621 Right frame lamp substrate 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp part 631 Left frame lamp substrate 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to 641k LED (full color LED)
642a to 642c connector 650 right base member 651 upper frame right board mounting portion 652 upper frame right cover mounting portion 653 right frame board mounting portion 654 right frame cover mounting portion 661a to 661e board supporting ribs 662a to 662b cover fitting groove 670 lens portion 670a Light diffusion part 670b Texturing part 681 Screw bosses 682a to 682c Positioning bosses 683a to 683c Screws 684 Screw holes 685a to 685b Positioning holes 686a to 686b Fixing holes 687 Projections 688 Screw shafts 689a to 689c Screw heads

Claims (1)

a predetermined side lamp portion provided on at least one side portion of the front surface of the gaming machine;
Provided on the upper part of the front face of the game machine, it is provided with a predetermined title display part that emits light in the shape of characters, etc.
The predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion each include:
a light emitting element;
a light diffusing part that diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting element,
the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined title display section is set higher than the light diffusion rate of the light diffusion section in the predetermined side lamp section;
brightness adjusting means for adjusting the brightness of the light-emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp portion and the predetermined title display portion;
The brightness adjusting means adjusts the rate of change of the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined title display section when changing the brightness of the light emitting elements of the predetermined side lamp section and the predetermined title display section. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to increase the rate of change in luminance of said light emitting element of a predetermined side lamp portion.

Images